Introduction Just like social and political development, economic development is also one element of the more comprehensive notion of development. This is the reason why many economists refer development as an assignment and a procedure. As a procedure or process, development implies various tasks done in different sectors of economy to improve the status quo of underdeveloped, developing, rising and recently industrialized countries.
On the other hand, development as an assignment or project implies the premeditated strategies aimed at improving the country’s national economic growth. In the recent times, developing countries such as Bangladesh have made deliberate changes in national agenda by shifting from free trade concepts to globalization projects. The main aim of a globalization project is to encourage economic development, which will enhance national productive capacity.
However, to achieve high productive capacity, countries must enact polices aimed at enhancing agriculture, increase labor and investment opportunities, improve living standards, and trim down poverty rates. Through borrowing from domestic and international financial institutions like IMF and World Bank, Bangladesh has managed to improve in key sectors of economy. (Hossain 1-3).
Economic Development in Bangladesh Although there have been major economic improvements in literacy, birth control, poverty diminution and infant mortality the country has failed to tackle inequalities arising from wealth and income, improve infrastructure and energy supply. In a World Bank report released in 2007, Bangladesh has the capacity to achieve gross national income of US$875 if only it enhances its industrial base, competes in global markets and carry out metropolitan economic development.
Nevertheless, the country will not achieve this unless it operates under sustained growth rate of 7.5 percent. The major setback surrounding Bangladesh’s slow economic growth lies in political havoc, global economic changes and natural hazards. The country has failed to achieve its projected annual growth rate amid laying economic plans.
(World Bank p. 1)
In 1991, Bangladesh government engaged in financial reforms and trade liberalization in order to attract foreign investment. Additionally, it initiated programs aimed at empowering the poor financially to start small medium enterprises for poverty eradication.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More By 1996, the country had achieved a growth rate of 5.5 percent. The 1999 floods and rise in gas and electricity prices saw the economy drop to a growth rate of 5.3 percent. At the dawn of the 21st century, Bangladesh embarked in monetary expansion coupled with borrowing from domestic banks and financial institutions like IMF and World Bank. The government used finances from IMF to pay wages and deploy infrastructure paramount to jumpstart economic development.
The roles played by World Bank and IMF cannot be underestimated. In fact, the World Bank has initiated many projects in Bangladesh aimed at economic development. Microfinance institutions in Bangladesh rely on funds from World Bank to reach out poor people in the society. (Holmes, Farrington, Taifur, and Slater 3-13).
Bar Graph Representing Tax in Total Revenue (World Bank, World Development Indicators 1)
Microfinance The economic development of Bangladesh will largely depend on how much the country invests in microfinance to reduce poverty levels and initiate infrastructural development. As a leader in rice production, microfinance credits will assist poor people to start small businesses and participate in development. World Bank statistics indicate that Bangladesh in the country with highest number of microfinance borrowers.
In Bangladesh, non-governmental organizations play a major role in offering micro-credits to people who will then invest in small medium enterprises. Through World Bank and other financing bodies, non-governmental organizations in Bangladesh have increased their operations all over the country thus, setting the runoff for economic development.
In most cases, the trade-off period between sustainability and outreach provided by World Bank gives these NGOs short trade-off periods hence allowing micro-credit beneficiaries more time to develop. The World Bank believes that the established micro-credit programs can be the best avenue of economic development and accountability to donor resources.
For a country like Bangladesh with poor financial markets, the preamble of microfinance is indeed a financial novelty aimed at starting financial markets. Started in 1970s, microfinance has been vital in revenue generation to low income earners. Currently, many people who do not have bank accounts can access microfinance from non-governmental organizations, which will help them start small business enterprises.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Concepts of the Economic Development and Microfinance in Bangladesh specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Thus, microfinance is all about establishing easier financial solution that will enable the poor people reach credit and savings easily. World Bank research shows that poverty-stricken Bangladesh citizens cannot get credit form local banks, as they are unable to meet the expected collateral. This leaves bank credits to rich Bangladesh citizens hence, economic stagnation.
The main reason of introducing microcredit is to empower poor citizens to generate personal revenues in line with World Bank’s policy of minimizing poverty levels. In most cases, these micro credits target Bangladesh citizens who do not own land together with women. From World Bank statistics, about 90 percent of people in Bangladesh who receive micro credits are women. (Khandker 263-286).
With microfinance, women engage in informal activities characterized by low market demands and returns. Through this, women generate revenue that discourages poverty hence, economic development. The idea of microfinance roots from the World Bank policies and the millennium development goals.
In order to reach industrialized state, both underdeveloped and developed countries must look for ways of ending poverty and the best way to do this is through introduction of microfinance. Today, Bangladesh is a leader in microfinance thanks to initiative starters, Grameen Bank. Supported by World Bank, Grameen Bank became the first financial institution in Bangladesh to offer micro credits to low income earners.
On realizing its importance to economic development, Bangladesh people and non-governmental organizations became the first to support the initiative. This is because; Grameen Bank offered collateral free microfinance with up to 50 weeks maturity period and weekly reimbursement. Furthermore, Grameen Bank did not restrict its loan into financial sectors but instead, allowed people from every sector to reach micro credits and empower themselves economically.
For instance, farmers could go for an agricultural credit, businesspersons go for cooperative credit and consumers settle on consumer micro credits. With time, Grameen bank became a very successful financial institution especially in microfinance. This challenged many organizations and later started offering micro credits to low income earners in Bangladesh.
Today, there are as many as organizations offering microfinance solutions to poor people aimed at eradicating poverty, fostering family planning, providing affordable health care, and empowering women economically. For example, if women fail to access land, they can opt for micro credits, which will empower them to participate in informal income generating activities like horticulture and betel leaf agriculture. (Marilou 41-48).
Not sure if you can write a paper on Concepts of the Economic Development and Microfinance in Bangladesh by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More (Davis 1).
World Bank Impact on Child Labor in Bangladesh World Bank policies on child labor have been imperative in setting out economic development agenda in Bangladesh. The prevailing social and economic realities in Bangladesh have made child labor an accepted thing. Until the intervention of World Bank, UNICEF and International Labor Organization, child labor has been domineering in Bangladesh. The poor families largely rely on child labor to generate income for survival.
Interestingly, the rich merchants in Bangladesh enjoy employing children as they pay them less wages. In a move aimed at ending this vice and enhance economic development, the World Bank provides a framework policy of awarding micro credits to low income earners, which will empower families and stop depending on child labor. Child labor denies children the right to get education and participate in other activities like leisure and play.
World Bank data shows that about 5 million children aged between 5 and 14 engage in active child labor with only 25 percent attending school during part-time. In addition to this, rapid urbanization has made children move into urban areas in search for job opportunities. However, when they fail to secure such opportunities, they turn into criminal gangs.
Those who are lucky enough to secure jobs in garment, sugar, leather, pharmaceutical and steel factories, work for at least 28 hours and leave 222 taka equivalent to US$3.3 per week. This is according to International Monetary Fund. The International Monetary Fund and World Bank have been imperative in providing funds to organizations and banks and encouraging land less people to borrow and invest in business opportunities.
In its report, World Bank found out that 40 percent of household who borrow micro credits have their children completing school without necessarily engaging in child labor. The World Bank has initiated projects for such as BEHTRUWC aimed at building free learning centers in poor regions to discourage child labor. (UNICEF Bangladesh 1-5).
Child Labor Statistics in Bangladesh Working Children Aged 5-17 7, 400, 000 Working children aged 5-14 4,700, 000 Child laborers aged 5 and 17 3, 200, 000 Children doing hazardous jobs, aged 5-17 1, 300, 000 Domestic Child Workers 421, 000 (Source: International Labor Organization)
The Impact of World Bank Loans on Water Availability in Bangladesh The World Bank has pumped in many resources and funds in Bangladesh aimed at initiating water projects. In a move aimed at economic development in Bangladesh, the World Bank seeks to assist Dhaka Water and Sewerage Authority with US$100 million to initiate water projects in rural and urban areas in line with Bangladesh’s six-year economic development strategy.
For instance, small towns and rural areas that did not have access to this important basic commodity can now smile thanks to the Bangladesh Water Supply Program Project (BWSPP), which has connected water supplies into citizen reach. However, this could never have been a reality had it not been World Bank funding.
With a funding of US$40 million from World Bank, the Bangladesh Water Supply Program Project aims to supply water to rural areas and small towns in line with the millennium development goals of 2015. This project is just a continuation of yet another World Bank funded project, Arsenic Mitigation Water Supply Project. Additionally, the project aims at providing pathogen-free and arsenic-free water to reduce chances of water-borne diseases. (World Bank 1).
Trade liberalization policy and its impact on the Bangladesh Economy Trade liberalization and structural modification programs in Bangladesh are integral programs aimed at setting Bangladesh economy on track. Aimed at pumping money into the agribusiness sector, the program will streamline the sector in order to become sustainable.
Trade liberalization is imperative to poverty eradication and economic development. Developing countries such as Bangladesh depend on agriculture as the backbone of economic development. For instance, 52 percent of Bangladesh citizens engage in agriculture for sustainability.
However, the introduction of World Bank and IMF liberalization and de-collectivization programs in agribusiness has brought some changes in household economy. Moreover, the Bangladesh’s involvement in international trade is a step in the right direction and one towards reduction of poverty and economic development. Those who live in rural areas are the major beneficiaries of this program and accounts 59 percent of Bangladesh citizens living below the poverty line.
For example, the input and output of market-oriented alterations, tariff restructuring, and the reshuffle of export and import reforms have set the pace for economic development. Additionally, the introduction of static trade policy and fiscal policy has increased household economy by 50 percent. Thus, market liberalization will open new avenues for Bangladesh’s economic development. (Hossain 1-11).
World Bank Policies and their Impact on Women’s Economic Status in Bangladesh Women are the most affected group in Bangladesh economy. Composing the majority with no means of generating money, the World Bank sought to invest microfinance programs in order to empower them. However, through World Bank programs, the economic status of women has risen by 39 percent.
In fact, women are the most beneficiaries of microfinance credits in Bangladesh. Majority of them do not own land and the only option left for them is to borrow money from organizations, which will enable them operate informal activities. Through micro credits provided by World Bank and other financial institutions, idle women are now productive.
As of now, women participate in many socio-economic activities, which enable them to raise families without any difficulty. Micro credit renders have so far invested in women US$ 1.4 billion, employed 70, 000 people (20 percent women), and empowered economically 7.2 million Bangladesh women. (Goetz and Sen 1-8).
Sources of Funds and Financial Sustainability in Bangladesh
Conclusion Bangladesh has made significant moves towards economic development amid challenges like slow economic reforms, lack of government owned enterprises and poor energy supplies. Furthermore, Bangladesh still lags behind in terms of foreign trade and its absence in foreign markets is a blow to economic development. Currently, the government has embarked on building an infrastructural base for foreign investment. Moreover, the recent liberalization of capital markets is a step towards economic development.
The availability of foreign aid from World Bank, IMF and other development partners will see Bangladesh achieve economic targets by the year 2015. According to World Bank, the reduction of foreign dependence by 10 percent, 18 percent export growth that amounts to US$10.5 billion, and 25 percent increase in remittance will see Bangladesh’s economy grow by 6.5 percent in 2010.
On the other hand, the efficient utilization of microfinance witnessed so far, has increased household economy hence reducing poverty levels. Nevertheless, the government together with domestic microfinance institutions should develop non-financial and financial products to empower all social groups and jumpstart economic development.
Works Cited Davis, John. NGOs and Development in Bangladesh. 2006. Web.
Goetz, Ahmed, Sen, Gupta. Who takes the credit? Gender, power and control over loan use in rural credit programmes in Bangladesh. Working paper: Institute of Development Studies. Brighton: University of Sussex. 1994. Print.
Holmes, Rebecca, Farrington, John, Taifur, Rahman and Slater, Rachel. Extreme poverty in Bangladesh: Protecting and promoting rural livelihoods London: Overseas Development Institute. 2008. Print.
Hossain, Mian. Poverty Alleviation through Agriculture and Rural Development in Bangladesh. Centre for Policy Dialogue, 39, 2004, 1-11.
International Labor Organization. Baseline Survey on Child Domestic Labor in Bangladesh. 2006. Print.
Khandakar, Muzharul. Micro-Finance-Bangladesh. 2010. Web.
Khandker, Sayma. Microfinance and Poverty: Evidence Using Panel Data from Bangladesh World Bank Economic Review, 19 (2), 2005, 263-286.
Marilou, Jane. Microfinance in Bangladesh: Emerging Policy Issues. Dhaka: The University Press Limited. 2007. Print.
UNICEF Bangladesh. Child Labor in Bangladesh. 2010. Web.
World Bank. Projects- Bangladesh: Bangladesh Water Supply Program Project. 2004. Web.
The Crucible Movie Review – Essay Example essay help online: essay help online
The Crucible, set in a theocratic society, is a 1996 film, based on Arthur Miller’s play of the same name and it features high-profile stars like Daniel Day-Lewis (John Proctor) and Winnona Ryder (Abigail Williams), and the impressive Paul Scofield (John Danforth) and Joan Allen (Elizabeth Proctor) in supporting roles.
The film’s writer himself, Arthur Miller, does the screenplay while Nicholas Hytner is the director. Most scenes in the movie were filmed on Choate Island in Essex, Massachusetts, and they represent the events that took place in the Salem during the seventeenth century. The occurrences portrayed in the film have recurred with astonishing inescapability all through the history of humankind.
The film and the play versions of The Crucible have many parallels. The 1953 play was written during the House Committee on Un-American Activities investigations. During the investigations, Miller was summoned to give his testimony in 1956.
And, even though the play can be considered as an historical allegory for the events that took place during this era, its true worth is found in its capability to be re-construed so that it can fit in any era.
Undeniably, the play’s rich themes, such as intolerance, thirst for power, the need to be accountable for our actions, public and private moralities, and the role that hysteria can play in tearing apart a community, are universal in scope.
Although Miller has never consented to the historical accuracy of the story, most of the events in the story match up with the occurrences in Salem, Massachusetts during the seventeenth century. During that time, superstition was rampant in Puritan town and about nineteen villagers were hanged as witches, four died in prison, and one was tortured to death for refusing to answer questions.
It was a period, similar to that in the U.S. in the mid-twentieth century, when a simple allegation could conceal ones fate. In addition, justice was regarded as secondary to saving a life during that era in America.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The film opens with an astonishing depiction of the event that set all the trials in motion. A number of Salem village girls gather in the woods where they chant and dance, wishing for men that they love to fall in love with. However, the arrival of the local preacher Reverend Parris (Bruce Davison) spoils the party.
Two of the girls subsequently fall into coma-like states. This makes everyone to start suspecting witchcraft as the cause of the misfortune. In order to save themselves from the noose since they confessed to performing witchcraft, the girls plead for their lives. Soon, the girls face trials in which the condemned are arrested. On the other hand, the innocent who do not confess are hanged.
The film that runs for one hundred and twenty-four minutes is rated PG-13 because of the intense portrayal of the Salem Witch Trials. The film is due to the outstanding recreation of the play for the screen. Unquestionably, the storytelling is top-quality, the visual style is perfect, and it is a powerful, thought-provoking production.
All through the film, the atmosphere is maintained. This serves the purpose of creating some original suspense. The crucible is considered as one of the best movies from 1996 and its classic re-interpretation assures us that it will become a component of the film history.
Essay 2: Argument Synthesis essay help free
For your second assignment, you will be critically responding to a prompt related to our readings
in Chapter 27 of your Everything’s an Argument textbook, “How Has the Internet Changed the
Meaning of Privacy?”
The Essay Prompt to answer:
The essays “70 Percent of Employers are Snooping Candidates’ Social Media Profiles”
(pages 708-09) and “Congress Let Internet Providers ‘Spy On’ Your Underwear Purchases,
Advocacy Group Says” (pages 713-17) address the question of privacy and the right
different entities have to personal information. In these essays, the writers consider the
definition of privacy and whether the government and companies have the right to access
and use the information for data collection and other purposes. Using these essays as support,
what right do you think companies and the government have to access users’ private
information? What responsibility do you think companies and users have with regard to
protecting this information? If users choose to share their personal information, do
companies have the right to use it however they wish? Why or why not?
A successfully written paper will contain the following components:
The length of your essay should be four to five pages, typed, double-spaced, with proper MLA formatting, heading, and Works Cited page.
The essay should contain a strong thesis statement that responds completely to the essay prompt.
Make use of your skills of critical thinking and analysis to respond fully to the prompt;
Unless sharing personal experience or anecdotes, there should be no first-person used in this essay;
Please work with at least three sources (one textbook essay from Chapter 26, Orenstein’s article, or Frontline: Digital Nation, one library electronic database source, and one credible Internet source). You are welcome to use more than three sources.
When using your sources, please make sure you synthesize them. This means having the sources in conversation with another and blended among paragraphs. You should not deal with only one source per paragraph; otherwise, it begins to read like a summary of each source.
Use at least two direct quotes from each source to adequately support your argument so at least 6 quotes are needed. Make sure you include proper attribution, citation, and commentary with your quotes.
Use strong grammar, punctuation, and spelling to the best of your ability.
Lessons learnt from Les Miserables and The Kite Runner Essay college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help
Morality finds voice through minor characters. This is observable in case of both Les Miserables and The Kite Runner. The main theme of redemption is similar in both the concert Les Miserables and the novel The Kite Runner. Morality presides through the presence of minor characters – animate or inanimate.
In case of the musical and the novel, it is reflected through minor, nondescript characters. Both Les Miserables and Kite Runner narrate the process of redemption, and that is through human deed (Llosa 101; Hayes 95). In this story of redemption, there is a constant presence of two characters, which stay away from the hubbub of the main plot and remain as a constant remainder of morality or conscience.
These characters almost act as guiding angels who keep the mind of the main characters on the path to redemption. These characters are Bishop Myriel in Les Miserables and Rahim Khan in The Kite Runner. This essay discusses the way these two characters shaped the path to redemption for the other, more vital characters, and the way they became the moral voices.
Bishop Myriel and Rahim Khan are minor but essential part in both the musical and the novel. The candlesticks given to Valjean by Bishop Myriel are symbolic of the transgression of a hardened convict to a life of good. The Bishop’s act of mercy and sympathy transforms the life of a treacherous and conniving convict.
The Bishop welcomes the tired and starving convict under his shelter in the musical, and gives him food and “bed to rest till morning” (Hugo Act 1, On Parole). In the solo sung by the Bishop in the musical (Valjean Arrested, Valjean Forgiven) the Bishop helps in saving Valjean by misleading the policemen stating that he had given the candlesticks to Valjean as gifts and given two more to sell them. This act ensures freedom for Valjean from both the authorities and the symbolic freedom from evil, as is expressed by the Bishop:
And remember this, my brother,
See in this some high plan.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More You must use this precious silver
To become an honest man.
By the witness of the martyrs,
By the passion and the blood,
God has raised you out of darkness:
I have bought your soul for God. (Hugo Act 1, Valjean Arrested/Valjean Forgiven)
Thus, Myriel becomes the moral force who that changes the course of Vajean’s life. This act teaches us that mercy done to others will save a soul. He becomes the symbol of goodness, a symbol that is shown to Valjean and changes the course of the musical. He shows Valjean the road to redemption, and obliges his mind to follow the path of goodness.
We will write a custom Essay on Lessons learnt from Les Miserables and The Kite Runner specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Rahim Khan is the moral voice in the story The Kite Runner. However, a minor character, and one that has not been developed fully, Rahim Khan plays a vital role in the novel. He was the best friend of Baba (Amir’s father) and a father figure to Amir. Amir often wished that Rahim Khan were his father instead of Baba: “When they left, I sat on my bed and wished Rahim Khan had been my father.” (Hosseini 28)
Rahim Khan is a character that stays away from the main plot or the main character. He is also different from them – from the good characters of Hassan and Ali, and the complete devilish character of Assef, and Baba and Amir lying somewhere in-between. Rahim Khan cannot be categorized in any of these character types. He is almost a celestial figure standing beyond the bounds of moral questioning.
He becomes the guiding light for Amir in his journey to redemption (like Bishop Myriel in Les Miserables). From the very beginning of the story, Rahim Khan had helped Amir and boosted his self-confidence. The note he wrote to Amir showed the character’s support to Amir: “My door is always open to you, Amir jan. I shall hear nay story you have to tell. Bravo.” (Hosseini 28) Rahim Khan told Amir his deepest secret in order to ascertain what was going through his mind.
He told Amir that he could tell him anything he wanted to: “You know, you can tell me anything you want, Amir jan. Anytime.” (Hosseini 87) Amir almost told him his betrayal of friendship towards Hassan but stopped as he thought that Rahim Khan would hate him for this, as he related “For a moment, I almost did tell him. Almost told him everything, but then what would he think of me? He’d hate me and rightfully.” (Hosseini 87) Though Amir did not tell his story to Rahim Khan then, he already knew.
Rahim Khan calls Amir to Pakistan from America and asks him to rescue Hassan and his family from Afghanistan. He is the one who reveal to Amir that Hassan is actually his half-brother. He asked Amir to rescue Sohrab from Afghanistan. When Amir said, “I can’t go to Kabul,” Rahim Khan simply said, “There is a way to be good again.” (198) Rahim Khan showed Amir the “way to end the cycle” (198) and showed the path to redemption.
Bishop Myriel and Rahim Khan are nondescript characters. However, they are the catalyst of the main theme. They become the wind that changes the course of the life of the main characters in the musical as well as in the novel. The right direction that can be found for redemption can be found from simple and non descript characters, rather than the more elaborate and complex characters.
In both Les Miserable and Kite Runner, the direction towards salvation has been clearly etched by two characters who are minor, but are strong in their own accord. Thus, it teaches us that a guiding light may be small, yet is significant in moulding the course of action.
Bibliography Hayes, Judi. In search of The Kite Runner. Danvers, MA: Chalice Press, 2007. Print.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Lessons learnt from Les Miserables and The Kite Runner by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Hosseini, Khaled. The Kite Runner. London: Bloomsbury Publishing, 2003. Print.
Les Miserables 10th Anniversary Concert. By Victor Hugo. Royal Albert Hall Concert , New York. 1995. Concert.
Llosa, Mario Vargas. The temptation of the impossible: Victor Hugo and Les Misérables. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2004. Print.
The Personal Shopper in Marketing Strategy Research Paper a level english language essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Hiring a personal shopper
Benefits of a personal shopper
Introduction Personal shopping is a process through which people are assisted in making purchases through advices and recommendations (Henricks). Though they may be focused on clothing apparels, other personal shoppers, also referred to as sales assistants, diversify their claim to furniture stores (Houston, pp. 114-115).
Self-employed secret shoppers would normally see a buyer in purchasing any element of choice. A personal buyer’s functions range from updating the user what is in practice, to edifying them on appropriate wardrobes. These individuals are better equipped in information related to color coordination and what to embellish in the various seasons.
Hiring a personal shopper While hiring a personal shopper, clothes stores need to look into their qualities requisite to increase sales. They should have some expertise in putting things together, choosing color, and understanding how different cultures and generations get their investment decisions (Houston, pp. 114). One should be able to evaluate the character of clients and see what influences their range of products.
This area is relatively small, with fewer people willing to engage in it compared to more specialized courses. Coaching is administered in class, but the best experience is offered in the field. Training with an established assistant is another better way to gain fluency. A personal shopper who has attended seminars and updating courses is preferred to the average assistant (Houston, pp. 114).
The shopper may be paid either through cuts per sale or an unvarying month-end package. How diverse they are, and whether they can multitask, are crucial to know before engaging one’s services. Personal punters do not need recognized edification; they typically rely on experience, which is a critical component in recruitment (Henricks). Smaller organizations would hire a sales representative before converting them to a private shopper arrangement.
There are other elements to be considered before promoting or directly hiring a sales man. They must posses a propensity for style, an immaculate analysis for aspect, and communication proficiency. Recruiting one affiliated to other retail stores can also be advantageous in order to gain experience, increasing the institutions competitiveness.
Fulltime assistant shoppers earn slightly over $40000 per year. Those who are self employed expect a cut of what is spent, while others are paid at an hourly rate. Those who are more sophisticated and reputable serve exclusive clients who may pay them around $1000 per session (Houston, pp. 114).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Benefits of a personal shopper The flexibility of services offered by these individuals make them relevant for any store intending to make an upbeat statement. Their benefits range from the services they offer both in and out the stores. Some consultants are hired by clients to get them on shopping outings, while other customers want to have their products delivered at home or in their offices for discretion.
There are clients who may see their shopping needs, but are too busy to better their preferences. There are business events, which may require casual dressing, and retaining the demeanor required in front of the employer proves challenging for some clients. The incident may also be abrupt and hence may discourage individuals. An experienced personal shopper is thus required to help the user in a time-saving process in order to look practiced and polished (Henricks).
The sales of such businesses remarkably increase, judging by the response of material owners. The head of an upcoming shopping specialty remarked, “When I started my business, the first step was to get an assistant who acts both as a personal shopper and a consultant.
It was expensive at first, but his value in helping consumers make shopping needs earned their loyalty in our organization hence I am able to make future projections for my business.’’ Their benefits were further emphasized by another retailer. “Most clients want to stay within their budgets and thus are scared of spending. They not only assist customers to my store, but also offer advice on which products to stock and their consumer-friendly prices.”
Implementation of such services in fashion stores like Jacobs, which serve a wider variety of clients contrasting other luxury stores, is positive. Personal shoppers are commonly associated with rich individuals who live lavish lifestyles (Herald and Jessiman). Every buyer has at once faced shopping problems. A customer interviewed agreed to this view. “I am usually intimidated by the selection of some stores and the demoralizing price tags accustomed to such products.
I therefore stopped visiting some stores and made purchases in neighborhood shops. After advice from a friend to consult a personal shopper, my shopping experience became easier. I was informed that all stores, notwithstanding the accompanying price tags of their products, satisfied individual needs at all prices, and it is necessary to obtain an assistant to help locate these products.”
Conclusion The experience provides several challenges, just like any other job, including dealing with finicky clients and justifying their prices (Henricks). Without proper information on the products, a client may make an expensive purchase and then have regrets. The server would thus cover the responsibility for recommendation made, and even destroy their reputation.
We will write a custom Research Paper on The Personal Shopper in Marketing Strategy specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Some clients expect their shoppers to be available whenever they need them even though they may end up not purchasing anything. However, their help in making shopping easier and time-saving cannot be ignored (Houston, pp. 114-115).
Works Cited Henricks, Mark. Starting a business as a personal shopper. Entrepreneur, December 23, 2004. Web.
Herald, Calgary and Jessiman, Meghan. When to hire a personal shopper. Canada.com. lifestyle. Web.
Houston, Kathleen. You want to do what?!: 80 alternative career options. London: Crimson Publishing, 2003. pp 114-115.
Civil Rights Movement Major Events in 1954-1968 Research Paper college essay help online
Introduction Background of the study
The civil rights represents the basic rights that are enjoyed by the people in any given country. These include the right to property ownership, the opportunity for citizens to vote, the rights to freedom of speech and expression among others. These rights protected by governments are in place in order to ensure that no citizen is discriminated against.
In the United States history, citizens particularly the Black Americans were discriminated against for many decades. Black Americans and other minority groups faced many challenges including being discriminated on the basis of their race, culture, and religion. They also faced segregation and violence from other major races in the United States.
In order to fight against these vices, many leaders, activists and the discriminated races organized themselves in groups that came to be referred to as the Civil Rights Movement.
The World War 2 served to change the way in which Black Americans looked at issues of discrimination and segregation. These led to many changes on the part of the American government. One notable change aimed at restoring the rights of those discriminated and segregated took place in 1947 when President Harry S. Truman set up the committee on Civil Rights.
The committee’s mandate was to look into ways of ending the segregation and discrimination by changing the existing laws or proposing the implementation of other laws to protect the rights of the American citizens. However, many people felt that the only way to air their grievances was to act and so they did not let the government implement the proposed changes. Many of the civil rights movements were organized in the Southern States of the United States in 1954-1968.
With the surfacing of the Black Power Movement at around 1966, the activities of the Civil Rights Movement expanded to involve the struggle to restore human dignity, economic and political independence among the discriminated people and the struggle against oppression from the majority whites.
The civil rights activists and groups such as SCLC, SNCC, CORE and NAACP were involved in nonviolent remonstrations and civil insubordinations such as boycotts, sit-ins and marches. Other activities involved fighting against discrimination using various strategies such as lawsuits, reforms in education systems and other lobbying exertions. These protests were opposed by many Local, Federal and State governments.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The ultimate achievements during this period included the passage of the Civil Rights Act in 1964. The provisions of this act provided for the abolition of the discrimination on the basis of race, religion, color and nationality. Earlier on, the groups had managed to win the Brown v. Board of Education of Topeka lawsuit of 1954 in which the Supreme Court declared that there was to be no discrimination between the Blacks and Whites in terms of provision of educational facilities.
Additionally, the movement managed to push for the passage of the Voting Rights Act of 1965 which also enabled people to migrate freely into the United States except the natives of European countries. Moreover, in 1968, the government passed the Fair Housing Act that provided for the freedom of renting, purchasing and sale of housing facilities.
This research paper seeks to highlight the historical events that took place in 1954-1968 in the United States which were instigated by the Civil Rights Movement in the hope of securing the civil and basic political and economic rights of the Black Americans and other minority groups.
The Major Events in the History of Civil Rights Movement in 1954-1968 The Case of Linda Brown versus the Board of Education of Topeka, 1954
This case was instigated by the students’ unrest that occurred during spring 1951 against the Jim Crow laws that provided for segregation between black and white schools. The Monton High School in Prince Edward County was overpopulated and the conditions in the school were not conducive, therefore the students decided to mass act with the help of the NAACP.
This incidence was part of five other cases that are regarded to as the Brown v. Board of Education. In 1954, the US Supreme Court made a ruling to the effect that it was unconstitutional to practice segregation along racial lines. In addition, the Supreme Court also declared two boards of education as being also unconstitutional.
These were the 1899 education board and the 1896 Plessy v. Ferguson provision. This ruling saw an increase in the number of blacks seeking education. Further, the activities of the Black Press in highlighting the stories of professional Blacks with jobs and those leading modest lives helped to encourage more blacks into participating in the educational programmes.
Changes in Tactics from Litigation Strategies to Mass Action The early strategies of Civil Rights Movement involved calling for reforms in the education systems, litigations and rallying for legislative changes. It was not until they won the Linda Brown’s case against the Board of Education of Topeka that the Movement decided to adopt a more radical way of calling for change.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Civil Rights Movement Major Events in 1954-1968 specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This change of tactic saw the emergence of boycotts, marches, sit-ins and freedom rides among other strategies. These were conducted by churches and other community organizations that recruited volunteers who were willing to take part in the mass actions.
This proved to be a more productive means of calling for change as compared to the earlier tactics of filing lawsuits. The first boycott to be staged occurred at a gas station in Mississippi that refused to offer resting areas for Blacks. This was followed by a year-long bus boycott in Montgomery initiated by the Montgomery Improvement Association under the leadership of Dr. Martin Luther King.
This boycott succeeded in wining a Federal Court’s ruling that directed the Montgomery buses to reconcile its bus services.
In 1957, Dr. Luther and other church leaders such as Rev. John Duffy and Rev. T. J. Jemison joined forces to form the Southern Christian Leadership Conference (SCLC) that was involved in provision of training and financial support to Civil Rights activists. SCLC was however non-violent in its course to fight racism and segregation. Further, SCLC was involved in programs that taught literacy among the Blacks in order to enable them to participate in the Voting process.
The Montgomery Bus Boycott (1955-1956) The boycott was brought about by the action of Rosa Park who refused to offer her sit to a white passenger in 1955. She was arrested and charged for violating the provisions of the local bus regulations. She was following the decisions that had been agreed upon during the NAACP meeting in Tennessee in which she was the NAACP secretary.
Her arrest pushed the leadership of NAACP with the support of the larger Montgomery Black Americans to organize a bus boycott that lasted well over one year. The boycott came to an end upon the Federal Court’s ruling of 1956 which forced the Montgomery buses to desegregate their services.
Reuniting Little Rock (1957) The reunion was prompted by the case of nine Black American students who had been chosen to attend the Little Rock Central High School. They were however denied entry into the school due to the presence of the National Guard who had been called upon by the Kansas Governor to prevent the entry of the nine into the school. Earlier on, the federal court had ordered all schools to desegregate their services and accommodate blacks in white schools through the famous Brown decision.
However, the Governor could not agree with the court’s ruling and it had to take President Eisenhower’s intervention that introduced the 101st Airborne Division in order to force the National Guard out and provide protection to the nine students and many more. The move by the Little Rock schools to desegregate inspired other schools in the Southern States to follow the order given by the federal court.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Civil Rights Movement Major Events in 1954-1968 by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The Sit-ins of 1960s It started off as simple sit-in at Woolworth’s organized by four students from the North Carolina Agricultural
Substandard Patient Care or Health Care Delivery Research Paper college application essay help: college application essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Substandard Patient Care or Health Care Delivery
Introduction The world health organization defines health as a condition of absolute physical, mental and social fitness. Thus, the presence of diseases and infirmities do not necessarily reflect unhealthy status. Nevertheless, such infirmities and diseases can heal if patients subject themselves into health care facilities and services.
Perhaps to start with, a health care delivery system comprises of human resources, pharmaceutical drugs, surgical equipments, and other health care services vital to health demands. On the other hand, there are health care facilities such as dispensaries, clinics and hospitals controlled and administered by either the public or private segment. Each of these health care facilities provides range of services.
For example, public health care facilities provide curative and preventive care services while, the private segment deals with curative health care services. Thus, it is evident that there are many factors determining the health of an individual. In most cases, the environment where a person lives is imperative in determining health conditions. (Amanda, 2006, p. 1).
As Michael (2006) notes, in highly populated regions, people seem poor hence, poor health care services. Of course, with the current economic downturn, many people have failed to secure first-rate patient care services. Worse still, health care professionals have made professional mistakes, which have led to many death cases.
Research shows that substandard patient care has worsened the provision of health care services, and together with ignorance and negligence from health care professionals, many will loose life or encounter additional health problems (p.1). At the present, substandard patient cost American taxpayers about US$3 billion per year on Medicare patients alone. Noticeably, the figure will be high we consider other departments. Personally, I have witnessed a number of cases arising from substandard patient care.
In a rather disturbing note, I am able to recall about two medical malpractices done to two close family members. In my own view, substandard health care delivery causes more pain far above than the previous one. Moreover, it leads to leads to additional financial burdens, which many people fail to afford. It has come to my realization that many hospital facilities do not have enough human resource.
The number of nurses attending patients is too low. In fact, some patients die unattended due to the shortage of health care workers. The few health care workers present work for long hours, making them unable to deliver efficiently. In many health care facilities, there is dire demand of health care equipments. (Gerson Lehrman Group, 2009, p. 1).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Substandard Patient Care or Health Care Delivery Substandard patient care occurs due to negligence or medical malpractices of health care workers. For example, it is quite legitimate and non-discriminatory to fire a nurse for failing to offer standard patient care. Not once, I have witnessed a number of cases where nurses fail to deliver due to incompetence.
Nurses who lack professional nursing skills can cause additional health problems or even cause death. For example, one hospital in Oklahoma City recently released one nurse off her duties citing incompetency in work. The nurse who was working in the hospital’s anesthesia care unit had little experience in patient care. During her first weeks at the hospital’s patient care unit, the nurse seemed positive about her tasks. However, her incompetence came into public when I took my sister for a delivery process.
From the first day, I realized something was wrong with the nurse’s attitude. This is because she could not even examine my sister first before proceeding with her professional roles. Worse still, the nurse could not account reports from other patients under her care. She seemed to take more offs without notifying the nurse in charge and therefore leaving patients agonizing. As for my case, the nurse failed to administer some basic drugs properly (IV drip and IV push).
According to medical practitioners, such failures led to my sister develop health care complications while under patient care. In addition to this, the nurse could not even recall professional skills regarding the coding of patients in order to control respiratory distress in my sister. These and many other substandard patient cares left my sister in serious jeopardy. When experienced co-workers examined my sister, they found out that the nurse had participated substandard patient care.
They therefore decided to terminate her contract to retain public confidence. Thus from this particular scenario, it is evident substandard health care causes additional health problems besides increasing the cost of health care services. (Legal Eagle Eye Newsletter for the Nursing Profession, 1996, p. 1).
Five years ago, my grandfather died while undergoing recuperation at the patient care. The circumstances leading to his death resembled that of substandard patient care. My grandfather was suffering from aspiration pneumonia. In order to combat this health problem, the doctors had to carry out a bowel blockage operation.
However, after two weeks, my grandfather died due to wrong operation that caused more pain hence, resulting to his death. My family strongly believes that the hospital erred in patient care. Since the day, my grandfather arrived at the hospital, substandard patient care exhibited. For example, it took the doctors three days to carry out a CT scan test revealing his extended stomach.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Substandard Patient Care or Health Care Delivery specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Inside his stomach, a certain fluid extended all the way to the esophagus thus blocking the bowels. The problem demanded an operation in order to remove the fluid. In that case, surgical doctors settled on the idea of inserting a naso-gastric tube into his stomach aimed at removing the fluid. Nevertheless, these surgical doctors failed to perform the operation on time in what the hospital described as, “a busy patient care day”.
After successful interaction with the hospital staff, we finally took my grandfather to an operation room later in the day. However, the absence of a nurse complicated matters especially on the fact that my grandfather had been vomiting the whole day and needed some patient care.
Consequently, an anesthetist came to perform the operation but did not even have scan results. Definitely, the anesthetist went ahead to carry out a wrong surgery. Under anesthetics, a patient of this kind is likely to vomit when his muscles relax, and by the following morning, my grandfather had vomited two litres of fluid, one of it from the lungs.
The fluid in the lungs had caused serious damages and eventual caused his death. Although the doctor appeared remorseful of his wrong surgery, he blamed substandard patient care as the main cause of my grandfather’s death. The doctor added that under such circumstances, death is unavoidable. (Natalie, 2010, p.1).
Conclusion Many people die because of substandard patient care. The government should institute proper mechanisms of controlling deaths that occur due to substandard patient care. In the past, we have seen some families take health workers in court for their professional mistakes. To some extent, this has made nurses and doctors extra careful when executing their professional skills.
Perhaps, professional medical bodies should enact legislations aimed at discouraging negligence and laziness at work. To some extent, this will improve standards of patient care and health care delivery.
Reference List Amanda, G. (2006). Most Americans Getting Substandard Health Care. Web.
Gerson Lehrman Group. (2009). Negligent Patient Care: The Impact on the Cost of Health Care. Web.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Substandard Patient Care or Health Care Delivery by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Legal Eagle Eye Newsletter for the Nursing Profession. (1996). Web.
Michael, T. (2006). Pleasant Care Nursing Facility Struggles With Quality of Care Lawsuits: Newest Settlement with State Attorney General Will Place Monitor in Facility. Web.
Natalie, A. (2010). Patient’s care ‘substandard’. Web.
Surrealism Development Research Paper essay help site:edu
Introduction The beginning of the twentieth century was marked by major tumultuous changes. World War 1 and the Russian Revolution greatly influenced how people understood the world.
The findings of Freud and Einsten, as well as the technological innovations of the Machine Age, registered distinctively new ‘modernist’ modes of feeling and perception. In cultural terms, more transformed human awareness was progressed by the publication of books that defined the modernist sensibility. The early twentieth century art movements effectively depict this new mind-set.
One of these is the cultural movement called Surrealism. The French poet, Andre Breton, initiated it in 1924. This art and literary movement grew in Europe between The First World War and the Second World War. Surrealism sprang out of the previous Dada movement. It was a way of life that most artists tried to escape their disparities by adopting the Sigmund Freud theories.
The Beginnings and growth of Surrealism Dadaism developed nearly at the same time in Zurich, New York, and Paris during the First World War. It further made appearance in Germany before concentrating in France.
It flourished from 1966 to 1922. With the aim of ridiculing what its adherents regarded to be the worthlessness of the modern world, it promoted anti-war and anti-art works (De la Croix and Tansey, 705). Many people joined the movement since they disputed the bourgeois nationalist and colonialist interests. This is because many of them believed they were the major causes of the First World War.
Therefore, the Dadaists conveyed their denunciation of the ideology using artistic expressions. These expressions appeared to reject the reason and logic of bourgeois capitalist society, which resulted in the First World War. In general, the Dadaists embraced chaos and irrationality.
The movement of Dada was anti-art since anything for which art stood, it depicted as opposite (“Dada and Surrealism, para.1). This was an attempt by the Dadaists to purify art by mocking it. This made the proponents of this movement to develop pieces that were very playful and teasing.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More For example, Marcel Duchamp developed a popular portrait of the Mona Lisa having a mustache. Nearly every Dada piece arouses a reaction, which was the intended objective since the movement hoped to annihilate all the traditional elements of culture and aesthetics. Despite existing for a short time, Dadaism left an enduring legacy to contemporary art, advertising and the social order, and if it were not present, it is unlikely that Surrealism and other modern art movements would have existed.
Surrealism is largely considered as an outgrowth of the earlier Dada movement, but its ideas are better organized and more relevant to the real world (Klingsohr-Leroy and Grosenick, 7). Andre Breton, the founder of Surrealism, was trained in medicine and psychiatry.
During the First World War, he employed his skills in a neurological hospital where he helped soldiers who were suffering from a condition referred to as combat stress reaction or battle fatigue. In the hospital, he found Sigmund Freud’s psychoanalytic methods to be vey helpful in treating the soldiers. When the war ended, Breton moved back to Paris where he joined the Dada movement. While he was in France, together with his two friends, Louis Aragon and Philippe Soupault, he founded the literary journal called
Thereafter, based on Sigmund Freud’s theories that the unconscious was a wellspring of imagination, they started by experimenting with automatic writing in which they spontaneously noted down their thoughts without censoring them. They then published the writings in the journal together with some accounts of dreams.
Breton and Soupault continued their investigations on surrealist automatism and published The Magnetic Fields in 1919, which is considered by most people to be the first truly surrealist text. As they delved deeper into automatism, more and more people embraced surrealist principles since they considered them better approaches for transforming the society than Dada attack on prevailing values.
The surrealist philosophers and artists felt that Dadaism did not allow categories and labels. The proponents of surrealism perceived that ordinary and depictive expressions are essential in liberating the imagination. However, they upheld the idea that the sense of that arrangement ought to be in full arrangement according to the Hegelian dialectric and the Marxist dialectric.
The surrealists adapted the thoughts of Sigmund Freud to suit their own purposes (“Historical Origins of Surrealist, para. 7). They considered Freud’s ideas as the accidental rediscovery of the power of dreams and imagination, which had been hidden for a long time under the purely rational outlook that was common during the early twentieth century.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Surrealism Development specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The surrealists predicted that as the artists would develop perspectives that would give them the strength of freeing themselves from the control of reason, a new intellectual tendency will inevitably come up.
Freud had attempted to define and illustrate the subconscious mind as a genuine phenomenon that controlled thought and behavior; therefore, the surrealists translated this understanding into an artistic and literary methodology that was based on the subconscious and the imagination. They believed that these had been repressed by rationalism, civilization, and progress.
In 1924, the Surrealist movement was officially founded when Breton published the first “Surrealist Manifesto” which defined its intentions (“Surrealism,” para.1).
The document defined Surrealism as “psychic automatism in its pure state by which we propose to express- verbally, in writing, or in any other manner- the real process of thought. The dictation of thought, in the absence of any control exercised by reason and outside any aesthetic or moral concerns” (Leslie, 59). This implies that surrealists advocated for nonconformity, which was not as excessive as that of the Dadaists.
This is because when Dada was existing, it was considered as an art. The document gives many instances in which Surrealist thoughts can be applied to poetry and literature. However, it emphasizes that Surrealist principles are relevant in any circumstance of life. This implies that they are not limited to the artistic realm.
The text outlines the vital role that the earlier Dada movement played in the Development of Surrealism (Hopkins, 17). The manifesto highlights the essence of the dream as a reservoir of Surrealist inspiration and details the experiences of Breton with the surreal in a famous description of a hypnagogic state whereby a strange phrase mysteriously came into his view.
The text, which was written with a great deal of absurdist humor, has references to several precursors of Surrealism that represented the Surrealist spirit before the declaration of the manifesto and the works of other Surrealists, who participated in the development of the Surrealist style, are also included.
The manifesto concludes by affirming that the activities of the movement do not follow any plan or conventional pattern. Besides Breton, other renowned Surrealists, who acknowledged that they are ultimately nonconformists, signed the manifesto.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Surrealism Development by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More After officially launching the movement, Breton and his team published the foundational issue of a journal called La Revolution surrealist (Andrews, 60). Thereafter, publications for the journal, which was considered constantly scandalous and revolutionary, continued up to 1929.
The Surrealists also established the Bureau of Surrealist Research in Paris where they could play collaborative drawing games, discuss the principles of Surrealism, and develop different skills such as automatic drawing. The second Surrealist Manifesto, supervised by Breton, was issued to the public in 1930. The proclamation included anti-idealist principles, which led to the development of hybrid Surrealism. This made the surrealists to reveal the base instincts of humans.
Breton was ruling the Surrealist movement like a dictator. He firmly observed the theories of surrealism. His strong stand made many people to be expelled from the group while others simply defected. One of these is Salvador Dali who was ‘excommunicated’ in 1937 since Breton thought that his theories were misguided. Nonetheless, the other Surrealists, such as Paul Eluard and Robert Desnos, continued publishing their principles until the start of the Second World War.
Even though most Surrealists were poets, others attempted prose writing, for example, Breton successfully published a novel called Nagja. Surrealism had a great influence in the early twentieth century. It motivated related movements in areas such as painting, sculpture, movie production, and performance of plays. More so, it has a lasting influence on the field of creative arts as a whole.
The emerging of groups from surrealism The Surrealists eventually divided into two groups: the Automatists and the Veristic Surrealists. Ortolano explains that the “Automatists were only interested in the artistic expression but oblivious to finding meaning to it, that is, they considered the abstract expression to be more important than analyzing it” (27). Their motto was “No meaning, just expression.” As implied in the earlier sections of this paper, Automatists followed Breton’s form of Surrealistic art.
On the other hand, Veristic Surrealists differed from Automatists by defining the unconscious as psychiatrist Carl Jung visualized it; therefore, they endeavored to communicate deeper thoughts by analyzing the metaphoric importance of the work of art and its relationship with the universal unconscious. Veristic Surrealists held the belief that Surrealism could best express the unconscious when the images of the dreams are captured in an art form and later decoded through analysis.
The universal expression of the unconscious was according to Jung’s position who maintained that every person has an inherent knowledge and comprehension of images that are usually universal in nature and are portrayed in most literature and art.
Two Opposing Approaches to Art The theories of Salvador Dali and Pablo Picasso are the two conflicting art theories that define the direction that art should take in this century. Dali had excellent painterly skills and in the early 1930s, he developed the Paranoic-critical method in the production of paintings and artworks.
This technique requires an artist to let the images to arrive at the conscience. Thereafter, the artist is required to freeze them on a canvas so as to give consciousness ample time for grasping their full meaning. After sometime, he brought in other aspects and called the technique the Oniric – Critical Method.
In this case, the artist is required to concentrate on his dreams, freeze them through art, and simultaneously evaluate them (“History of Surrealism,” para. 15).On the other hand, through embracing the scandal and chaos of Dadaism and the position of the Automatists, Picasso took a different approach to art. He refused to acknowledge the ability to become ‘primitive.’
Since even in his early years he exhibited a mysterious talent in art, he decided that the ingenuity of childhood should form the foundation of art and artists should paint as children, that is, become less preoccupied with the craft. However, Dali was for the idea of upholding the inquisitiveness and enthusiasm of a kid all through the life of a person, not just painting as a kid.
The struggle of Surrealism and its current status Veristic Surrealists assert that one should learn from the mystery of nature. On the other hand, Automatists maintain that one should never become conscious of the mystery of nature. The approach to art that was promoted by Picasso is acceptable by almost everyone. However, few people have embraced the approach that was promoted by Dali.
Currently, Veristic Surrealism aim to seek for freedom and the change of man’s consciousness through visual arts, literature, film, and music. From the beginning of Surrealism, renowned men have struggled with the perennial questioning of philosophy, the investigation of psychology, and the spirit of mysticism with the aim of enabling us consciously develop our full human potential.
Even though surrealism encountered difficulties during the late 20th century and was slowly substituted by the artistic philosophy of modernism, it is still evident today. Surrealist examples exist in modern art and film in an attempt to regain its once major cultural force.
For example, Miyazaki’s 2005 film Howl’s Moving Castle uses aspects of Surrealism to depict the condition of the early twentieth century English towns. Several children in primary grades are instructed on self-portraiture techniques based particularly on the portraits by Picasso, and in literature, magical realism in works by writers such as Gabriel Marquez contain aspects of surrealism.
Future of Surrealism The advent of modernism has made many people to reject Surrealist principles. However, although it has existed in silent seclusion for about a half a century, its evolution will bring a new form of art that will be appealing to everybody. As professional interest in it will be aroused, the world will again experience the aesthetic pleasures on art.
Surrealism is essential in helping us to understand the architecture of the psyche and those who have dedicated their time to analyzing the images of the subconscious can have the opportunity of educating the world on the workings of the spiritual, psychological, and the physical planes of human existence.
Conclusion Surrealism as a cultural movement of visual arts and writings borrowed some of its tenets from the earlier Dada movement. Most of the Surrealist artists had great imagination and the works of the earlier philosophers such as Sigmund Freud and Carl Jung influenced their Surrealistic thoughts. The publication of the Surrealist Manifesto in 1924 served as a turning point for the movement since the declaration enabled it to gain official status.
As Surrealism advanced, two groups of Automatists and Veristic Surrealists emerged from it. Although they have been in silent seclusion for sometime now, their resurgence in the future will ensure that they once again have a dialogue with the public in expressing the workings of the subconscious.
Works Cited Andrews, Wayne. The Surrealist parade. New York, N.Y.: New Directions, 1990. Print.
“Dada and Surrealism.” The artchive. The artchive, n.d. Web.
De la Croix, Horst, and Richard Tansey. Art Through the Ages. Atlanta: Harcourt, Brace,
Supreme Court nominees Essay a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
The Supreme Court (SC)
Criticism of Supreme Court nominees
Concern to Senators
Evasiveness by nominees
Nominees’ responses to criticisms and their opinions
The most valid approach
Introduction Supreme Court nominees evade giving direct answers to statutory performance and other legal issues (Stolberg). This has been a common criticism that Supreme Court nominees stand before qualifying the level. Senators from both sides of the authority either keep such parties or devise propaganda aiming to reduce their votes and chances of qualification. Conversely, the nominees have developed a variety of evasive techniques to these criticisms, and so open varied diverging responses.
The Supreme Court (SC) In the US, this is the highest judicial body, which leads the federal judiciary. It comprises of the chief justice of the US and 8 associate justices nominated by the president and confirmed by the senate. Once appointed, they enjoy life tenure, which may only be terminated through death, retirement, or resignation.
Criticism of Supreme Court nominees SC nominees have always been condemned because of their previous statements and evasiveness of issues. Democrats and republicans have their own tactics to advance viewpoints to qualify nominees. The fitness of the candidate to deliver in the system is scrutinized, often based on responses to legal and statutory interpretations.
Senate republicans reject the ratification of Kagan to the bench, analyzing her dedication to upholding the constitution and whether her countenance would prejudice decisions. They question whether she would be controlled by, or run the constitution. Some argued that she does not satisfy the high standards of the station and did not take liberal commitment to the set laws.
She has on no account been an arbitrator and thus has no relevant experience in the field. Consequently, she may continue the list of judges who craft their own laws rather than interpreting the outlined principles. She also provides lukewarm support for some amendments and her tactics which tend towards the Clinton administration (Bacon).
Fortunately for Kagan, the political situation has not been as active because the oil spill and the Afghanistan war have eclipsed her nomination. Previous nominees underwent more detailed analysis. Preceding candidates have been criticized for issues such as their lack of understanding or short-time service in order occupations (Rutkus).
For example, Clarence Thomas had only served as a judge for less than a year neither was she involved in legal writings. Some groups did not support his stance on affirmative action, believing his decisions would be biased on faith. Other nominees have received criticism for their deeply held religious affiliations.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Concern to Senators The determination of senators to aid the general welfare of the American people would be constrained if justice may be biased. Senators thus focus their issues mainly on the credentials of the nominee understanding the law. Some of the values that these nominees hold may influence their opinions on the bench (Bacon). Some democrats, however, support her, stating that she is an ardent follower of the constitution.
There are senators who vote in nominees based on their proximity to the senator’s constituents. When these nominees are not adequately qualified or reasonably distant, then the senators may make decisions, hugely depending on the current political situation or the views of the president.
Others are undecided on how they should vote, thus this questioning is necessary to make reasonable decisions based on the credibility of the nominee (Rutkus). The questions provide facts on how well the nominee understands the structure and judicial roles, credentials and reputation. They discover how the nominee, if appointed, would upset the stability of the court. Other senators take that opportunity to ask questions which would lead public awareness to concerns in the society or to identify themselves with the issues.
Evasiveness by nominees When Hatch questioned Kagan about the ban on abortion she gave distant responses, which left the republican troubled. SC nominees have traditionally evaded responses to specific questions so that they may not take sides or expose their flaws (Bacon). On abortion, she said the court prioritized the health of the mother.
Kagan, who has both worked with Barrack and Clinton, evaded giving an answer to a republican who questioned her viewpoint on whether the system had favored some institutions in contemporary declarations. She said she did not embody the present court and hoped that one day she would join it, amidst laughter and characterization ‘a real politician’ (Mozgovaya).
Nominees may avoid some questions which may eventually occur later in their court rulings. A response may expose their perspective on delicate issues and thus the inequality on decision making may be noted. Some senators who may have otherwise to vote on the nominee’s favor may be displeased by some of their responses, and thus affect their chances of nomination in jeopardy. Alito and Ginsburg, for example, evaded some question, citing that they may appear in the court at some later date (Rutkus).
Nominees’ responses to criticisms and their opinions Most of the opinions held by the nominees are neutral, usually to prevent further evaluation. Kagan, for example, answered critics by stating that though she admires what Aharon Barak did for Israel, she would not necessarily follow his style of judicial activism.
We will write a custom Essay on Supreme Court nominees specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More She says that she is more engrossed in politics than legal precedent, promising that her judgment would be based solely on the constitution (Mozgovaya). Responding to republican critics, she added that her governing would be, must be, and have to be different from decision making. Asked whether she would support the president’s agenda, she said it was not her idea of the job.
Roberts, who was criticized for his faithful personal beliefs, said his faith would not influence decision making; further adding that he would look at the law, and not religious texts in making rulings (Rutkus). He declined to endorse the statement of a former president who considered the severance of the state and the church to be unconditional.
The most valid approach A wide range of candidates are first considered before the president settles on a nominee. The nominee is considered by a committee before going to the full senate, for evaluation. The senators are each given time to challenge the nominee on radical issues. One of the consistent issues in the senate has been the choice of questions for nominees appearing before the committee.
Whether to ask, and how detailed the questions should be regarding their personal opinions on legal and legal issues is debatable (Rutkus). My most logical approach would be considering their substantive stance on topics rather than their actual credentials or private principles. It is not compulsory to force nominees to give responses for every questions asked, as some responses may undermine the integrity of the judiciary.
Conclusion Nominees must be subjected to some criticism in an effort to resolve their take on public issues. Some of their responses may be seen as prejudging a case, based on their current beliefs, as such topics may be presented as cases in the future. A nominee without any judicial experience subjection to legal issues is essential, to determine whether they are capable of making decisions based on the law, or they would exercise their personal beliefs.
Works Cited Bacon, Perry. Senators query Supreme Court nominee Kagan. The Washington Post, 2010. Web.
Mozgovaya, Natasha. U.S. supreme court nominee Elana Kagan: Israel means a lot to me. 2010. Web.
Stolberg, Sheryl. Committee approves Kagan’s nomination to Supreme Court. The New York Times, 2010. Web.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Supreme Court nominees by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Rutkus, Denis. Questioning Supreme Court Nominees about Their Views on Legal or Constitutional Issues: A Recurring Issue. Congressional Research Service. 2010. Web.
Groups and teams Report essay help: essay help
In business world interaction of individuals has been a key factor at their success in terms of achieving their goals and also in the assurance of smooth running of their departments. Group dynamics has increased the effectiveness of those organizations through proper understanding of each individual through communication of the members.
The leadership in the group dynamics is also a core value at the business performance depending on the perceptions of fellow members towards that leadership. This article analyses the group dynamics in terms of its importance, leadership, the leadership source and also interdependence in terms of making decisions for each and every member.
In group dynamics, people interact at a given environment which can either be in social environment business environment or in a social environment. Our main concern is in the business environment where group dynamics has been an important tool in organizations in enabling them to perform their duties and also achieve their goals effectively. The performances of businesses at the current situation are determined by the degree of the effectiveness of group interactions.
These interactions are between individuals who working at the same level and those who are working at different levels of work in organization they are working for. For instance individuals who are working at the same department are likely to do a better job if they have good relations to each other which can only be brought through group dynamics (Levi, 2001, p. 67). Group dynamics importance includes, first it enables employees to have a common goal as stipulated by the organization they are working for.
Through group dynamic they will understand each other better like a friend and not a stranger. Secondly it will enable all the individuals at the organization to view each other as a colleague since through group dynamics people will eliminate dominance of some members. Therefore all members will have a will an obligation to facilitate at the achieving companies objects.
Companies/ organizations performances are highly depended on personalities of individuals who are working for that organization. Therefore for a good organization of a business we need to organize employees and all the stakeholders from the individual level through group dynamics (McNamara, 2010, p. 1). Finally it is advisable to use group dynamics since individuals tend to perform their duties better, especially if they are working with individuals whom they know and understand than people they don’t know
Every business has its objectives as stipulated by the organizations charters and other legal documents of that organization. Therefore it is the main agenda of each and every business to achieve to those goals. Group dynamics has been great self drive for individuals in achieving the mutual goals of organizations. Positive interdependence enables individuals to put their individual efforts at their work which in turn facilitates the achievement of the organizations goals.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Therefore interdependence gives people power to make decisions, monitor their performance therefore enable them dedicate their efforts so as to carry out their dedicated roles by the business. Interdependence makes each individual feel guilty if he/she has not done his/ her part therefore this serves as a drive for each member to deliver the part he/ she is allocated to do.
Although research on groups has always been helpful to the businesses sometimes it has proved unworthy especially if it does not touch key issues. In some business group dynamics does not perform a major role in achieving the goals and also in the smooth run of the organization.
For instance in organizations where individual efforts are highly regarded than collective bargain, then involving group dynamics will destabilize the business as a whole since individuals who have a bigger role will tend to relax with a claim of equality or fair distribution of roles while those with relatively small role will tent to complain for additional roles added to them. In some cases if groups are taken on the negative side them the relevancy of the research will be questionable.
If researches about groups are under influence of any parameter for instance culture, gender or even race in a diversity world there is likelihood of that research being irrelevant in the sense that it will try to avoid some key factors about that research of groups. In organizations where individuals have different interests then, with introduction of group dynamics may cause problems because each member has a different goal to work for.
Both groups and individuals play important roles at the working environments at influencing the performance of businesses. Although both are useful, each will be suitable at a given environment. For instance in a big company where group dynamics is more effective than using individual effort will destabilize the operations of a business while in organizations where individual efforts are highly effectively then incorporating group effort will also affect the smooth run of the organization.
In most cases groups tend to be more effective than individual since most companies and other organization success is based on networking, therefore group dynamics is very important. In groups effectiveness is easily achieved due to the diversity of ideas from the members, collectiveness in solving the problems and also moral boost from each member for greater productivity and meeting set targets.
Finally collective efforts of a group proves to be more effective since one will do his /her part in anticipation of other will do their part which leads to achieving the mutual objective of the business (Ambrus, 2009, p. 8-12).
We will write a custom Report on Groups and teams specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Group cohesiveness is the state of a group being able to stick together based on goals that organization intends to achieve. Cohesiveness of groups is brought about by either rules or sometimes the intensity of the matter or goal concerning that group. Cohesiveness is key tool in ensuring that groups achieve designated targets.
Group cohesiveness enables groups to run smoothly, improve productivity, ensure full participation of all the members, and makes member accountable for anything that they does. It also improves morality of performance of each member. In my group cohesiveness can be improved though several ways, which includes first though explaining to the members importance of their group that is why they are needed at the group, their groups objectives, and their roles at the group.
Secondly, the group should have roles that govern it so that any member who goes against the group is either punished in a particular manner or thrown out of the group depending on the intensity of the matter. Thirdly, the group set clearly the goals and the role of each member at achieving that goal for instance in cleaning environment should specify which members should sensitize the dwellers in the areas they wish to clean (Seashore, 2003, p. 91).
Social influence has always been a factor in decision making in both business world and other social organizations. Firstly, decisions can be made through consensus building between the members. Therefore any decision made through consensus is a mutual decision in which all some members either did not agree with their full decision or part of it. In consensus each of the opposing teams will sacrifice part of their demands in order to get another favor from the other.
Secondly, social interaction can also influence decision making via voting from which part of the members are objecting while others are supporting therefore any winning team with majority is assumed to be the decision of all the members. Members can be encouraged to accept proposals at their working places through giving workers better deals that is giving out proposals that have a touch at the lives or that have a benefit to them.
Therefore each proposal should at least have a benefit to them. Secondly, team leader should include members in availing those proposals so that they can be part of those proposals and also ensure that their interests are catered for. In discouraging the acceptance of proposals at work place one can either present proposals that have adverse effect to the members for instance in a company a proposal to decrease a pay of the workers will automatically be rejected by them since their welfare is worsened off.
Secondly, if decisions made concerning the groups, members are not involved then there is likelihood that members will not accept those proposals because of feeling that they are down looked upon by leadership.
For the smooth run of a group a leader is highly required to manage that group. Leaders act as overseers. That is, they ensure that every activity of the organization is carried out well as prescribed by the group for instance leaders are the one to prepare the calendar of activities at a given time.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Groups and teams by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Leaders organize their members by assigning then duties and roles that they will perform. Leaders also coordinate the activities of each member for a mutual aim of achieving organizations goal. Generally leaders are the main decision makers in the in any group since not all the decisions can be made by all the members.
Yes, leaders can emerge from groups through experience that is long serving members who have acquired a lot of knowledge concerning that group can be chosen as a leader. That is why most leaders in business world are chosen from those with experience.
Also leaders can emerge from groups especially those with special talents, interests, and dedication. Talented people have proved to deliver in their groups due to the personal “sacrifice” to the roles they have acquired. Perception of group members to the leadership is of great importance because it is through leadership that members will either accept or reject that leadership.
For instance if perception of members to the leadership is positive then members will cooperate with that leadership in its duties and these will ensure that the group achieves its objects but if the perception of members to the leaders is negative then this will disrupt all the communication between the leaders and other members (Higby, 2002, p. 1). Therefore negative perception will deteriorate all the activities of that group.
Teams comprises of small groups of individuals with a common goal or objective while working groups is a temporary set of entire no individuals with a mutual goal. Teams are more effective in some situations compared to work groups because teams tend to have a longer time than work groups in carrying out their responsibilities.
Besides team shave leaders who gives guidelines on the activities to be carried out by the team members while work groups only arises when there is an activity to carry out therefore there are either temporary or no leaders. There are several situations that teams do better work groups, first work group works are temporal therefore they will only perform a specified task and seize to exist.
If time for instance has elapsed there is likely of poor performance of their activities while teams are not temporal therefore they are likely to perform their activities effectively since there is no time limit. Work groups have temporal or no leaders hence any activities to be carried by the leaders are likely to cause problems on the side of work groups (Lesmeister, 2004, p. 1). For instance in organizations that are fighting for workers rights cannot be temporal because it is a continuous process.
Finally it clear that individual group dynamics are important in ensuring smooth running of businesses. Through leadership of groups which are accepted by the members, there is likelihood of a good performance of those groups. Collectively, individuals will bring in new ideas, experience, and morality in productivity and performance therefore it is advisable to adopt group dynamics than adopting individual approach.
In addition groups should have clearly defined goals to minimize the conflicts of interest between the members. Though groups have importance in the business world sometimes they are not effective therefore it is advisable to use them where they are reliable. Here we have talked about group dynamics and group cohesiveness. Also we have seen how group interaction affects the decision making.
Reference List Ambrus, A. (2009). Group vs Individual decision-making. Web.
Higby, M. (2002). Teaching more than you know. Web.
Lesmeister, M. (2004). Leadership for effective groups. Web.
Levi, D. (2001). Group Dynamics for Teams. California. Barnes
Understanding Teen Depression Essay best college essay help
Introduction A considerable number of teenagers around the globe extensively suffer from depression. Depression can lead to several unpleasant behaviors, especially when left unattended. However, in as much as the teen are extremely vulnerable to depressions, most of them adopt several mechanisms that significantly assist them in containing their situation. Although, the methods employed vary from one individual to another; some may employ constructive measures, while others use unhelpful approaches.
Teen depression Understanding teen depression
It is noted that teen depression is primarily caused by two common factors i.e. unanswered sorrow and emotional disconnection. Unanswered sorrows are caused by certain life experiences such as the loss of loved ones, desertion, and disturbing events. On the other hand, emotional disconnection is caused by the fear of being unable to correlate with other.
Many people misunderstand teen depression, which is due to their several interesting behaviors at this stage. Therefore, it is extremely necessary to understand teenagers, incase one intends to detect and assist the teenagers fight against depressions. Depression is an awful illness to the teens, since it causes extraordinary grief, fury or despair among these youngsters. Furthermore, it is also a lethal disease; many people have perished after suffering severe depression i.e. either by committing suicide or by natural death.
Sources indicate that, approximately 20% of the depressed teens never seek help, despite the knowledge that it’s curable (Smith,
Internet addiction among college students Report essay help online free: essay help online free
Problem description With the advent of the internet, the process of communication and social networking underwent major changes. It became much easier for individuals to link up with each other both by text chatting and by audiovisual ways. Social networking websites such as Facebook came up to help individuals trace and regain contact with friends with whom they had lost contact.
Facebook has been described as a basic directory on the internet which had originally been designed to help college students connect with each other via various social networks established in their respective schools (Baron, 2009). Since its inception over six years ago, the site has spread rapidly to a point where it can boast of over thirty million users spread over different walks of life.
Unfortunately, Facebook was designed in such a way that it requires individuals to constantly log in to their accounts in order to check whether they have received messages or establish new friendships by responding to friend requests (Cohen, 2009).
Facebook in particular has received a lot of following particularly from young adults especially since it provides a platform for creating social groups among individuals irrespective of the distance between them.
As it is, this networking site has led to some form of addiction with college students dedicating a lot of their time on the site chatting and viewing friends’ photos. The situation has become so critical that various health care professionals have launched investigations into the medical problems associated with the Facebook addiction.
Research into the problem A recent research conducted at the school of medicine in Stanford University came to the conclusion than one out of every American citizens exhibited symptoms internet addiction and that the treatment of such addiction was no different than the treatment of drug junkies (Hayes, 2010).
The head of the study Dr. Elias Aboujaoude described the internet addiction as one that causes the patient to always want to get online even when they are not particularly looking for anything (Dickey, 2007). This was well equated with the impulsive drive to partake in an a pleasurable activity associated with drug and hard drug addiction.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Like with other forms of addiction, internet/Facebook addiction also leads to problems at both a personal and professional level. This brings about challenges that can negatively intrude in a person’s life.
According to Dr. David Greenfield of the Center for internet studies, students have come to testify that they tend to spend a lot of time on Facebook at the expense of their studies. It however has not been established whether such an addiction is a medical problem on its own or it is a manifestation of indwelling psychological challenges such as depression (Fenichel, 2009).
One study trying to establish the impact of Facebook addiction on the performance of college going students surveyed a total of 217 students from a United States college. Individuals were subjected to both open and closed question and answer sessions (Fenichel, 2009).. It was concluded that individuals who regularly spent time on Facebook performed poorly in school.
The research also established that individuals who did not use Facebook regularly dedicated more time to working for pay as their counterparts spent time engaging in extracurricular activities. Most of the regular Facebook users believed that the habit did not have a genuine negative effect on their lives. this was the position even with most of them confessing to having developed time management challenges as a result of spending a lot of time on Facebook (Dickey, 2007).
Facebook addiction can be described by a number of symptoms including the constant urge to get online , dedicating very many hours to chatting and going through people’s profiles on Facebook, unending talks about knowledge acquired from Facebook, giving up important activities in order to spend time on Facebook as well as the continual resignation to Facebook temptations even when it is clear that this is problematic (Hayes, 2010).
According to netaddiction.com females are more likely to be addicted to Facebook’s chatting application and this leads them to develop conditions such as insomnia and depression associated to large amounts of time spent in this activity.
How companies and educational facilities are dealing with the issue Companies and educational facilities have come to point out Facebook addiction as a serious threat to performance in their institutions. This is because of the negative effect of procrastination that regular Facebook usage can lead to. As such usage of the networking site has been banned in many enterprises. To ensure that workers and students don’t fall to the temptation, various firewall software have been used to block access to the website (Baron, 2009).
We will write a custom Report on Internet addiction among college students specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Some institutions have even made it a point to note in their company laws that Facebook access during office hours is an offence that could lead to job termination. Scholars have however suggested that this type of ban could in the long-run be detrimental to the general growth of companies mainly because it has been established that many clients turn to Facebook when looking for bargains on products or service provision experts.
Summary and recommendations
The creators of Facebook may have had good intentions when they first launched the site. However, like anything good, Facebook has its weakness top on the list being the addictive tendencies. College students have particularly been proven to be more vulnerable to this sort of addiction. Even though, it has not been established as a medical condition, current research leans towards the suggestion that addiction to social networking sites has its own trailer challenges including illnesses such as depression (Cohen, 2009).
Various recommendations have been made on how to handle cases of Facebook addiction. However, it must be noted that getting out of any habit mainly depends on the will of the person. Individuals must first have the desire to quit excessive Facebook usage (Baron, 2009).
Effort should then be made to ensure that a strict time management is developed to enable the individual distinguish clearly what should be done and at what time. It is definitely advisable that the schedule include at least a few hours to login to Facebook because at the end of the day the aim is not to put the person in total isolation.
The college should definitely employ the usage of Facebook blocking firewall software particularly in classroom and library computers. This will help students concentrate on assigned tasks as it will make it impossible to give in to the urge of accessing the Facebook website.
Method used in conducting the research The research was primarily based on secondary data. Data was extracted from various journals, articles on the internet. The criteria of selection for the literature was the relevance to the research topic as well as the year of publication. Both public and private online libraries were visited to access the data.
Facebook problem being a modern day challenge could not be effectively analysed without obtaining information from real case scenarios. Various college and work environments were studied to find out how the issue is being dealt with. This definitely made for some interesting research and it effectively came round to form the back-born of the report.
This was very crucial information that made the research report appeal to both professionals and the general public. For the latter, it may require that some of the information collected be broken down into simple language and at the same time illustrations drawn from the common and familiar situations to further explain the case.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Internet addiction among college students by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Empirical data was collected from recent studies and numbers and figures used to show the illustrate the seriousness of the situation. Like with any other professional field of study, institution management research has to be conducted in such a way that the offer credibility to the practitioner.
In such a field, the strength of any report lies in the figures provided to support theoretical data and particularly the numbers obtained from real life scenarios to support collected evidence. With this knowledge in mind, effort was made to obtain relevant information to the particular topic in question and this was accompanied by proper citations.
Summary and recommendations
The creators of Facebook may have had good intentions when they first launched the site. However, like anything good, Facebook has its weakness top on the list being the addictive tendencies. College students have particularly been proven to be more vulnerable to this sort of addiction. Even though, it has not been established as a medical condiction, current research leans towards the suggestion that addiction to social networking sites has its own trailer challenges including illnesses such as depression (Cohen, 2009).
Various recommendations have been made on how to handle cases of Facebook addiction. However, it must be noted that getting out of any habit mainly depends on the will of the person. Individuals must first have the desire to quit excessive Facebook usage (Baron, 2009).
Effort should then be made to ensure that a strict time management is developed to enable the individual distinguish clearly what should be done and at what time. It is definitely advisable that the schedule include at least a few hours to login to Facebook because at the end of the day the aim is not to put the person in total isolation.
The college should definitely employ the usage of Facebook blocking firewall software particularly in classroom and library computers. This will help students concentrate on assigned tasks as it will make it impossible to give in to the urge of accessing the Facebook website.
It is also recommended that the college invests in provision of time management sessions to students with the aim of instilling a culture of discipline amongst the students. This is in appreciation of the fact that at the end of the day, an individual can give up an addiction as long as he/she is committed to dropping the habit.
Reference List Baron, D. (2009). Internet addiction: deadly pathology or just a nice substitute for TV? Web.
Cohen, E. (2009). Five clues that you are addicted to Facebook. Web.
Dickey, M. (2007). New internet danger: Unhealthy obsession (2/07). Web.
Fenichel, M. (2009). Facebook Addiction Disorder (FAD). Web.
Hayes, C. (2010). Irish politician believes Facebook addiction causes mental health issues. Web.
Virgin Group Marketing Performance Research Paper essay help online
Introduction This paper presents a research project about Virgin Group. Richard Branson laid the foundation for the organization. It expanded from a small business venture publishing magazines to the present diversified international investment. The path to success involved intense research and formulation of strategic plans.
Under organizational plan, the research project will enumerate on how research and development brought about existence of Virgin Group. Its system of management is decentralized which then empowers individuals to share ideas, values and experiences for the common good. The essay will further discuss marketing strategy of 4Ps as utilized in Virgin Group.
Background of Virgin Group Development of the business started with Richard Branson when he was a student at a boarding school. Branson was motivated by the success of his magazine which was published in 1968. He therefore quit school to conduct magazine business. Branson later undertook advertisement of mail order records on student magazine. Entry into joint ventures accelerated the rate of expansion and differentiation.
The business name ‘Virgin’ was suggested by Branson’s business associate who thought that the business possessed some commercial purity, originality and high value. In 1985, Richard Branson looked into the possibility of expanding the capital base of the business by way of an initial public offer. Subsequently, 35 % of the company’s equity was listed on the London stock market.
From 1990 – 2001 Virgin groups expanded intensely after Branson entered into joint ventures with other business including one of the leading Japanese retailers, Marui. There were opportunities which favored the new ventures. One of them was ‘privatization and deregulation in Britain’, Ansoff, (113).
This is apparent in its successful bids for west Coast rail and Cross country services which resulted in Virgin rail. Deregulation is obvious in acquisition of Euro Belgian Airlines that was re-launched as Virgin Express. ‘Virgin group also expanded due to the possibility of selling goods and services directly to the consumers’ Branson (11). Richard took up this opportunity to searching for innovative business contract with its customers.
On a higher scale, Virgin Group saw tremendous change from the explosion of information communication technology and media such that a joint venture between telephone operator NTl and virgin was sealed (Branson, 16). By the year 2004, virgin group of companies had expanded to over 200 ventures with its core on travel business, mobile, monetary, vend music and internet.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Organization of virgin group The investment has continually registered success derived from the concept of team spirit. Virgin aims at bringing about difference in their area of operation starting from transport to retail business. It utilizes forward planning criteria which have assisted management in setting objectives for the diversified business investment.
Decision makers in Virgin Group integrate both risks and research and development in their planning process. Most of the business venture entered into by Virgin involved extensive research and in-depth analysis. The way to success for Richard captured an aspect of risk-taking with a sole intent to win innovations in the market place (Allen, 21). This also went a long way in pleasing the target customer through product improvement and differentiation.
The company does not distinguish bureaucracy in its management hence flow of information is free and originates from a diversified spring. This decentralized system of management allows sharing of ambitions, concerns and even expertise. Solving a problem is fast and easy if teamwork is built in employees.
Performance of virgin group Virgin Group has expanded to more than 200 companies in thirty countries. Its revenues exceeded £11 billion with an approximately number of employees being 50,000 people in 29 countries. Richard Branson who controls the company announced that profits were an approxiamately GBP 68.4 pound which is an increment from the previous year’s earnings.
This was attributed to its diversified business venture and the launching of airlines between Australian and Tokyo in Japan. The profits contrast sharply with pre tax loss made by the British Airlines.
Group’s sales level for the year ended 2009 increased to 2.579 billion pounds up from the previous year. This figure included sales from virgin holiday.
The profits was an outcome of new polices regarding premium travel and enhanced services in the travel sector which subsequently attracted about 5.77m passengers for the ended 2009. Alliance between Virgin Atlantic and Regus group in May 2009 benefitted flyer program. If global recession is brought under control, it is most likely that Virgin Group will generate more sales and profits.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Virgin Group Marketing Performance specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Marketing Organizations struggle to capture new customers and preserve old once in a competitive environment. This is among the aims of forming marketing strategy for a business i.e. to be competitive in the globalised world (Wright, 12). While recognizing the fact that Virgin Group is an international company with customers located in various countries, consumer based approach to marketing is utilized.
The company conducts research about customer preferences on a continuous basis. This allows them to avail products which are more preferred by the customer. They can further improve their services after evaluating feedback from the customer. Virgin integrates the following dimensions in marketing their product and services: product, position, price and promotion (Mohan, 42).
The virgin Brand The strength of Virgin brand found application in many businesses including airline, Virgin Media, financial sectors, motor vehicle industry, train services and even telecommunication industry (Wright, 13). The brand values pleasure, value for money, superiority of the product, improvement, aggressive challenge and excellent customer service. It despises incompetence, simplicity, and disregard to customer care.
Virgin group gives licenses to its subsidiary business units but for the case of Virgin mobile in Australia owned by Singtel Optus, the arrangement was a simple agreement for license. Virgin Management Limited is part of Virgin’s Group shareholder that manages the interest of Richard Brandon. VML also acts as a service sector providing recommendations and management services to companies in Virgin Group. Any investment decisions are channeled through Virgin Management limited before executing them.
Products Sectors in Virgin Group offer competitive products and services. The travel sector provides Virgin Atlantic and Virgin Travel. There are also Virgin books which publish and distribute books with other stationeries. Virgin holiday is characterized by the ability of the customer to book a holiday and fly Atlantic. Other products available to the customer are the independent recording label V2 music and fitness clubs located throughout UK.
Pricing strategy Pricing strategy employed by Virgin group is highly sensitive to the demand and affordability of the customer. An example in the travel sector is Virgin Atlantic which offers a variety of six price level for the customer to choose from. Their objective is to ensure that customers get value for what they spend.
It is essential to note that customers are ready to expend their money if the level of satisfaction is greater especially in Britain where standards of living are high (Chekitan, 10). This is the reason why Virgin Group offers competitive products and services.
The Group bases its pricing strategy on factors which affect the global market. Examples of these externalities include: inflation, interest rates, political instability, recent global recession and natural disaster i.e. volcanic eruption. Richard developed ‘premium-tization’ an aspect which brings about division of market. The trend forces consumers to demand quality product at a higher price level.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Virgin Group Marketing Performance by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Place (Market segmentation) This signifies a location area where a product meets the consumer. Segmentation as utilized by virgin group is an important element where leadership in the market is still in its development stages. There has been tendency by the organization to establish itself well especially in its best and specialty sectors. Some of the strong holds of the company are: the transport sector i.e. airline subsector, newly established mobile stores in Europe and United States (Bower, 21).
Rapid expansion of distribution network and development in airline industry is a trend towards achieving customer satisfaction. In addition to market segmentation, virgin group is capitalizing on the new world order of e-commerce. The company can now deliver products and services to its clients at any position in the globe within the shortest time possible via electronic purchase and physical delivery using cargo planes. Virgin is always in the forefront following its ability to implement actions within a recommended time frame.
Promotion To reach intended customers, advertising and other aspects of promotion must be employed as a marketing strategy (Kotler, 39). Various channels of communication are exploited with an objective of conveying relevant information about a product or a service to potential customers.
Any successful advertisement brings about increased sales and ultimately more revenue to the market. Promotion plays a vital role in growth of Virgin Group by a system of taking information about their product and service to the proximity of the customer (Anon, 15). Internet advertisement regarding quality services offered by Virgin Trains and Atlantic is advantageous to customers since it helps them in making choices before booking.
Discounts given on advanced booking and favorable deal to those travelling in group is an incentive to customers. Websites for these transport sectors are very efficient such that it has received an ‘A’ and ‘AA’ rating by the WCAG (Bower, 15). Access to the website is fast enough to guarantee immediate dissemination of information. This is one of the best criteria to expose a product to its customers.
Success of virgin is credited to the whole workforce whose talents are challenged constantly by the ever changing consumer environment. Absence of bureaucracy in Virgin Group givens people an opportunity to share their skills, values, ideas and expertise in a positive manner. According to (Koichi, 52), a performing organization is most likely to receive both media and customer’s attention.
Recommendations After a profound analysis of marketing strategy engaged by Virgin Group, it is prudent to consider a variety of strategy options available to the management. The management may rethink integrating in the planning process both inside and outside environment of the companies.
This means that management must review social, political and demographic descriptions affecting directly or indirectly running of the business. These external variables are critical in developing internal strength i.e. customer experience, technological progress, channel bonding, and market sensing.
Highly globalised company has to consider centralizing its management so that information flow along the bureaucratic channel is retained. A centralized management as well means that a person who is given certain responsibilities must be answerable to a member at a higher rank. This will measure performance level of an individual in an office and consequently take control of its resources.
Although virgin group values its customers, they must focus on building customer experience centers in their different locations. Apart from giving personalized service to their customers, the center will be mandated to supply the management with data regarding customers’ preferences. Such data is valuable when introducing a new product which will need to penetrate the market fast.
Conclusion This paper offered a vivid explanation of the Virgin Group. Richard Branson orchestrated the inception of the firm after succeeding in his magazine venture.
The business expanded from one business venture into a collection of more than 200 sectors in 20 countries. As detailed in the literature, profits of the group are always on the increase with a record of more than 68.4 billion pounds in the year ended May, 2009. Cumulatively, sales level reached a value of 2.579m while Virgin Atlantic registered a passenger rate of 5.77m during the financial yea r2009.
The success of virgin group is attributed to high regard placed on customers in addition to marketing strategy employed. The paper is very clear on pricing, positioning, product and promotion strategy of the firm. As a policy recommendation virgin group should centralize the role of management in order to take a full control over its resources and also instill in individuals a sense of responsibility.
Works Cited Allen, Katie. “Branson sells Virgin Megastores”. The Guardian Newspaper 17 Sept. 2007: 20-21.
Anon, Philips. “Virgin to close its West End make-up store”. London Evening Standard Newspaper , 1 Feb. 2000: 15-20.
Ansoff, Igor. Strategies for Diversification. Harvard Business Review, 35.5 (2001): 113- 124.
Bower, Tom. Branson. 4th Estate: Limited publishers, 2001.
Branson, Richard. Losing My Virginity. London: Virgin Books Limited, 2002.
Chekitan, Dev, and Schultz, Don. “In the Mix: A Customer-Focused Approach Can Bring the Current Marketing Mix into the 21st Century”. Marketing Management 14 .1 (2005): 10-20.
Koichi, Shimizu. “Advertising Theory and Strategies”. Tokyo: Souseisha Book Company, 2009.
Kotler, Philips, and Keller, Kevin. “1“. A Framework for Marketing Management. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson Prentice Hall, 2009.
Mohan, Ramesh. International Marketing. New Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2005.
Wright, Robins. “Branson urges £1bn rail spend”. Financial times 20 May. 2009: 12-15.
Quercus Assessment Method Report writing essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Current position of GMC
Strategy for GM
Porters Generic Strategies
List of References
Introduction Based in Detroit, General Motors is an international organization that dwells in the production of automobile commodities. GM operates in the automobile industry thus produces several automotive products and services such as vehicle repair and vehicle servicing. GM is also known as the topmost producer of automobiles, with incredible brands such as GMC, Cadillac, Chevrolet, and Buick (General Motors Company, 2010).
Current position of GMC In 2009, the company experienced extremely serious financial problem following the financial crunch that hit the US and the world in general. As a result, the company engaged in massive borrowing of funds, which ultimately left it in a liquidated state. Currently, the company is fighting to overturn its unfavorable financial state, to a more stabilized one.
For instance, the multinational company sold quite a number of its financial assets as part of the efforts to stabilize its current situation. Moreover, its liquidated state led to closure of certain branches such as Pontiac, which were extremely significant to the company. Due to this reason, the company, currently, lacks adequate assets for production thus reduced productivity, growth and expansion.
The effects of the crisis also affected the company’s sales and profitability level. In fact, until now the company has not regained its previous profitability and sales level; instead, it is still struggling to control its incredible sales reduction. This was noted in the last two consecutive years, whereby the company registered tremendous sales reduction i.e. up to 30%.
Despite the unpleasant experience, GM has employed several strategies to intervene their current situation. The company plans to acquire several assets, which will in turn increase its production capacity. GM is also spending quite a fortune in repaying the massive loans that the company previously borrowed. For instance, in the mid month of this year, GM repaid the government an incredible amount of cash as part of its efforts to reduce the company’s liquidity level.
It is noted that their efforts are paying off; the company recently registered considerable profits i.e. 865 million within the first quarter of this year (Business Day, 2010). GM also faces stiff competition from other automobile companies such as ford motors. The competitors are taking advantage and capitalizing on GM’s unfavorable financial condition thus posing extraordinary pressure on company.
Strategy for GM GM faces profound challenges with regard to their finances, production, sales, and competition; therefore, my strategy will be based on strengthening the company within those specific aspects. My strategy will be to minimize production cost, increase acquisition, and raise funds with the aim of improving and advancing the current state of GM. My strategy can, extensively, be explained using various models designed by business scholars such as Michael porter.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Porters Generic Strategies Porter developed three fundamental approaches that significantly contributed to the advancement of strategic management. After designing his strategy, he proceeded to name them as differentiation, cost leadership, and focus (Porter, 1998, p. 35). He also proceeded to give a profound explanation of his concept and further elaborated on their applications.
His superb ideologies on cost leadership can, extensively, be used to back up my approach on reviving General Motors. He explicated cost leadership basing his arguments and ideologies on competitive advantage (Faulkner, 2002, 314). Porter explained that, a company gains competitive advantage, if it minimizes its production costs. He further explicated that, minimization of cost increases the margin between revenues and production costs, which translates to profit increase.
I could employ this incredible model to uplift the current position of General motors, in different capacities. Porter’s strategy of cost leadership primarily adopts the idea of minimizing production costs; therefore, I would employ several approaches to achieve this policy (Klug, 2006, 11).
In point of fact, to achieve a minimized production cost, there must be a profound reduction in the cost of production resources such labor and raw materials. Following this argument, I would consider obtaining raw materials from other cheap sources, but still ensure that excellent quality is maintained.
For instance, I may consider obtaining raw materials by collecting scrap materials, and then recycling them for production use. However, I would still ensure that the idea of topmost quality continue to linger in my mind, so as to achieve fabulous and competitive products.
Additionally, I may consider seeking and looking for several raw material suppliers in the market, who sell their product at cheaper prices. Ultimately, carrying out researches on the best policies to adopt can also be beneficial to the company. This is because; effective, viable and tested strategies will be developed and adopted by the company, which translates to effective performances.
As noted in porter’s competitive advantage policy, the feasibility of these policies can create a remarkable gap between production cost and product price. As a result, the company will earn relatively high profits thus improving its competitiveness in the market. Moreover, the extra profit gained can be ploughed back, to improve certain crucial aspects of the company. For instance, the extra profit can be invested in expanding the company’s production capacity i.e. by making several acquisitions.
We will write a custom Report on Quercus Assessment Method specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Apart from improving the financial strength of GM, the extra profits can also be used to repay the remaining financial obligations of the company. Investments can also be done on marketing the company’s products and services thus improving the company’s sales and the overall profits.
In addition to cost leadership strategy, porter also developed and explained “focus” in his model. He explained focus as the strategy of investing more on less competitive markets (Porter, 2008, p. 54).
This approach can be applied in various capacities incase one intends to improve the current state of GM. For instance, the company can focus more on services rendering rather than concentrating on automobile product production. This is because; the company faces less competition on services as compared to products i.e. with respect to its counterparts.
Moreover, the market of servicing vehicles is extensive and less competitive, since most of its competitors dwell in vehicle production. In employing this strategy, GM will experience a tremendous increase in sales and profits, due to limited market competition. Consequently, the company will attain a stabilized financial position, which eventually boosts its capacity to expand and also repay its financial obligations.
Ansoff’s Matrix Ansoff’s Matrix is an extremely significant model for advancing the growth of a product and service. The model contains several strategies that can be used to advance the market of GM, especially at this moment when they are facing a tremendous decrease in production and sales. The four strategies can be summarized as follows: diversification, market penetration, market development, and product development (Graham
Effects of War on America Essay argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help
Introduction Throughout the history of human civilization, mankind has been engaged in warfare against each other. The United States has not being exempted from this phenomenon and as a matter of fact, America has had a long standing history of wars waged both within and without her borders.
The reasons for these wars have ranged from protecting America’s territorial integrity to assisting her allies. Invariably, war has far-reaching effects on the countries that are involved in the operations. The focus of this paper shall be on the wars that have been waged by America since 1877.
The paper shall argue that the war has had an overall negative effect on the American culture and its people. To reinforce this assertion, this paper shall engage in an analysis of specific war efforts that the Unite States has engaged in and how they affected the country economically, politically and culturally.
Significant Wars and their effects The Spanish-American War
The first war that was waged by America after the American civil war that led to the unification of the states into a country was the Spanish-American war of 1898. This main theatre of this war was the Manila Bay in the Philippines which was attacked by American naval forces leading to the loss of ten Spanish Ships. The cause of this war was an explosion at a Cuban harbor which resulted in the death of American Service Men.
This war was mostly economically motivated since part of the reason for its being waged was to stop Cubans from revolting against their Spanish rulers. Boyer et al. notes that American businessmen had invested over $50 million in Cuba and therefore, unrest was undesirable. The war resulted in the recognition of Cuba’s independence from Spanish rule and the abandoning of Philippines and Puerto Rico colonies.
While this war lasted for only a few days with huge success for American forces, it had far reaching political and cultural consequences. The war resulted in America ruling a foreign nation (the Philippines) which was the first act of imperialism by the USA. In the Philippines, there was an independence movement which had been trying to free the country from Spanish rule.
When America became the new rulers, these independence fighters began attacking American troops in a war that lasted for over 4 years. This war came at a great human and financial cost for America. In addition to this, the cultural values of the Filipino people were eroded as their new rulers tried to “educate the Filipinos, and to uplift and civilize and Christianize them.”
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The First World War
Another war in which America involved itself with was the Great War of 1914 which became known as the “First World War”. At the onset of this war, the Unite States under the presidency of Wilson proclaimed its neutrality in the war.
However, this neutrality did not last indefinitely owing to America’s close cultural ties with England and France as well as economic considerations made by American politicians. As such, America’s official policy of neutrality in the war lasted for only 3 years and in 1971, America joined the war on the side of the allies.
Some of the economic considerations made in American joining this war were the huge loans (up to $2.3 billion) that the USA had given to the allies. The war resulted in an increase in the taxes imposed by Congress to businesses although this was offset by the profits gained from the war efforts.
While the First World War had little impact on American soil and the causality rates were low, the war led to the drafting and deployment of servicemen on a previously unprecedented scale. This laid precedence to the military build up that was to later characterize the U.S. leading to billions of dollars being used in military efforts.
Politically, Boyer et. al notes that the war led to a trampling of citizen’s constitutional rights as intolerance of dissent become prevalent due to government propaganda which encouraged conformity to the war efforts.
The Second World War
The Second World War is without doubt the biggest war to ever have been waged by nations against nations up to date. Unlike the First World War in which America was only a minor player, the U.S. played a significant role in this war from the very onset. The Second World War was caused by the aggression of Nazi Germany in Europe. Germany’s expansion ambitions made it lock horns with most of the European nations.
Germany’s invasion of Poland was the marked the official start of WWII and resulted in the declaration of war on Germany and His Allies by Britain. These military alliances consisted of two major protagonists; Britain and her allies who made up the Allies and Germany and her allies making up the Axis. Both alliances where immensely powerful and wrecked havoc on each other’s land throughout the war period.
We will write a custom Essay on Effects of War on America specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Economically, the war was huge implications to America. Military spending went from 9% of gross national produce in 1940 to 46% in 1945. America also became the world’s leading weapons manufacturer as she set out to fulfill the demand by her European allies for weapons. The Marshall Plan which followed the end of the Second World War and was aimed at assisting in the re-building of war torn Europe was also a costly affair for the United States.
The Second World War was to a large extent detrimental to the democratic freedoms of U.S. citizens as it led to an increase in government censorship as the administration worked to suppress information that could damage the war effort. The government also created departments to shape public opinion by spreading propaganda and inciting hatred for the enemy.
Wars in the Cold War Era
The Second World War led to the emergence of two distinct world super powers; the United States of America and the Soviet Union. These two powers appeared to be pitted against each other from an ideological point of view resulting in high polarization. The United States favored communism while the Soviet Union was pro communism and aimed to spread this ideology to its spheres of influence.
The Soviet Union was seen as an aggressor, keen on expanding by influencing weaker states and exporting its communism ideals to the countries. The United States was keen to deter the spread of Soviet communism and as such, most of the wars waged after the Second World War were proxy wars between the U.S. and Communism.
The Korean War which took place from 1950 to 1953 involved Communist North Korea and China, and the American backed Republic of Korea. The U.S. with authorization from the U.N. mounted a military attack to protect the Republic of Korea from communist backed North Korean invasion.
Another significant war that was waged in the cold war era was the Vietnam War of 1960 which involved Western forces trying to repress communists who had taken over Northern Vietnam. Once North Vietnam fell under communist rule, there was fear that the same could happen to South Vietnam.
The U.S. therefore dedicated considerable military resources to Vietnam to ensure that the spread of communism was deterred. These wars led to an increase in military spending by the U.S. as well as amassing of nuclear by most nations. These wars also resulted in thousands of U.S. troops being killed in battle.
Conclusion This paper set out to argue that war has had an unfavorable effect on America. To underscore this point, a look at the major wars that America has waged has been undertaken.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Effects of War on America by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More From the evidence presented in this paper, it is clear that while war in some instances result in great economic benefits and technological progress for the country, it also resulted in the damaging of culture and the loss of lives and huge economic costs to the United States. As such, it is conceivable that the society would have been better off if these wars had never been waged.
The New Deal The Great Depression which began in 1929 and continued for the better part of the following decade was a huge economic disaster that affected nation’s virtually all over the world. The United States was especially affected with stock prices crashing and unemployment rates rising throughout the Country.
A political solution to this problem was necessitated and it came in the form of “The New Deal” which consisted of a series of laws which congress began enacting following the election into office of Franklin Roosevelt. In this essay, I shall argue that the New Deal had profound and positive changes in the Lives of America.
One of the key commitments of the New Deal reforms was the commitment to “make federally guaranteed economic security a political right for every American”. New Deal programs such as the federal unemployment benefits meant that people could continue to survive even under harsh economic realities. This was a significant thing considering the fact that the Great depression had resulted in unprecedented levels of unemployment.
In order to encourage growth, the New Deal also implemented programs that were aimed at fair pricings for farmers on their crops therefore enabling poor rural farmers to attain a comfortable middle class life. This was mostly as a result of government action which resulted in the protection from unfair competition and also the freedom from domination by large monopolies that had previously crippled the small scale farmers.
One of the issues that the New Deal opponents raised was that the goals that the New Deal proposed to reach through the Economic Bill of Rights would result in greater expansion of the federal government’s power which would result in greater government control in people and business affairs.
This was a valid fear but it was a trade off that most people were willing to make if it would guarantee the future security of the economy and therefore their well being by extension. For all its benefits, the New Deal was not without its flaws and it has been accused of undermining the free market by imposing protective tariffs which hampered international trade. Also, federal guaranteed economic assistance to the poor has been labeled as “wasting tax payer’s money” and were scrapped in 1996.
While most of the policies of the New Deal such as guaranteed economic assistance and protectionism measures are undesirable today, they were necessary in the years immediately after the Great Depression and these programs led to the economic recovery of America and greatly improved the lives of the American people. It can therefore be authoritatively stated that the New Deal was a useful legislature for the American people.
Conformity in 1950s America Conformity can be described as a “set of beliefs and practices that promote uniformity in the ways that people life and think”. This was the condition that affected America in the decade that followed the Second World War. As a result of the huge economic benefits that America had reaped following the large scale industrialization efforts that were as a result of World War II, there was enough money to afford most people a comfortable lifestyle.
Leisure activities mostly included watching TV and going for movies which depicted an ideal “American Life” which was showcased as having a nice family, a car and children. Many people were influenced by media and sought to achieve this popular culture. Strict social norms were also broadcasted through the media and stereotypical suburban white families portrayed in popular programs.
The ideal woman in the 1950s was married, took care of her family and entertained guest in her suburban house while the ideal man was the provider and protector of the family. These well defined gender roles further led to conformity as men and women were expected to fit into these templates.
Another byproduct of the Second World War was the rise of the Cold War which pitted the Capitalistic West against the Communist East. Many Americans were hysterical about the “evil communists” as a result of government propaganda.
As a result of this mass hysteria, people began suspecting and accusing each other of holding communistic sentiments and as a result of this, people were afraid of being labeled as communist sympathizers. Due to fear and suspicions, Americans in the 1950s were afraid of expressing their political opinions for few that they would be labeled as communists. This furthered the conformity in the American society of the 1950s.
While conformity was good for the stability of the nation, it was a big hindrance to the democratic development of the nation. Since people were afraid to express their opinions, they could not criticize the government hence making it more accountable for its actions. In addition to this, conformity led to the continued perpetration of social ills since it refused to acknowledge real issues such as racial discrimination that were prevalent at that time.
The Warren Court Decisions The Warren Court is the term given to the Supreme Court from the mid 1950s to the late 1960s under Chief Justice Earl Warren. The Warren Court made some rulings which had revolutionary significance for America and affected the society in profound ways.
As a result of this, the Warren Court era is hailed as an era of “judicial activism” whereby the judicial system lead to major social, economic and political changes in the country. This essay shall argue that the changes that the Warren Court made were immense and had a positive and lasting impact on the American society.
The Warren Court period experienced a significant expansion of civil rights mostly in relation to discrimination. As such, one of the significant social events of the Warren court era was the segregation policy that existed in many states. This policy resulted in the presence of segregated schools and social amenities for the different races.
The Warren court struck down this “miscegenation laws” as can be seen from the Evans v. Newton case in which the ruling forbade the city of Macon, Georgia from maintaining a segregated park. While this blow against legally mandated racial segregation did not result in the immediate end of racial discrimination, it was a major blow against racial segregation and paved way for an era of social awareness on the race issue and eventually the end of racial discrimination in America.
Freedom of speech is one of the most revered constitutional rights of the American people. While these rights were enshrined long before the Warren Court era, it is this period that made significant positive contributions to these rights. The 1950s were an era that was dominated by conformism and government control of popular opinion.
The government was eager to suppress so called “hate speech” which was mostly any speech related to race, sex or other biased ideas. The decisions by the Warren Courts played a critical role in the Civil Rights movement. Schwartz notes that the Warren Court overturned previous court rulings in the New York Times v. Sullivan by granting First Amendment protection for statements that defamed public officials.
The Warren Court therefore affected the society since it showed that all people were afforded similar rights by the constitution and discrimination was therefore undesirable. In addition to this, the court reinforced the sanctity of the freedom of speech for the American people therefore negating the conformity and government censorship that had began to infiltrate the country.
Bibliography Boyer, Paul. et. al. The Enduring Vision: A History of the American People, Volume 2: From 1865, Concise. Cengage Learning, 2009.
Chickering, Roger., Forster, Stig and Greiner, Bernd. A World at Total War: Global Conflict and the Politics of Destruction, 1937-1945. Cambridge University Press, 2005
Davidson, James West. US: A Narrative History, Volume 2: Since 1865. McGraw-Hill, 2008.
Edsforth, Ronald. The New Deal: America’s response to the Great Depression. Wiley-Blackwell, 2000.
Schwartz, Bernard. The Warren Court: a Retrospective. Oxford University Press US, 1996.
Footnotes Paul Boyer, et. al., The Enduring Vision: A History of the American People, Volume 2: From 1865 Concise, (Cengage Learning, 2009), 472.
James Davidson West, US: A Narrative History, Volume 2: Since 1865. (McGraw-Hill, 2008).
Paul et al, 517.
Roger Chickering, Stig Forster and Bernd Greiner, A World at Total War: Global Conflict and the Politics of Destruction, 1937-1945. (Cambridge University Press, 2005), 19.
Paul et al, 598.
Ronald Edsforth, The New Deal: America’s response to the Great Depression. Wiley-Blackwell, 2000.
Ibid, p. 2.
James Davidson West, US: A Narrative History, Volume 2: Since 1865. (McGraw-Hill, 2008).
Bernard Schwartz, The Warren Court: a Retrospective, (Oxford University Press US, 1996), 233.
Critical Approaches to Journalism Essay scholarship essay help
Table of Contents Review
The fate of Journalism
Review Morgan’s article on “Screens vs. Paper” in media underscores the role of technology in contemporary journalism. A clear indicator of advanced technology in media is the decision by publishing houses to allocate more resources to the establishment of digital media at the expense of for example, newspaper. A majority of the population is computer literate and for this reason, prefers getting information through colorful screens and not reading through the monotonous hard copies.
With this in mind, the publishing industry has identified a potential and feasible business opportunity. As a result, a considerable proportion of publishers are considering exploiting this business opportunity by providing digital editions. However, this does not mean that print consumers will be entirely eliminated from the market because in the end, a market segment for attractive and well produced magazines will be established.
Advertising is one of the sectors in journalism that has tremendously changed due to the impact of technology. Digital editions on e-readers have the ability to offer a more immersive experience for readers compared to print banners which readers easily ignore. Although technology is relatively expensive, most publishers are more than willing to incorporate it into journalism for purposes of innovation, thereby catering for the needs of its readers.
In his article, “Who needs journalism?” Calcutt asserts that magazines are lively in the sense that they are mirrors that reflect its readers, publishers and writers. He further argues that traditional journalism expects its practitioners to give information that follows the formula of who, where, when, how and why. They are expected to make use of active verbs. To journalists, sentences with such format are a typical example of traditional news writing whereby they (journalists) are expected to comply with these standards.
Calcutt also notes that in traditional journalism, a writer is oriented towards a prudent event in the sense that the event is singled out and given prominence over other events. Therefore, a reporter’s main ambition is geared towards writing a definite account of such an event, giving vivid details. As a result, when the reader goes through the article, he or she will be able to perceive the incident as if he or she witnessed the action. Readers pay for the coverage of the story on the publication when they buy the copy.
With regard to modern journalism, Calcutt offers three distinct groups involved in the event. These include actors who performs events to be written about, the writers who compose the reading material and the colleagues who do the publication work, and finally the readers who read about what the actors did in a particular event.
In traditional journalism, these three groups are distinct and therefore work in isolation from each another. In contemporary magazines however, this may not be the case. The tendency for these distinctions to dissolve is very high.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More New media technology has facilitated the development of user- generated content. As a result of this readers can participate in the process of making the events to be featured in the magazines. The end result is that readers and writers become one and the same thing.
In an effort to address such developments, publishers are devising a new model for magazines which encompass content, community, and cash. The three components are bound together with the word brand. However, it is not clear whether such a model is worth implementing. Similarly, it is not clear in whose favor it will work out for.
Both Morgan and Calcutt address the issue of advancements in journalism in relationship to technological advances. Morgan is more inclined towards the form that journalism will take. Basing on research, she argues that most publishers are likely to embrace the e-reader version.
In addition, she stresses on the point that though at a slow pace, the screens are taking dominance over papers in media industry. She also argues that most publishers are willing to embrace the new technology considering the financial returns associated with incorporation of the technology.
On the other hand, Calcutt takes argues that as much as technology is involved, it should make magazines livelier. This is in the sense that the reader participate in the making of the events written. His major arguments entail both the format and the content of magazines which will be shaped with the aid of the new technology. He sees the need to innovate the magazine unlike Morgan who perceives an inclination towards screens as a mode of journalistic communication.
The two writers take a different approach for various reasons. Being a publisher, it is possible to argue that Morgan’s article is money oriented since her main concern for publishing is on how to make money. When she talks of paper verses screen, it is because she is inclined towards the form and not the content of the information to be passed across to the reader.
In contrast, Calcutt emphasizes on content for the reason that his main precedence is on sealing the gap between the ‘actor’, writer and the reader. This is done through involving the reader in the making of events to be written about. As a result, the magazine acts as a mirror giving a reflection of actor, reader and writer who contribute in the making and completion of the publications.
We will write a custom Essay on Critical Approaches to Journalism specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Continuous diffusion of the internet has culminated into a change with regard to media-consumption patterns. There is a broad optimism concerning democratic involvement and active citizenship in the course of online media.
Bowman and Willis (2003, p. 2) and Dan Gillmor (2004) illustrate how, on the Internet the people themselves have become the media. Unlike in the traditional media where blogs as well as other community-driven media are characterized by a basic convergence of the roles of content of producers and consumers since every user has the occasion to both consume and generate content.
The fate of Journalism The saying that today’s news meaning the newspaper is tomorrow’s fish and chip paper is satirical. This is because what has been a reliable source of news all over the world for a very long time is being overtaken by technology. This is because in the contemporary world, people are accessing news from an infinite range of sources varying from radio to RSS, blogs, online news sites, and social media to e-mail.
The concern of most journalists is that today’s printed news will probably wrap fish and chips tonight. This in turn expresses very negative attitude towards journalism since the news which are worked on tirelessly for the whole night end up being to nothing within a short time.
As a result, many people consider print journalism to be on its knees. In addition, few people read news provided in the form of actual paper. News practitioners may perhaps face criticism about journalist practices in current years. Research indicates that only a couple of people read newspapers whereas millions see the print work (Silvers, Kate 2010).
Due to rapid and disruptive technological changes, journalism is struggling to deal with the blend of a fall down in advertising. This was not the case in 1970. More changes came with print media in the early 20th century otherwise called the creation of the BBC along with the establishment of its ideology of editorial independence.
There has been an immense disintegration of news suppliers amid the traditional media outlets and the new digital species. Most of them are specialist in news that one can use to solicit funds, blogs, Twitter, et cetera. However, although a number of news broadcasting firms could be at moment be faced with harsh economic conditions in an otherwise cutthroat industry, it is also important to note that there has been an increase in the number of journalists as well as the stories that they publish.
When a captivating event or story takes off on the internet, as they have done so many times in high opinion of the recognition crunch over the precedent couple of years, it is an enormous global explosion. In this case, it is important to appreciate the role of technology in journalism following the passing on of Michael Jackson. Within a matter of minutes, such blogs as TMZ had already revealed this sad news on their website.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Critical Approaches to Journalism by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This also happened when Telegraph’s website became the most important source on the major political story of the year, the discovery about MPs’ exploitation of their expenses. There is the need to appreciate the fact that today, twitter, social networking sites and blogs and very popular in comparison with say, local newspapers, tabloids and the television.
In February 2010, a survey was undertaken in the UK to find out the source of news for the populace regarding the economy. The result indicated that eighty four percent still go round back to the television first compared to fifty three percent who use the internet. This was different from the fifty two percent who turn to a newspaper.
The result also showed that thirty seven percent listen to the radio. Amongst the youth, nearly 61 percent of the respondents revealed that the internet is their first choice as a source of news. In this case, it is only the television that had a higher number of followers, at 74 percent. The implication then is that there has been a paradigm shift among the youth people regarding where they get news.
In this case, audio and video have overtaken the written word (Gillmor Dan 2004). On the other hand, it is also important to note that contemporary journalism does not provide a succinct distinction of the available rules for use in governing companies in the radio, newsprint and television industries. More so, the relevance of rules is no longer applicable due to technological advancement.
For instance, it is still not very clear if at all an industrial logic exists to prevent a potential merger of say, a national newspaper with a franchise news channel that enjoys a market share of 20 percent or more. The rules that promote variety, choice and competition, also tend to be preventing a much of the required rationalization of the way in which the news is provided. There should be balance in digital technique of delivery or allotment, whether in video, audio, or written information.
What really matters in journalism is embedded in the appropriate means of gathering information, reliability of the sources as well as the means of investigation. Newspapers are really struggling to make ends meet online. This is not a guarantee in giving news and information away but to sell it even if it sales at the lowest amount.
It is important to appreciate the fact that thus far, the internet has provided b oth opportunities and challenges to member of the fourth estate in as far as the undertaking of their respective job-related functions are concerned. For instance,
Google works directly with publishers so as to find business solutions. In turn, journalism can be able to thrive online. This brings about an optimistic future for the news industry. Journalism is moving all the way through an important shift in which business models are breaking down and at the same time innovative new forms of journalism are emerging. As a result, new consumer habits are changing quickly.
Journalists, newspaper publishers and editors, creators of new online news organizations, economists, lawyers, academics, and others have contributed their time and proficiency to illustrate and analyze this changeover, thus providing the foundation for many online documents. Many have already prepared conferences and written information that skillfully aggregate and assess the enormous majority of the significant information (Gillmor Dan 2004).
With this kind of knowledge, it is still inappropriate to conclude that the printed newspaper is already facing extinction. Studies have made known that newspapers characteristically provide the leading quantity of original news and information to consumers over any given phase of time.
There is need to include within the term “newspapers” online news websites managed either by an accessible newspaper or by an online-only news association. Other sources of news are also important, certainly, and proposals for action should not support newspapers over other news platforms. It is ironical how they can be news today then wrap fish n chips tomorrow.
The technological advancement which has led to the use of the internet as a means to pass on news and events not only posses a great challenge to the status quo of journalism at large, but also promises a thrilling new way of learning about the world. In this case, we are exposed to the views of stakeholders regarding the participation of an audience in journalism as a profession.
In this case, the internet poses a real threat to the status quo that various news businesses all over the world have thus far enjoyed. Kovach and Rosentiel (2001) have provided a persuasive case in their book, The Elements of Journalism, about the momentous transition that news businesses have been exposed to as a result of the advent of the internet.
There is need to understand the internet is not pushing away the use of newspaper as it is viewed by many people. Instead, what appears to be happening is that the establishment of a novel media ecosystem is in progress. In this case, online communities are out to both extend and converse the stories that their counterparts in mainstream media produces.
Moreover, these online communities also promote as well as produce reporting from the grassroots. This is in addition to annotative reporting, commentary, participatory, participatory journalism and fact-checking, among other activities. These activities are a representation of the feeder material to which the mainstream media religiously subscribes to.
It is clear that weblogs are not in competition with the work of the specialized journalism establishment, but rather complementing it.
Conclusion Journalism has gone through a lot of changes most of which are technologically influenced. This is evidenced from traditional newspaper production to contemporary posting of news and information on the web. In addition, journalist have moved from the age of perceiving readers as mere and passive because technology has made it possible for readers to be part of news making.
As a result, the interest to read grows since the reader is actively involved. There are also innovations in the advertisement industry where the targeted audience receives the information in advanced and faster ways. More so, publishers are able to liaise with their consumers and make known to them available publications.
Reference List Ash, E., Hettinga, K.,
Risk analysis for Carpe Sputum Medical Supplies Term Paper scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Risk mitigation and management
Introduction In this day and age, businesses need to carry out risk analyses in order to determine the market usability, security related and operational problems linked to their businesses. This is because the business environment is quite competitive and also because a lot can go wrong at any one time. Small businesses like Carpe Sputum should give this matter even more attention because in the event that one of the risks actually occurs then the business will be adversely affected.
Risk identification Carpe Sputum has several sources that can be useful in risk identification. It has a permanent workforce of 18 staff members who have plenty of experience with the company so they can provide useful insights. Furthermore, the customers, vendors and suppliers within the company can also be very useful.
On the other hand, because carrying out interviews with these individuals may prove to be a costly affair then it would probably be a good idea to rely on the operational functions of the company. Environmental analyses may also be done and market related assessments can also provide an insight into the risks inherent in this business.
From an environmental examination, the first risk that stands out is the financial risks of the company’s capital investments. In order to provide the limbs and medical supplies, Carpe Sputum invested a lot of money into acquiring the capital. The company has risked a set amount of expenditure in production. In the future, the demand for the company’s products may dwindle and this could compromise its profitability because future sales will not been realized (Abkowitz, 2008).
Ownership of the assets within this business is another risk in the event that the item stops yielding as much return as was expected. It is not known whether this company owns its assets or has leased them. In case of the former, then the organization should be aware of the repercussions of its actions. Acquiring assets without owning them is always riskier than fully owning them because retrieval cannot occur.
Since the organization is selling most of its products well then chances are some form of marketing has been done. The organization was rather small so it relied on the efforts of its salesmen. It is not known whether these salesmen are paid on commission but if they are not then their efforts may not generate the return expected.
This represents a risk to the company which must pay a fixed amount in salary and health insurance for them even if they do not deliver as much as anticipated. The human resources can also represent another risk associated with their operational occurrences. As staff carry out their tasks, they may be subjected to injuries that could cost the company a lot of money.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The inventory within the organization is also another risk to the company. It is not a guarantee that the limbs and medical supplies will sell. Consequently, the latter organization finds itself in a situation where it is only dealing with this risk in inventory alone. It has not found a way of splitting that risk with another stakeholder who might not be as affected by it. The company’s 700, 000 dollar profits could be substantially altered if the limbs do not sell.
Risk evaluation In order for an effective risk analysis, one must weigh the risks and determine the likelihood of occurrence. The impact of that risk upon the business also needs to be done and this can give the organization a way forward on mitigating them.
The highest risks in this business are associated with injury claims. This is because the risk has already occurred in the past and it has cost the company about 290, 000 dollars over three years. Clearly, the company will be better off preparing for such an eventuality. This also has the capacity to eat into the profits of the company by such a high percentage; therefore it needs to be given to the top most precedence.
The other risks that can be rated medium scale risks are the inventory and market related risks. The salesmen at each location might not deliver yet they are still consuming substantial portions of the firm’s revenues. This has happened to many small businessmen in the past and can happen to Carpe Sputum. Inventory related risks are also another problem because it is not a guarantee that the company will sell everything it contains so preparations need to be made. This would create real risk to the company’s profits (Marx, 2009).
One of the issues that can be classified as low risk is the capital investment. First of all, the company has proved that it is profitable and that the assets it contains are actually productive. However, one may not be sure about how long this can last. It would be a once-in-while issue but if it occurs, the company will be stuck with unproductive capital that it needs to get rid of.
Risk mitigation and management Insurance will be a good way to protect against a number of the risks. Although the organization is already providing its employees health coverage, it is likely that this cover may not be dealing with eventualities such as injury claims. The organization needs to set up a fund for that.
In terms of the marketing risks associated with the salesmen, the company could introduce a commission based system that would share risks with marketers. If they generate more sales, then they will benefit from higher incomes and would give them a bigger incentive to be efficient. If they generate minimal sales then the company need not pay for this inefficiency because their salaries will not fixed.
We will write a custom Term Paper on Risk analysis for Carpe Sputum Medical Supplies specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The same concept can be transferred to capital risks. This organization needs to lease its assets because this will imply that it does not necessarily own the assets and if they happen to yield minimal returns then it can forfeit the assets without having to dispose of it at a loss.
Lastly, it has not been stated whether the company actually manufactures the products for itself or sources them from somewhere else. In order to reduce inventory risks, it can make a deal with its manufacturers or suppliers to get returns on the sale of the items. This means that the organization splits its risks in exchange for a small portion of its profits.
Contingent planning The entrepreneur of the business needs to provide a cushion of his inventory by setting aside money that would be sufficient to cover operating costs for the business for six months. In case of an undetected issue, the company would still be able to run because its cash flow will not be interrupted (Pickett and Pickett, 2005).
Another contingency plan would be ensuring employees know exactly what to do in case a business emergency occurs. The company needs to train members one how to react to minimized cash flow when the business returns are low. It also needs to teach them how to respond to theft or loss of the firm’s property in another way. These fast transitions will mean that the company can be back to profitability as soon as possible and they can be more productive.
Conclusion The risks identified within this business can be eliminated, transferred or reduced. Those found to be inevitable can be shared with other parties that can take part of the risk and reap some rewards too. The latter category also entails insurance because insurance is risk transference. Those that can be reduced or avoided have been examined critically and some tangible solutions offered,
References Marx, D. (2009). The price we pay for perfection. NY: Routledge
Abkowitz, M. (2008). Operational risk management. Oxford: OUP
Burning Chrome by William Gibson Analysis college application essay help: college application essay help
Table of Contents Character and Commentary
Human Problem and Human Solution
Dealing with the Alien
“Burning Chrome” analysis in this essay explores main characters’ traits, major themes, and symbolism of the story. This story is the precedent of the author’s famous novel Neuromancer, which is followed by “Count Zero.” All his books represent similar ideas and themes. The story is about Bobby, Jack, and Rikki. Bobby is an expert hacker specializing in software while Jack is the same but specializes in hardware. The story begins in Bobby’s loft, the two men huddling together in an attempt to hack into a system that will make them rich beyond their wildest dreams.
At the end of their struggle, they were triumphant in the biggest score of their young lives, but they paid a terrible price for it. Interestingly, they were regular hackers who were content in making money but not more than the amount for which they will get caught. In the end, they wanted to get rich quick because they know that they are getting older and slower, but more importantly, because they are in love with the same woman, but only Jack knows about it.
Character and Commentary The main characters: Bobby, Jack, and Rikki, went through a significant change in their personality and in their worldview and how they tried to deal with the sudden transformation of their individual lives. Although they have different backgrounds, Bobby seemed a true-blooded nerd who always loved computers while Jack seems the more adventurous type who also happens to like computers and its ability to make money without going through the rigors of the rat race.
Rikki, on the other hand, can be compared to a girl who came from the boondocks and content to enjoy life and focused not on the more severe side of life but in how she can buy the things that she believes are important to her.
As is clear from William Gibson’s “Burning Chrome” summary, all came from different starting points. Still, they are converging into one goal and one place – they are willing to go deep into cyberspace, the term first coined by Gibson, to make a great deal of money doing something hazardous because they believe that striking it rich is the only way that they can be happy.
In their intertwined lives of Bobby, Jack, and Rikki, the author – William Gibson – was given a platform to talk about the problems faced by young men and women who had to deal with the same anxieties and desires as the people of an earlier generation. Still, this time around, they had to do it with the advent of new technology that is both difficult and scary to deal with.
This is also a reflection of the impact of modern technology on the lives of the young as they grapple with new ways to survive and thrive in a world controlled by things that are very powerful and yet unseen and misunderstood.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The characters in Gibson’s prose depicted the kind of lifestyle evident in the post-modern world. Bobby is someone who has great talent, and he can bend the rules because of that talent, and yet he is lost. In the past, society was predictable.
Parents would aspire their children to be physicians, lawyers, engineers, accountants, etc. and the moment this decision was made the children will conform to the dictates of society, partially because they also have the same values and they have the same goals and even partially because they are too afraid of the backlash of rebelling against these norms.
In the post-modern world, however, there are alternative ways to make a great deal of money and gain the respect of people.
Bobby, Jack, and Rikki may not possess the credentials and the pedigree that would have given them access to Wall Street or some glitzy establishment that will ensure them not only of a fat paycheck but the adoration of the crowd, and yet they have the power to experience the lifestyle of the rich and famous even if they technically do not possess the means. This is their dilemma; they live in the grey area of society.
They are not criminals based on the old-fashioned way of interpreting what a crime is and what is the typical profile of a lawbreaker. This is because they commit crimes without even leaving their homes and without severe physical exertion except for the slight movement of the hands and the fingers to type specific key phrases, keywords, and passwords.
In the beginning, Bobby was the picture of confidence and skill, but in the end, he was reduced to someone who cannot function without the things that he can use, either it is liquor or women. In the beginning Jack was seen as an able partner, an equally talented intrusion specialist like Bobby but as the story progresses the reader understands more and more of his stump, his hand was cut-off some time ago and this has given him an insecurity that is hard to explain but painful nonetheless especially when it comes to his love for Rikki.
At the end of the story, the reader witnessed a complete transformation in their lives. Bobby, who was supposed to be always in control, was revealed to be a person controlled by lust. Jack, who at first was seen as a skillful man, was slowly recognized as a man struggling with a handicap. He was a one-armed man who felt that there are so many things that he cannot do.
We will write a custom Essay on Burning Chrome by William Gibson Analysis
Mastering a Language in Written and Spoken Word Essay college admission essay help
Language is a complex phenomenon which can be viewed from different perspectives. On the one hand, the simplest view of language is that it is a means of communication and rendering essential information. On the other hand, not only language itself but the way it is used can bear significant meaning as well.
Mastering a language in written and spoken word testifies to a certain social standing of a person. Therefore, for some people language is a privilege that allows them to rise not only above animals but also above other people whose command of language is lower.
On a certain level, knowledge can become painful to its bearer, depending on the kind of information acquired. Frederick Douglass’ experience shows that the skills of reading and writing do not always bring peace to mind. Once Douglass could read, he learned about the flagrant injustice towards the black population.
This knowledge tormented him and he “would at times feel that learning to read had been a curse rather than a blessing” (Douglass 97). However, the desire to escape from the “mental darkness” he was doomed to by his white owners still prevailed in Douglass’ heart (Douglass 95).
Mastering the language in reading and writing helped him to realize the true state of things. For Douglass, literacy started to associate with the notion of freedom, since through learning to read and write he grasped the basic ideas on human rights infringement and the necessity for abolition of slavery.
Language as a privilege of the educated upper-class serves as a token of social success and recognition. For Amy Tan, there exist several “Englishes” which differ depending on the situation of speaking and on the people who take part in the conversation (Tan 249).
On the one hand, there is her mother’s “broken” English, a random compilation of words not linked with each other grammatically and barely making sense to an unprepared listener (Tan 250). On the other hand, there is the grammatically and lexically perfect English Tan speaks to native speakers.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The contrast between the two languages is obvious not only in the outward sentence structure. It can be observed in the way those two variations of language are perceived by other people. In a conflict situation with the hospital staff, it appears that speaking “broken” English downgrades a person to a level of a statistical unit. And only showing one’s education and social standings through perfect English earns respect and access to the appropriate social benefits.
Certain words have great power and meaning in a language. The intricate ways language works is shown by Andrew Sullivan, who demonstrates the forbidden nature of the word ‘marriage’ for same-sex couples. By not stating this word directly in the title of his short story and by substituting it with a provocative shortening “M-word”, Sullivan emphasizes the existence of taboos on official relations between same-sex individuals (Sullivan 246).
The tragedy of his story is that a word fully accepted in traditional society becomes taboo for him and thus, in a linguistic way, makes him an outcast among the others.
Language is a powerful instrument of social influence. On the one hand, illiteracy is a way of screening people off a large corps of socially significant knowledge. On the other hand, mastering language on a high level opens access to the standard social benefits and general respect.
Language is an efficient method of social ostracism, since socially unacceptable phenomena are labeled with unacceptable words. Therefore, language is not just a set of words and rules: it bears much more information ‘between the lines’ that may crucially define one’s social success or failure.
Works Cited Douglass, Frederick. “Learning to Read and Write.” A Writer’s Reference. Ed. Diana Hacker. 6th ed. New York, NY: Bedford/St Martin’s, 2007. 94–99. Print.
Sullivan, Andrew. “The M-Word: Why It Matters to Me.” A Writer’s Reference. Ed. Diana Hacker. 6th ed. New York, NY: Bedford/St Martin’s, 2007. 246–248. Print.
We will write a custom Essay on Mastering a Language in Written and Spoken Word specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Tan, Amy. “Mother Tongue.” A Writer’s Reference. Ed. Diana Hacker. 6th ed. New York, NY: Bedford/St Martin’s, 2007. 249–253. Print.
Mary Magdalene: Christian Work of Early Women of the Church Essay (Article) best essay help: best essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
The Biblical Women
Inspirations of the Women of Early Church
Spirituality and There Music
The Lifestyle of the Woman of the Early Church
Introduction The women of the early church did not have much recognition despite their immense contributions towards the growth of the church. The early church was dominated by patriarchal power and hence women were relegated to mere subordinate levels. Men have been recognized as history makers in the church, they have portrayed as the builders of the church of Jesus Christ yet they did not work alone t o accomplish such noble tasks.
But the history of the church is full of great women like Magdalene, Priscilla, Donna Vella and Macrina amongst many others. This newsletter dedicates its discussions on the early women of the church. It will particularly focus on their Christian work and influence and how they remain relevant to the contemporary society.
The Biblical Women The bible contains historical accounts of women who had significant contributions to the development of the early church. Such women, amongst others, include Mary Magdalene, Naomi, Phoebe and Esther. The contribution of women in shaping the Christian world began almost immediately after the church was first established.
For instance, taking the case of Phoebe, she was amongst the deacon of Paul. In spite of the strong patriarchal society where women were not given much recognition, Phoebe played, amongst other early women, played powerful roles in the society.
It is important to note that the patriarchal society continues to exist and while as much as some gains have been made towards equity between men and women, women are still regarded as being surbordinate to men. Given that the women in early church managed to rise above social patriarchy, they are able to serve as role models to women of today.
The women of the early church can then be seen to as rising up and taking vital positions in the society despite the cultural odds. Notably, initially, the church was not comfortable with the role of leadership played by women. However, the church has been becoming more receptive and recognizes women’s participation in the religious circle (Guy 165).
With such contributions the women of today can be inspired by women of the early church to rise above the culture of patriarchy, both in the church and the society at large. It means that, despite the fact that they are not alive now; the women of the early church can still influence women participation in various activities as they experience the effects of patriarchy (Guy 165).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Inspirations of the Women of Early Church Women of the early church had lots of inspirations that can be tapped for the benefit of the current society. One of the most inspiration can be derived from martyrdoms in which many women were willing and actually died for their stand on Christian believes and doctrines. For example, Perpetua and Felicitas died as martyrs in the year 203 due to their strong faith.
Before they were executed, Perpetua Felicitas wrote an account of their experience. At point, as the father tried to persuade her to change her mind she replied the father:
“Can you see this water pot or whatever you may see it to be? Can it be referred to by any other name…? “So I cannot call myself by any other name a part from what I really am, and that is “a Christian.”
The story of perpetual and Felicitas is an inspiration to many Christians of today and even the non-Christians. They demonstrate that they are willing to loose their lives just to maintain their fundamental beliefs and principles. Despite the fact that they were persuaded by their loved ones to denounce their beliefs to survive, they stood by them.
The scenario of Naomi and Ruth is also very inspirational. Both women decided to stay together despite the difficulties they faced together. After all the sons of Ruth had died in foreign land, she asked all daughters in law to go back to their native homes and find themselves new husbands. However, Naomi refuses and promises to stick with Ruth. Naomi stated that:
“Do not ask me to leave you or to stop following you. Because wherever you go, I will go with you; wherever you settle, I will settle with you; your people shall be mine too; your God will be my God; wherever you will be laid to rest, so shall I be also and only death will separate us.”
There are other numerous inspirations that can be derived from the women of the early church. As they discharged their duties in the church, they wrote many articles that they used in their teachings and Christian activities.
We will write a custom Article on Mary Magdalene: Christian Work of Early Women of the Church specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Spirituality and There Music The women of the early church were committed to biblical principals. Their spirituality was deeply rooted in the teachings of the bible. They believed in the supremacy of the death of Jesus; they taught the people according to spiritual revelations from God, especially the prophetess. Some of their spiritual practices included being baptized as a form of rebirth in Christ, being ordained as pastesses, deacons and celebration of Christmas and other significant religious days ((Guy 217).
They sang praise and worship songs to reinforce their spiritual commitment to God and also as a form of their prayer. But they were also dutiful to their husbands and family members as required by c the Christianity and Christian principles. In most cases, they sang songs that are in the biblical scriptures, mostly composed by David the psalmist.
For instance they sang such songs as, “Sing praise to the LORD, you saints of His, and give thanks at the remembrance of His holy name.” This song was derived from Psalms 30:4. There were many songs and hymns found in the bible used by the women of the early church.
The Lifestyle of the Woman of the Early Church Some of the women of the early church live with their families; some of them were married and had families. For example, Ruth had husband and sons who died; one of the sons was the husband to Naomi.
However, there are those women who chose to be virgins and live as nuns; in this case, the women were fully committed to the ministry of Christianity. The church began after Jesus had been crucified and later resurrected to ascend to heaven; thereafter there was a need for his followers to unite together and continue his spiritual teachings.
It was during this time when the women started getting committed to Christian work (Williamson pp.1-5). They subsequently increased in number. The women lived during a period in which the society never emphasized the importance of a woman. They were socially deprived and hence suffered lots of challenges during the time they were discharging their missionary or Christian duties. Nonetheless, the woman used to have their pilgrimages to Jerusalem
Conclusion The women of the early church lived at a time when women were culturally not recognized. This is why church history never recognizes their immense contribution and instead gave supremacy to men. However, there contributions to the development of the church still remain significant and they are source of inspiration to many people in the church today, especially women.
Their determinations and commitment to their religious beliefs and principles could not be deterred even in the face of death. For this reason, it can be said that the women of the early church left a legacy that will move from generation to generation.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Mary Magdalene: Christian Work of Early Women of the Church by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Works Cited Guy, Laurie. Introducing Early Christianity. New York: InterVarsity Press, 2004.
Williamson, Andrew. The History of the Church from Christ to Constantine. New York: Penguin Group, 1989.
Mrs. Hale: Different but Equal – Legitimate Gender Differences Critical Essay college essay help online
Inequalities between men and women turn out to be one of the most controversial topics to discuss in any forum. There are many powerful literary characters which help us to understand the essence of these differences, and one of them is Mrs. Hale in Susan Glaspell’s Trifles.
In this play, the character of Mrs. Hale helps the reader look at gender differences and consider whether the characteristics by which genders are differentiated are legitimate. Mrs. Hale proves that there are situations that benefit from evaluation from different perspectives, and a female point of view may be not just of equal importance but in fact in some circumstances more important, than the male.
At the beginning of the play, the role of Mrs. Hale is portrayed as insignificant. Her presence in the room is dismissed by the men and the stage directions “The women have come in slowly, and stand close to the door.” (Glaspell 668). The authority and domination of the men is evident. The women characters have no lines until well into the fourth page of the play. Male domination is made evident by an off handed comment made by Mr. Hale. “I was going to see if I can’t get John Wright to go in with me on a party telephone.
I thought maybe if I went to the house and talked about it before his wife, though I didn’t know as what this wife wanted made much difference to John—.” (668) Although Mr. Hale charges that “women are used to worrying over trifles.” (670), it quickly becomes evident to the reader that, albeit a gross generality, the natural attention to detail, instinct, intuition, sympathy and empathy possessed by women will be a critical factor is revealing what really happened at the Wright farm.
We discover, only through Mrs. Hale’s keen observations and extrapolation of meaning through the use of her instinct and intuition, that there are many pieces of evidence in the house to confirm the murderer, the motives and perhaps even the justification.
She finds the broken birdcage and with her intimate knowledge of the vibrant Minnie Foster “She used to wear pretty cloths and be lively, one of the town girls singing in the choir.” (672) and the cold John Wright “I stayed away because it weren’t cheerful –…Wright out to work all day, and no company when he did come in. …he was a hard man…” (675), she pieces together a credible mosaic of circumstances that brings into focus for the reader what likely happened at the Wright farm.
In fact, the songbird in the play is one of the most captivating symbols for the feminine. Mrs. Wright could be seen as a songbird in a cage created by her husband from which she could never escape, except through death. In her case the death of her captor.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It’s only fitting that Mrs. Hale can intuitively see this connection even though she may not express it in those exact terms. This ability is something that is quite possibly outside the realm and possibility of a stereotypical male thought process, certainly a typical patriarchal male of the time.
Works Cited Glaspell, Susan. “Trifles.” Backpack Literature: An Introduction to Fiction, Poetry, and Drama. Ed. X.J. Kennedy
Obesity and How Society views it Research Paper essay help site:edu
Throughout the human history, weight gain and fat storage have been seen the signs of fertility and prosperity. Currently, due to the rise of living standards, excess weight and obesity are posing a growing threat to health in many countries around the world.
Obesity is a chronic disease that prevails in both developed and developing countries and affects children as well as adults. This problem is urgent to the extent that it replaces more traditional public health concerns including infectious disease and malnutrition as negative depositors to person’s health.
In addition, as obesity is the major risk factor for other chronic and non-communicable diseases, it is just a matter of time before the same high mortality rates for such diseases will be viewed in developing countries. The same rates existed in industrialized countries 20 years ago thought having good developed market economies (Takrouni, 2008). Finally, obesity is referred to as abnormal or excessive fat accumulation to an extent that human health may be affected (Takrouri, 2008).
Statement thesis Obesity is a serious disease that is being heavily discussed in the United States and is contributing to the development of other chronic conditions and dangerous disorders. The weight excess influences the organism and provokes heart diseases and disorders of blood-vascular system.
The weight gain also provides a considerable stress on other organs and, therefore, weakens the immune system of the organism. However, there are cases when excess weight is the outcome of genetic heredity, which is often serves as a viable excuse for obese people. Therefore, there is the necessity to shatter all the myths and to make people lead a healthy life style.
The Epidemic of Obesity It is undeniable that the epidemic of obesity has no social, economic, technologic, and geographic boundaries. This especially matters as the skyrocketing rates of this disease are closely associated with metabolic syndrome affecting the rate of mortality and morbidity of obesity.
Approximately, two hundred and seventy million (270,000,000) people in the world are considered to be obese and the number is assumed to reach three hundred and fifty million (350,000,000) in coming 2026 (Kushner and Bessesen, 2007, p. 100). The problem of the excess weight has become more urgent in the United States during the last three decades. In particular, one third of adults are obese.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More What is more deplorable is that this obesity proliferation has no gender, age, and racial distinctions (Kushner and Bessesen, 2007, p. 100). The more significant concern is connected with the impetuous growth of the childhood obesity. The statistics counts that the United States has each sixth child suffering from obesity (Kushner and Bessesen, 2007, p. 100).
Obesity is considered to cause major impacts on the health care costs, economic costs, and social costs because its swift growth has almost outstripped the HIV/AIDS. To be more precise, 2005 witnessed about 75 % of American people suffering from HIV/AIDS and almost 86 % are the victims of excessive weight (Mooney et al., 2008, p. 42). Therefore, apart from preventive measures of obesity, which are viable solutions for assisting in slowing down the rates of disease, there should be some alternative and effective methods of treatment.
This can be achieved through government research and implementation of scientific projects aimed at facilitating the public education on issues concerning obesity. Proper treatment to those who are already suffering from obesity should be administered and proper care given so as to assist them to overcome the problem of excess weight. Obesity management needs urgent attention, especially in rural areas.
Health care services should be decentralized to local areas for easier access to all people who need them. Therefore, these individuals should be seriously targeted for treatment to prevent obesity proliferation in the United States. There is also the necessity to create awareness of the disease as a major health problem because government and some health care systems pay insufficient attention to it.
Obesity as a Disease Apart from genetics, most cases of patient’s obesity are the outcome of unhealthy food intake and actual lifestyle. There are few people who think over the reasons of such chronic diseases as heart failure, diabetes, and asthma are excess weigh and careless attitude to the food allowance.
Taking into consideration the weight issues, the above chronic disorders can be considered as symptoms. Therefore, the obesity is the root of all problems that should be eliminated immediately. According to statistics, “even with improved management of comorbidities associated with obesity, the estimated number of excess death in 2000 association with obesity was 111.909” (McKnight, 2005, p.1)
With regard to the above, a healthy life style, culture of food consumption and human behavior are the main pillars of healthy existence.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Obesity and How Society views it specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This is why when buying food and other product, people should stick the appropriate rules. However, the lack of education and proliferation of food culture still leaves much to be desired. In addition, people should stop spending money on weight loss products but spend more on the processes of developing health actions, behavior, and eliminating poor lifestyles (Finkelstein et al., 2003)
Other Chronic Conditions That Make It Hard To Overcome Obesity The occurrence of chronic disorders is difficult to eliminate for a person who tries to reduce or improve when they have excess weight. Such chronic disorders include the heart disease causing many lethal outcomes, particularly among the American population. Arthrosclerosis is another chronic condition emerging as a result of obesity problems, diabetes, and genetics inheritance. The presented complications aggravate the process of treatment considerably (DeBruyne et al., 2007, p. 372).
In addition to the above-defined chronic conditions, there are some other factors hampering obesity treatment. It should be admitted that obesity prevention and therapy should be carried out with the help of effective strategies and, therefore, common measures are not likely to be implemented. Hence, it is necessary to consider all risk factors, future complications that might occur as well as side effects. Therefore, these chronic diseases are major stumbling blocks for people suffering from obesity.
Types of Illness Relating to Obesity and Consequences of Stigma Cardiovascular, hypertension, mortality diabetes, and breathing difficulties are related with obesity. Sometimes obesity does not have a negative impact on health. But it might cause stress, anxiety, loss of self-esteem, and depression. This is excess weight affects both the health and the psychological status of a person (Ross, 2003).
Attention to obese people has spread worldwide due to high and shocking rates of obesity and its health problems particularly in the United States of America. Obese people experience stigma and discrimination leading to serious consequences for their emotional and psychological health.
More importantly, obesity stigma is experienced in all aspects of person`s life because such people are poorly treated by their counterparts at work and other social spheres. The state of being obese makes people lazy, passive and indifferent to life; they might even lose the sense of existence. This is especially typical of people with inferiority complex that often develops among people suffering from excess weight.
Before considering the stigma of weight, it is necessary to study the phenomenon of stereotypes that serves as the basic condition for obesity biases. According to Brownell (2005), “the content of all stereotypes varies along two dimension of more and less socially desirable traits: warmth and competence” (p. 111).
Such theoretical model closely relates to stigma of obesity. Hence, the content of stereotypes mentioned above can be applied to obese individuals because such people can commonly react to the presented factors. However, this particular bias is more concerned with the issues of controllability and visibility.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Obesity and How Society views it by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More It is proved that the problem of excess weight is a negative stigma because is visible and treated to be controllable (Browneell, 2005, p. 111). Arising from the above, there is an assumption that negative perception of excess weight can create negative reactions and stereotypes which, in their turn, provoke people’s resentment and contempt
Obese adults who experience stigma have developed high rates of social isolation because they feel like they are not accepted by the society. Social reluctance to accept such people cultivates the lack of self esteem and refusal to socialize with people agreed with the stereotype frames. Another consequence of stigma is that it leads to a negative consequence of poor eating behaviors or habits such as overeating by some people in response to stigmatizing encounters (Richards, 2009).
Problems Encountered by Doctors When Treating the Obese Patients Obesity is an important clinical issue that can not be ignored. Therefore, it needs provision of professional and critical health care services directed at improving the health of the population in the United States. Unfortunately, the health care centers are full of insensitivity and judgment toward the obese people creating difficulties and limits for treatment.
The main problem encountered by the doctors is lack of understanding and appropriate ethical treatment. For instance, the doctor may unintentionally communicate some form of discrimination that may negatively affect the client’s care and hence preventing him/her from visiting the healthcare centers in future. Therefore, irrelevant treatment can prevent doctors from prescribing the right medical and treatment procedure for their patients (Kaplan, 1999).
Obesity, a Global Problem and Its Effect on Children and Women Obesity has been rated among the increasing epidemics in developed countries and rapid spread in developing countries. In the United States, approximately 125 million grown-ups have problems with weight, 70 million citizens are experiencing obesity and around 10 million have severe obesity problems (Ogden, 2010).
Childhood and women obesity is also on the peak in the United States. This ration of population, hence, has a greater probability of diabetes mellitus development and hypertension rise that increases the risk of acquiring heart diseases and other chronic diseases associated with obesity (Ogden, 2010).
The weight of these children enhances bulling and discrimination by other children who have normal weights thus ruining their self–esteem. Today`s children belong to a generation that is full with computer games and television therefore, they have less time to exercise or even go out to play some outdoor games which encourage physical exercises. A part from watching and playing video games, food is readily available at any time they feel like eating (Coakley, 1999).
Preventive Measures to Overcome Obesity Parents need to be the role models of their children by insisting on benefits of exercise and well balanced diets. This can be achieved through creating of healthy playing environments by carrying out regular physical exercises like cycling, taking a walk together and swimming activities. Parents need to motivate their children so that they can participate fully in sports and dances and pay attention to physical exercises and even enjoy doing it (Christopher, 2003).
Implementation of food culture will help a great deal in obesity reduction and elimination. This can be achieved by preparing and eating the food together as a family and creating new ways to reward children for work well done like talking them out on shopping trips other than making for them fatty foods.
Health care providers should offer improved services to their patients through the improvement of physical and social environment of health care settings. For example, they should provide bathrooms, which heavier clients can easily accept, have meeting rooms that have large exam tables and blood pressure cuffs with good size and reading materials that do not imply discriminative context (Coakley, 1999).
They should also try to improve their interpersonal interactions with the obese clients through being sensitive in everything they do and communicate to them to avoid embarrassing situation during the treatment process. They should avoid any judgmental comments and instead offer encouragement on the objectives of heath and fitness actions.
The victims of the obese problem should be encouraged to take the stigmatization encounters in a positive manner and use that as their stepping stone to overcome the problem rather than to accept the given situation and doing nothing to rectify the situation at hand. Depression and stress contribute nothing to weight reduction but deprives away a person’s self esteem and happiness.
Thus, these people need to wake up and find solutions to their issues immediately to avoid early deaths (Barry, 2007). The chart presented below provides an explicit, comparative analysis of the actual situation in the United States:
Obesity Share by Nation The given statistics provided by Consumer shows that the United States have on of the highest obesity level.
Conclusion Prevention of obesity would result into maximized burden of heart problems and, therefore, it will play a big role in reducing the health care budget.
Through the reduction of obesity, other diseases associated with it will also decrease. Therefore, problem of obesity should be given much attention and serious preventive measures should be implemented so that the disease could be treated or prevented. A good obesity prevention program should include balanced diet, exercises, and active involvement of parents and guardians in these programs.
Apart from local measures this problem should be presented at the international level because other countries (developing in particular) should also be engaged in the solution searching process. Hence, the world government should think about effective strategies of economic and social improvement to insure people with a sufficient level of living. Finally, it is necessary to pay attention to ethical and moral aspects when treating obese people.
Reference List Barry, L. (2007).Heart Care for Life: Developing the Program That Works best for him/her. Yale: Yale University Press.
Brownell, K. D. (2005). Weight bias: Nature, Consequences, and Remedies. US: Guilford Press.
Christopher, K. (2003). A community-based obesity prevention program for minority Children: rationale and study design for Hip-Hop to Health. US: Harvard University Press.
Coakley, E. (1999). The Disease Burden Associated with Overweight and Obesity. New York: Must and company.
DeBruyne, L. K., Pinna, K., and Whitney, E. N. (2007). Nutrition and Diet Therapy. US: Cengage Learning.
Finkelstein E. A., Fiebelkorn, I. C., and Wang, G. (2003) .National medical spending attributable to overweight and obesity: How much, and who’s paying .Chicago: Finkelstein.
Kaplan, J. (1999). Caloric imbalance and public health policy. US: JAMA.
Kushner, R. F, and Bessesen, D. H. (2007). Treatment of the obese patient. US: Springer.
McKnight, L. (2005). Obesity management in family practice. Germany: Birkhäuser.
Mooney, L. A., Knox, D. and Schacht, C. (2008). Understanding Social Problems. US: Cengage Learning.
Ogden, J. (2010). The Experience of Obese and the Many Consequences of Stigma. Journal of Obesity.
Richards, L. (2009). Poor Quality of Obesity Care in the U.S. Nature Reviews Endocrinology, 5(6), p. 291. Web.
Ross, A. (2003).Obesity: etiology, assessment, treatment, and prevention. New York: Human Kinetics.
Takrouri, M. S. (2008). Editorial: Obesity is a Spreading Modern Life Health Problem. The Internet Journal of Health. Web.
Some social responsibility practices Essay essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu
Table of Contents Introduction
Some social responsibility practices
Companies in oil industry
Companies in banking sector
Introduction It is a very sad moment for the citizens of the world when the companies only focuses their efforts on profit making without even caring for the people and environment around where they operate. It is a mere fact to every sensible mankind that the main objective of entering in to business is profit making. Consequently, this does not give the corporate world moral authority to use all means available to them to maximise their profits at the expense of failing to adopt social responsibility programs.
Even though the corporate sector may argue that it is the work of the government to ensure safety for their citizen by taking care of all environmental and social issues which may arise in the course of business undertaking by the corporate sector since they pay taxes to the government. This will not be a moral approach because various companies should be responsibly accountable for the consequences of their business activities which they undertake on daily basis.
Thus this call for all companies to put in place all possible programs of social responsibility and if this programs are implemented effectively then corporate sector will be in good terms with the various stakeholders and thus gain their good will which may be of great boost to their success.
In this case we are going to address various practices which the corporate world can implement to promote their social responsibility (Wood, 2001, p.699). We will are look at some examples of the companies and see what they are doing so far and the consequences which they might have faced or caused due to their failure to incorporate social responsibility programs in their management.
Some social responsibility practices The social responsibilities entail the acts of companies to embrace the stipulations of law, standards which are ethical and global norms in their day to day activities. This implies that the companies should always be in a position to assume and take responsibility in case something wrong happens in the course of their service delivery.
The companies may need to compensate various stakeholders who may include the employees of the company, the local community, consumers of their services and the members of the public at large not forgetting the environment. Social responsibilities will not only be limited to what the companies should do in case of uncertainties in their service delivery but also include what the companies should attempt and do in order to better the lives of humanity at large (Windsor,2006, p. 95).
To attain this better life for every mankind the socially responsible companies should actively involve themselves with charitable programs. The companies can involve themselves with offering scholarships to the needy as a way of giving back to the society and also offering equal employment opportunities to all persons without any discrimination of any form.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The corporate sector should always put the interests of the public first in their key decision making and not just thinking of making big money without attaching value to the concerns of their customers and general public at large. Always the corporate sector should bear in mind that they stand to gain a lot if they stop practicing management system which is focussed on immediate and temporary profits (Handy,2002, p. 71).
This is because sustainability is of critical importance to the continuity of any given company and thus when planning for the activities of the business, the future generation should be taken in to consideration such that they are not affected in meeting their needs.
Companies in oil industry The issues of social responsibilities have been of serious consequences most especially in companies operating in energy sector and specifically in United States of America.
This is because despite the global efforts to reduce the carbon emission which has brought adverse impacts on climate change and global warming the energy industry in United States of America has been so reluctant in implementing safer energy sources. This is very evident in the way the top five energy companies have contacted themselves in trying to address the challenge of going green in terms of energy sources.
Even some of the chief executive offers of these companies have been quoted showing a lot of pessimism on the global dream of going and instead saying that the world will for a very long time rely on hydro carbons in order to get or acquire energy. Some of these giant energy companies include the Shell, BP, Exxon, Conoco Phillips and the Chevron (Kotler,2005, p. 63).
Despite the fact that these companies have continued to enjoy abnormal profits they have shown very little concern on shifting to green energy. This is very evident since even after making huge profits due to global hikes in oil prices they have only invested insignificant amounts of this profits in other alternative sources of energy such solar energy and wind energy.
It is also a known fact that the energy industry companies have continued to neglect the implementation of social responsibility programs, and instead they have continued to suppress the interests of majority by working with corrupt politicians.
We will write a custom Essay on Some social responsibility practices specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More These oil companies have used all means to ensure that their interests are protected in the legislature in such a way that even if they pose great risk to the public they have very little to be accountable for. It is said these companies usually fund so heavily to the federal election so that they can get favours from the government of the day and also they at the same time corrupt some law makers to champion for their interests in the congress.
It is also said that despite the fact that this oil companies have continued to make huge profits at the expense of all other sectors of economy they have also continued to enjoy subsidies and incentives (Edwards,2006,p. 67). This fact has forced president Obama to propose taxation to these companies but the proposal is currently being fought by the companies who are arguing that taxing energy sector is like discouraging the growth of domestic industries at large.
At the moment we are experiencing a severe consequence with BP Oil Company as a resort of gulf oil spill. This has occurred due to practice of very dangerous methods of oil exploitations and most probably the insensitivity of companies such as BP towards the humanity, aquatic life and the environment at large.
This is a clear evidence that all what this company cares for is big money but not clean environment because it has not been involved in the clean up exercise effectively and tourists in various beaches are complaining about the waters and the safety of such environments not to mention how adversely lives of fishermen and aquatic animals have been affected. If the BP Company had taken the public interest in their decision making may be this could not have happened because they could have used safer methods to extract oil (Cochran, 2005, p. 767).
Consequently, such big loses as a result of pressure to compensate the affected people could not have occurred and the image of the company could have continued to be good but now even the shares have reduced price in the stock market due to that occurrence of oil spill and may be the company may undergo receivership.
Companies in banking sector In the banking industry there has been some great hope and sincerity in implementing the social responsibility programs. This is evident with some banks such as the JP Morgan, Bank of America, City Group and the Chase bank companies.
These banks have implemented policies which restrict them from lending money to those projects which are destructive to the environment in accordance with the interest of environmentalists. The banks have implemented environmental policies which are very effective in order to reduce emission of green house gases despite the fact that this action will reduce their opportunities of making more profits (Handy,2002,p. 83).
Conclusion It is evident from the above that the need to implement social responsibility initiatives is inevitable for each individual company for the sake of well being of mankind at large. Also it is seen that the benefits of implementing the social responsibilities programs are enormous in long run in terms of good will for the company from the public.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Some social responsibility practices by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The costs of failure to consider the interests of the other stakeholders in corporate decision making are very severe in event of a disaster. Here we have illustrated the social responsibilities by using real and existing companies.
Bibliography Cochran, P. (2005). The Evolution of the Corporate Social Performance Model. Academy of Management Review, Vol.10, p. 767
Edwards, T. (2006). Corporate Social Responsibility in Multinational Companies. Journal of Management, p. 67
Handy, C. (2002). What is a Business For? Harvard Business Review.
Kotler, P. (2005). Corporate Social Responsibility. New York. Barnes
Oil and Gas Prices Expository Essay essay help online free
In the recent past, there has always been news or reports on the rising gas and oil prices. In the recent past, prices have risen from a little over a dollar per gallon to at least $3.47 per gallon. This is according to Forbes (2008), a congressman of the Virginia fourth congressional district.
There have been reports that this trend would continue for some time even to a price of 30 more cents per gallon. These increases in prices have been an issue since they have been straining most of the families’ budgets. Forbes says that he has been receiving emails and letters from his constituents regarding the issue seeking to know why the prices are rising at that rate.
If this situation continues for a while, it could have much effect on the world’s economy as it would impact strongly on the families and businesses as well. The following paper seeks to find out the effects of these fluctuating prices on the environment and the economy and the effects of going green with/without the oil and gas.
According to Forbes (2008), the rising gas prices in the past couple of years could have been caused by several factors that have had individual pressure on the energy system.
They either influence the price of crude oil or production and marketing of gasoline and the interaction of these in a single market affect the overall gas prices. Some of them include; crude oil prices – their prices are determined by the demand and supply in the world.
The OPEC countries are the determining factors since they decide on what to produce and export. This means that the more they produce, the less the prices will be. However, due to the fact that oil is traded in the world market, whatever happens on the ground in these countries could greatly have an effect on the amount of oil produced at a particular time of the year.
Some example of such events that have affected oil prices in the past include; the OPEC cartel decided to raise production quotas despite the fact that they had previously reduce them in the year 2002. The increasing population in china, India and developing worlds has seen most of the people in these countries have access to automobiles hence increasing the demand for gas and oil in these countries.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More There have been disruptions in countries that produce a lot of oil like Nigeria and Venezuela. Another reason for the increased oil/gas prices is the refinery imbalances – the rising economic growth in the US has created some imbalances in the refining industries since the demand for gasoline is increasing daily and with the declining refining capacity, a lot of constraint has been put on the available oil forcing them to increase prices.
Seasonal changes are another factor that has caused the fluctuating gasoline prices. This relates to the time of the year and in this case, gas prices are higher during summer and holiday seasons as many people in America are traveling and hence the demand is high.
Forbes (2008) explains that not only crude oil production that impacts on the fluctuating prices rather there are factors such as environmental programs, competition in the local market and proximity of supply. In this case, people living in areas far from the Gulf Coast which is the area where gasoline is produced are likely to pay higher prices since the total price will cover the transportation expenses.
Prices also vary according to the competition in a particular area. For instance, the rural areas might experience higher prices since there are not many stations offering such services and on the other hand, those areas with several stations will have fairer prices due to competition.
According to Forbes (2008), the increasing prices have had impact in various sectors in the US. In farming, farmers use energy in processes like fertilization, and due to the increased prices in energy, they have been forced to cut down the amount of produce in a year. This in turn has increased the prices in the amount of food stuff and burden is left on the consumers. Reports by US department of Agriculture said that between 2000 and 2005, the fuel cost on farming rose by 10%.
In manufacturing, manufacturers are also not left out as the increased cost on energy used to produce goods forces them to increase the prices of the goods produced and at times they are forced to lower their workers’ salaries. This in turn puts pressure on consumers and workers and strains the economy. The tourism department has also been affected since airlines and bus lines need fuel for them to be fully operational.
Some families have been forced to cut short or reduce their travel due to the increased oil prices and due to this, cities that highly depend on tourism have had heir economy affected. Other than the overall economic effect, individuals have also felt a pinch as they are forced to readjust their budgets to pay for the high prices (Forbes, 2008).
We will write a custom Essay on Oil and Gas Prices specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More There are many man-made machines that rely on oil and gas such as air crafts, motor vehicles and many other industrial machines for them to function. Much as they are useful, they also have some consequences that are experienced by both human beings and the environment at large.
For instance, coal and oil have molecules that have byproducts of carbon, nitrogen and sulfur when they are burnt. Apart from this, they also produce some form of particles that do not burn and hence released to the environment and cause pollution (NaruralGas.org, 2004). The environmental issue that has been on discussion currently, the green house effect, is due to the high levels of gases that are being emitted by these green houses.
Naturally, there are gases in the environment that regulate the amount of heat that is emitted on the atmosphere. Researches show that increased emission of green house gases could lead to high temperatures on the earth surface and eventually have disastrous effects on the environment. Motor vehicle and aircraft emissions, paints and emissions from industries contribute to smog which is a product of carbon monoxide, nitrogen oxides and heat from the sun.
When these products combine, they form a smoggy layer on the environment and can also cause respiratory problems such as lung damages if inhaled by both human beings and animals. Chemicals such as sulfur and nitrogen dioxides react with water vapor to form acid rain which also pollutes the environment, damages crops and causes respiratory illnesses in human beings (NaruralGas.org, 2004).
Apart from being environmental pollutants, gas/oils have several benefits. For instance, natural gas is the cleanest fuel since its combustion process produces little byproducts that may pollute the environment. It does not leave any soot or odors and if inhaled in small amounts, it does not affect human beings.
Natural gas is also economical since it is piped directly to the consumer and the system is not easily affected by weather changes hence enhancing safety. When using gas and oil, they are easy to transport hence quite efficient. Oil extraction, refining and selling has also created jobs for many people in the producing countries and also improved the economy of the country though exports.
Going green is a term that has been in use currently referring to the methods in our daily lives that can be used to help save the environment. According to Save the World (2009), green living entails reduction in the use of oil based energy and using only organic and chemical free products.
One can also decide to go green at home by applying healthy farming practices through the use of organic and chemical free farm products. It also means people trying to save water by always turning off taps after use and switching off lights when they are not needed. Some people are also trying to save the world by deciding to use bicycle or walk on foot for the short distances instead of using vehicles that use a lot of gas and oils while emitting harmful gases on the environment (Save the World, 2009).
Not sure if you can write a paper on Oil and Gas Prices by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More All these practices are aimed at saving the environment and creating a healthier earth and in turn reduce diseases and provide healthy individuals who will be involved in developing the world. However, this move does not come without its negative effects as well. McRae (n.d) argues that as much as we are trying to save the world by using organic products, it is quite clear that such products are quite expensive than traditional ones.
This also applies to the hybrid vehicles and use of solar panels which seem to be quite expensive. In this world where all are not equal, not every one is in a position to purchases such products and this means that if they can’t afford the big changes; they may not be part of the change at all. Use of fluorescent bulbs is said to save energy as they last longer and use less energy.
However, there is evidence that they contain mercury and if no properly disposed, they could contaminate soil or water. Therefore, they must be recycled and this means that one has to store the used bulbs until they are collected by people concerned (McRae, n.d).
In conclusion the fluctuating oil and gas prices have had an impact on the economy ranging from tourism, manufacturing and farming. At the same time, use of these products in our daily live helps us a great deal as they speed up our operations in various operations.
However, they also have negative impacts as they pollute the environment through emission of gases and particles and thus causing disease. This leads to use of a lot of money for treatment purpose and as such it means that unless we try to devise ways of reducing these effects, the little we get from our businesses will always be used to offset hospital bills.
Going green is a strategy being adopted by many in the world to help save the planet by reducing the use of oil based energy and organic products. Much as it is a good way of conserving our environment, it has its own disadvantages which must be looked into such as the expenses which of course are not affordable to all.
Reference List McRae, S. Negative Effects of Going Green. Web.
Save The World. (2009). Going Green: What Does Going Green Mean? Web.
Forbes, R. J. (2008). FAQs: Gas Prices. Web.
NaturalGas.org. (2004). Natural Gas and the Environment. Web.
Healthy Interpersonal Relationship Essay essay help: essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Healthy Interpersonal Relationships
Introduction Interpersonal relationship can be defined as an association, connections or social affiliations between two or more individuals. Interpersonal relationships vary in terms of levels of intimacy and revolve around a common objective or shared interest. Interpersonal relationship is very important amongst a group of individuals; it is a skill that enables one relate well with others in a group (Cahn
Viewing the Globe in 2056 Research Paper custom essay help: custom essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Perspective between 2006 and 2056
Introduction All over the world, the issue that has been of great concern is globalization. To achieve this, interconnectivity in all parts of the world is technologically advancing with regard to means of communication, business opportunities, political ideologies, cultural beliefs and norms as well as trade (Johnson 1).
As a result, a global village where connectivity is easily attainable is created. This increases the rate at which nations connect with each other so as to benefit from expanded business opportunities as well as enhanced network of communication. As much as globalization has positive effects on nations and organizations, it also affects the lives of individuals.
Perspective between 2006 and 2056 The lives of the Chinese farmers revolve around the farm. They entirely depend on rice, wheat and other crops for their daily upkeep. In general, farming in China is the backbone of country’s economy. Actually, many people find their employment in the agricultural sector in China.
With technological advances, production of farming for domestic use as well as export has been increasing in recent years. Because of globalization China has been able to establish a network of communication with the global market thus making it easier for farm produce to be exported across borders. A report indicates that China is now ready to start producing genetically modified crops. This in turn enhances the levels of production.
Where as large scale farmers improve with the change in market strategies all the way to the year 2056, the small-scale farmer is left lagging behind still practicing ancient farming systems, still expecting to earn a living.
In return, the competition in production between the small subsistence farmers and the large scale farmers lowers down leaving the large scale farmers to take dominance the market. As such, the small scale farmer continues being impoverished. In view of the world in the next 50 years, peasant farmers will be disoriented in terms of communication and market opportunities.
This is due to failure to globally grow in line with others as a result of technological as well as social factors. Unless measures are put in place to help such farmers improve with the change in technology, the challenge in 50 years to come will be on the widened gap between the poor and the rich.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In Africa, globalization has increasingly provided opportunities for development and improved living standards. Presently, most African countries are working on regionalism that is the road to globalization. As a result, borders and regional blocks are gradually decreasing hence giving way for multilateral trade liberation.
However, the rate at which Africa is globally growing is not comparable to other nations as the United States and or Europe. According to research, Africa as a continent is globally far behind in terms of economic development.
Whereas world growth in general is radically improving due to globalization, this may not be the case for most parts of Africa. World Bank report shows that most of the population in the world depends on a dollar per day for survival. This case is true for developing countries as African countries where the majority of the population, approximately a third of the population operate below the poverty line (Hope 18).
With such statistics, the global future does not hold much for an African parent in the next 50 years to come. For such a parent who barely spends less than a dollar on her large family, (meaning that in such a family, quality education may not be accessed) globalization may not mean much because they have nothing to share in the global market.
Even though this is true for Africa as a continent in the next 50 years, the governments can reverse the situation. This can be achieved through working on policies such as the trade policy and the macroeconomic policy. Trade policy helps liberalization of trade in regions thus increasing the chance for economic growth (The impact of globalization 20).
Unlike the case for developing countries as China and Africa, where globalization threatens to increase the rate of unemployment and thus lower the Gross Domestic Product, in the United States, such a move is well planned for and anticipated by many individuals as well as cooperates. For countries such as the United States, development can be traced back when most third world countries were still struggling for national liberation from colonies. Hence, many were left behind with regard to development.
Since globalization is an issue initiated by the western world, the rate at which the world is becoming a global village in the view of a U.S software engineer may not be the same as the view of a Chinese farmer or the African parent. To the software engineer, globalization has already taken root and is destined to soar even higher.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Viewing the Globe in 2056 specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This is based on the reason that the engineer can reach out to friends and family all over the world through the internet, shop and even market commodities on the internet. This is only a dream to those living in the third world countries who only hear of computers and internet services, they are yet to see and use them.
In prospect, globalization in the United States by the year 2056 will further raise the living standards of the population by making it easier to access services from all over while at a single point. This something that is already practical since technology has played a major role in making communication simple and faster.
In addition, most companies due to globalization and favorable trade policies are taking advantage of the global market through banking on operating their business around the globe. In comparison with developing countries, this is hindered by poor trade policy making.
Conclusion In conclusion, the view of a fully globalised world entirely depends on the current state of a given country. For developed countries, this will be easy to achieve compared to third world countries where it might take a longer time to attain this due to various factors. It is therefore important to note that globalization will not be achieved at the same rate in the world over.
However, to achieve this goal, developed countries can partner with developing countries with the aim of gradually integrating the concept of globalization so that the race towards globalization can be inclusive of third world countries. Once adequate strategies and measures towards globalization are put in place, all will realize the positive impact of globalization and as such, solving global issues will be easier because of unity in global progress.
Works Cited Hope, Kempe. Development in the third world: From policy failure to policy reform. New York: M.E Sharpe Inc. 1996. Print.
Johnson, June. Global issues, local arguments: Readings for writing. 2007. Web.
The impact of globalization on developing countries. 2003. Web. http://www.essa.org.za/
Not sure if you can write a paper on Viewing the Globe in 2056 by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More
The Fairy Tale Rapunzel Explicatory Essay scholarship essay help
According to the story, Rapunzel was taken away from her mother by a witch immediately after her birth. The justification for this is that the girl’s mother had eaten a Rapunzel from the witch’s farm. However, Rapunzel grew up as a loving beautiful girl. When she was thirteen years old, the witch devised more strategic ways of hiding her from her mother.
She managed it by hiding her in a high tower only one small hole to let in air so that no one could reach her. Whenever the old witch visited Rapunzel, she would command Rapunzel to throw her hair down so that she could use it as a climbing rope (Oracle Think Quest, n.d, para. 6).
One day, as a prince was passing by, she heard a melodious voice coming from the tower. At first, the prince experienced some difficult tracing where the voice was coming from. Fortunately, she succeeded when he saw the witch climbing the tower by the help of the girl’s hair (Oracle Think Quest, n.d, para. 5). Later on, the prince came back in the evening and asked Rapuunzel to throw her hair down so that he could climb up to her. From that day on, Rapunzel and the prince began a new life together.
Upon realizing what was going on, the witch became very furious and decided to cut off Rapunzel’s beautiful hair after which she took her away to a desert. When the prince went to meet her love the next day, he could not trace the girl. He became so disappointed and immediately walked out the tower.
On his way out, he accidentally got pricked by thorns in the eyes and would only roam allover as a blind man. This continued for a long time but one day as he was moving around, he heard the same voice that he had heard in the tower at the first time. Again, it was Rapunzel.
The only way he could show his joy was by crying. The prince was overtaken and uncontrollably wept out of joy until his blindness disappeared. Thereafter, he took Rapunzel to his empire where they happily lived together (Oracle Think Quest, n.d, para. 3).
Rapunzel fairy tale is a folklore whose origin is Germany and is done by Brothers Grimm. Germany which is a federal country is well known for historic contribution especially in relation to arts. The folklore from Germany is a unique product that portrays great thinkers.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This fairy tale is important to Germans culture. This arises from the meanings it has to the family statues in Germany. Although family statue is almost facing extinction due to high rates of divorce, it is still a significant unit within the society (Advameg Incorporation, 2010, para. 3). According to this folktale, Germans are depicted as superstitious. The witch (mother Gothel) commonly referred to as godmother, is an epitome of superstition as shown in the story.
The prevalent theme in the fairy tale is love. As Rapunzel grows up, she falls in love with the prince who becomes her only family. This is because she had been snatched by the witch from her parents and did not have any other person she could relate to. Her long hair is a symbol of a bond that links her to the outside world and from the witch’s bondage.
In as much as this folktale is important to the Germans, it also helps me appreciate folklore from other cultural settings. Consequently, through the tale one is able to understand Germany as a cultural group.
Source: Google Images
Reference List Advameg Incorporation. (2010). Countries and their culture, Culture of German. Retrieved from https://www.everyculture.com/Ge-It/Germany.html
Oracle Think Quest. (n.d). Projects by students for students, The fairy tale Rapunzel. Web.
Relational Database Systems Report best essay help: best essay help
Executive Summary The Easy Drive School of Motoring is an organization that came into existence in 1992. Since then, the organization has expanded in most of the cities of Scotland and as a result the methods used in the storage, retrieval and security of information have proved to be inefficient. This is due to the increase in the records kept in form of paper work.
This is a business report, personally addressed to the manager of the Easy Drive School of Motoring explaining why and how a relational database system will address the problems of the organization. The report aims at making the manager understand why the database system is recommended. The report is divided into various sections which address the issue.
The introduction section introduces the manager to the concept of databases. It continues to explain further what exactly a Relational database system is and the types available. The strengths of the system are discussed deeply in relation to how best they can suit the organization. The concept is finally recommended to the manager in the conclusion clause and a list of references follows.
Introduction A database is something so vital for an organization to go without. In definition, it is referred to as ‘‘A store of a large amount of information, esp. in a form that can be handled by a computer.’’ in the Collins dictionary. Data is fed into the computer and stored in the hard disk compartment of the computer in a form that is not human readable or can not be understood out rightly.
This is where a database management system comes into play. It can be defined as a software application through which data is managed by following a certain set of instructions (Saffady, 1998). The system is responsible for converting data into a format that we humans can easily comprehend. Besides this, data can be stored, manipulated and retrieved by authorized personnel only. In short it can be abbreviated as DBMS.
There are various types of Database management system models adopted by organizations, each with its different characteristics. Examples of these models include; the hierarchical, the network, the object and the relational model (Saffady, 1998). In this report however, emphasis will be laid on the model that adopts the Relational DBMS concept.
Back then when the database concept was new in computer systems, two types of models were adopted to aid in managing data in the databases. These were the network and the hierarchical based models. It required specialized personnel to operate databases that made use of these models, since when it came to retrieval of data one had to posses knowledge of the exact location of data in the database. This brought about the need to have the Relational DBMS, which introduced the concept of relating database tables with each other.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More A Relational DBMS views the whole concept of database as a set of tables; it intuits one table to the other. The system has quite a number of ways of storing data in such a manner that it relates to each other. Also, the system provides procedures which aid in the manipulating of stored data. The concept is borrowed from a type of arithmetics called relational algebra by Edgar Codd. Codd saw that it was possible to easily organize data available in enormous amounts into manageable and reasonable size (Larson, 1995).
The tables consist of rows and columns which are referred to as tuples and attributes respectively, in any relation. Therefore, an intuition can be described as a collection of tuples possessing similar attributes. This solves the problem of complexity and inflexibility associated with other models such as the hierarchical and the network. Here the user’s effort of describing data structures is saved.
The main proponent of this concept, Edgar Codd, suggests four main strengths of the model which are; data independence, simplicity, self processing and a sound theoretical background (Larson, 1995). Data independence ensures the distinction between the logical and physical aspects of the database are clearly spelt out. Simplicity on the other hand, makes it possible for a wide range of users to make use of the system with ease.
This is not the case with previous models. Self processing capability enhances manipulation of data automatically such that the user doesn’t have to go through the records each at a time, instead that is already taken care of. Lastly, a sound theoretical background ensures provision for a backup for the database system.
Besides this, the system supports security details at the highest degree possible. Data is only accessed by authorized personnel only through implementing restrictions to access to the database tables (Spaccapietra and Jain, 1995). Permission is only granted when the need surpasses its limits and there is no other way but the tables. Each user of the system has his/her rights which are constantly protected. These aspects of the system enhance security of the database.
The system also, is known to facilitate the compatibility of other new hardware to be installed. Thus, this enhances performance and the power of the system. Other integrated components work in unison with the system to enhance the in which the database functions. Thus, the systems flexibility can be said to be checked (Spaccapietra and Jain, 1995).
Moreover, relational databases make use of easily readable and understandable language like SQL. Thus data is stored in a form that is human readable. Users can with ease work with the data in the system and also retrieve it easily with this type of language.
We will write a custom Report on Relational Database Systems specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Lastly, the relational database systems have the ability of database normalization. This aspect is meant to secure the integrity of any data manipulated by the programmers or data retrieved by the users. Normalization ensures that abnormalities of data in the system are checked on time.
Basically, relational databases are classified into three groups which include; system, user and remote relational databases (Larson, 1995). The system rational is characterized by objects of the database that are stored on hard disk that support the system.
The user relational database enhances relational database through outsourcing from external sources beyond the local disks that house the database system. Lastly, the remote relational databases are those that are accessed remotely. Besides this, there are five main ways through which relations can occur, these ways are; one to one, one to many, many to many, mandatory and optional relationships (Larson, 1995).
From the excerpt provided, it’s quite clear that ‘The Easy Drive School of Motoring’ would need some assistance with management of data and information to facilitate the smooth running of daily business operations. Since commencement of the school back in 1992 a lot has changed and the school has expanded to other cities of Scotland.
Thus, with this the challenge of more employees and students comes into play. Paper work is on the rise as the need to keep records persists. This method, however, is known to carry with it a lot of errors and misfortunes such as loss of data.
Thus the need to implement a rational database to solve the problems associated with paper work. Queries provided by the director for instance, the details of the members of staff can easily be fed into the system to create a computerized database and save the school tedious and unreliable documentation through paperwork.
Also, we are informed that communication and sharing of data between offices even in the same city is becoming a problem. This will seize upon adopting the relational database system in which data is stored in a server. Users therefore, will access data from the server, by logging into the school’s database.
This is made possible through the provision of details such as name and telephone numbers of the managers of each office. Also, the availability of the full addresses of all the offices of the city of Glasgow makes communication between the various offices possible especially through the mail (Melton and Simon, 1993).
Not sure if you can write a paper on Relational Database Systems by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Moreover, with the availability of the typical queries availed by the director makes it is possible to create a list of related files/ tables. This tables house the tuples and attributes from which relations can be made. From the layman’s point of view this represents the rows and columns that characterize a table (Saffady, 1998).
The information on data requirements stipulate that the whole organization structure of the school has components that directly relate to each other in one way or the other. For instance, we are informed that, “Each office has a manager, several instructors, and administrative staff.
The manager is responsible for the day-to-day running of the office.” Therefore the administrative staff and the instructors share a common attribute the office of the manager, thus this can make a strong link between the two. To avoid the error of redundancy of data details concerning the managers office are the same, a single entry of this data can be shared by three tables which are; the table carrying information regarding the manager and his/her office, the instructors and the administrative staff (Greif, 1988).
Besides that we are also informed that clients upon registering they book their lessons which are administered by the instructors. Each lesson takes an hour and a particular car is used. This automatically connects the instructors to their clients and the particular car that is used through the lessons undertaken (Greif, 1988). Thus another attribute is shared here, the lesson. The instructor further, records the clients’ progress and the mileage covered during the course of the lesson.
In conclusion I would highly recommend this viable project of implementing a relational database model into the school’s organizational structure to the director if the school is meant to maintain its competitive edge and expand beyond its limits.
From the findings of this report the director of the school should install every bit of this database system to all branches of the school in the cities of Scotland to appreciate the benefits that come with it. For instance, the structure of the organization becomes crystal clear as a high degree of transparency is introduced. Also, the new system brings about a sense of cost effectiveness as it reduces the cost associated with the enormous paper work which was the case earlier.
All in all the relational database system would work to ease the duties of the management team including those of the director.
Reference List Greif, I. (1988) Computer-supported cooperative work: A book of readings. Canada, Morgan Kaufmann.
Larson, A. (1995) Database directions: From relational to distributed, multimedia, and object-oriented database systems. Michigan, Prentice Hall
Melton, J and Simon, A. (1993) Understanding the new SQL: a complete guide: The Morgan Kaufmann series in data management systems. San Francisco, Morgan Kaufmann.
Saffady, W. (1998) Managing electronic records. The University of Michigan. Michigan, ARMA International.
Spaccapietra, S and Jain R. (1995) Visual database systems, 3: visual information management : proceedings of the Third IFIP 2.6 Working Conference on Visual Database Systems. San Diego, Springer.
Mass media in society Term Paper essay help free
McChesney- ‘Rich Media, Poor Democracy’ McChesney wrote ‘Rich Media, Poor Democracy’ to show the democratic problems in United States and other countries in the world and how corporate media downplays the requirements of attaining an effective democratic system. The author also addressed the concentration of ownership in the media industry and how this has transformed the sector.
He further analyzes how public broadcast stations have gradually fallen due to policies that are deliberately formulated to protect corporate media. His study also evaluates the media industry and corporate ownership between 1970s and 1990s (McCheseney, 2000, p. 15-18).
According to author, increase in the number of channels in U.S., is a major cause of corporate concentration in media industry. He argues that technological advancements in cable, television, digital media and satellite have resulted to changes in media ownership.
He also argues that corporate concentration comes in as a response to the rapid changes in the industry. He asserts that for a media firm to make profits in such an industry, it has to invest in international distributors, stations, frequencies, operations of the channels and also in cable channels.
The author of ‘Rich Media, Poor Democracy’ says that most of corporate concentration in the 1970s up to 1990s seemed to have conglomeration kind of media ownership. In such an ownership, a certain major media becomes a key shareholder in two or more sectors in the media industry.
These sectors may be in recorded music, publishing sector and a broadcast sector. With such ownership, the operations of these media outlets’ can be interfered with by the advertisers who in most cases form the major corporate owners. With such influences, citizens are limited in making informed decisions. This is because ownership threatens their democratic rights. Stories are also written in favor of the owners or else media practitioners risk losing their jobs.
McChesney also argues that “the United States media system is an integral part of the capitalist political economy and that the relation it has important and troubling implications for democracy” (McCheseney, 2000, p. 15).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Changes and consequences of the rapid increase in concentration of ownership in mass media, and the implications of this to consumers
Concentration of media ownership is normally surrounded by large media systems owning few corporations or media firms .Concentration of ownership can be in the form of monopoly, whereby, one corporation owns the whole market. At other times, the ownership may be having two or more businesses or media firms dominating the industry and compete with one another (Voelker
Justification for the title, ‘There are no children here’ Essay scholarship essay help
Table of Contents U.S does not grant equal opportunity for people
Meaning of poverty as indicated in ‘There are no children hear’
Recommendation and conclusion
As depicted in the book, the Alex Kotlowitz describes the living conditions of the poor people in Chicago city as substandard for human survival. This can be explained by the several instances in which he puts the main characters in the story, LaJoe River and her two sons, Pharaoh River and Lafeyette River. These instances justify the title of the book as indicated below.
The author also says that, the mortality rate was in Chicago city in the 1950s was lower than the rate at which new born babies were dying (Alex, 1992, p.12). He continues to say that children were exposed to insecurities and that there was no trust among people not to mention one’s neighbors. He depicts Lafeyette to act acted like an adult all through his life. He was bossy when around his siblings and had the same anger as his mother. (Alex, 1992, p.14).
This was just a perfect indicator that the city did not have children as the book is titled. Everyone in city sought for ways to survive despite the hard conditions. Due to the tough conditions, even the youngest children had to find schemes to protect themselves from the other ‘tough’ and ‘harsh’ children. According to the book, Lajoe and other women were helplessly watching their children grow old though so quickly. This is because of the problems that they were facing (Alex, 1992, p.16).
LaJoe grew up in dark tunnels that cut through a building. This is what their home use to look like. The real meaning of a home was minimal to her because as children, they were left exposed to cold and other dangers of the night. The children clothed themselves with green leaves and other unfit clothes despite the harsh environment and scorching sun.
The author describes the harshness of the environment to also include gun shots that were quit scaring to the children while playing on corridors. The children were always at risk even when enjoying a better and natural atmosphere outside their ‘home’ (Alex, 1992, p.9).
The author also says that Madison Street was crowned with ‘grandmothers’ nurturing their kids and grand children. The women were actually not of age to be grandmothers but the adverse effects of the sever challenges they had encountered in their early life dictated they wear out (Alex, 1992, p.10).This is an indicator that ‘there were no children in the city’, as the author names the book.
More so, from the story, Chicago city had three main black street gangs. These include: the Vice Lords, El Rukns and Disciples. According to the author, they started in their early lives.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This is also a justification for the title of the book (Alex, 1992, p.10). Pharaoh at the age of nine would even write a letter to his uncle telling him how much he love him (Alex, 1992, p.10).He was actually no child. Other possible titles would be: Life in Chicago city or Facing life bravely. This is because of the described situation in the story.
U.S does not grant equal opportunity for people Contrary to as many may think, the U.S does not provide equal opportunity for all. The book, ‘There are no children here’ perfectly shows this. This is because of the problems that most of its citizens go through in real life. Ideologically, one may think that opportunities are equal for all in U.S but the author shows it different.
According to Kotlowitz, when the Congress came up with a program to build houses for the poor in 1959, white politicians resisted the move and fought against the efforts to have publicly financed house.
This brought a lot of conflicts in Chicago. Other than building houses for the poor to compensate for the harsh conditions in the shanties, Chicago Housing Authority ended up building black ‘ghettos’. Better houses were concentrated in the urban regions.
This is unequal distribution of resources on the merit of class. This is one factor that justifies that fact that U.S does not grant equal opportunities to all as many may think (Alex, 1992, p.10). When LaJoe, her siblings and parents moved to Henry Horner Homes, the situation seemed different although this did not last long. They landed into a good house and a spacious five bed- roomed house.
This made LaJoe hope that her life would be different from the one in shacks and shanties in the South (Alex, 1992, p.10).But the situation suddenly changed when the Institute for Illinois technology was to be built. These houses were demolished to create room for the institution.
Another indicator of unequal opportunities in the U.S is depicted by the unequal rights to life among the poor and the rich. The poor lived in isolation and alienation as depicted the police shootings in the streets of Chicago (Alex, 1992, p.25).
We will write a custom Essay on Justification for the title, ‘There are no children here’ specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More According to the author, the government stopped painting Chicago’s slums houses (Alex, 1992, p.28). The White House and Chicago, as described in the story, show that there are unequal opportunities in U.S. At some point Lafeyette told LaJoe that he would one day have his own white house (Alex, 1992, p.99). The situations in these two locations as indicated by the author were two extremes.
Houses in the Chicago black ‘Ghetto’ as described by the author were in bad shape as compared to urban dwellers. Urban dwellers’ houses had luxurious facilities like swimming pools and spacious rooms.
The room in which LaJoe lived while in Chicago was congested, dirty, unfurnished and infested with insects. They were hazardous for human living. This is not the condition that prevails in U.S’ rich homes. That is why Lafeyetee always wished to move out of Horner and occasionally blaming his mother for their devastations in the slums (Alex, 1992, p.100).
The writer of the book also says that in the public residential houses, the hot line numbers were never answered by the police. The author creates a scenario of unequal opportunity in that the poor people in the slums did not receive some of government services like communication systems.
The situation was worsened by the fact that communication systems in the houses were not in good condition. Unlike for the rich and those in authority who would be attended to immediately. The poor rarely felt the presence of government by the people and for the people (Alex, 1992, p.99).
Meaning of poverty as indicated in ‘There are no children hear’ Poverty can have adverse effects on anyone’s growth and it can transform an individual into unexpected characters and personalities in the society. Poverty is mainly fostered by interrelated factors that come from the society that one grow in, educational factors, cultural, economic and recreational facilities and the extent to which one accesses this factors.
According to the author, LaJoe grew up knowing that there exist the term ‘banks but in her reality such a facility did not exist. There was no movie theatre where residents of the city would spend time in and temporarily escape the harsh realities that they were facing. He also says that there lacked library facilities (Alex, 1992, p.12).
Scholarly, one can easily question the essence of having a library in a city where people have no money or do not even have enough for their stomachs. These are some of the challenges that residents wallowing in poverty face.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Justification for the title, ‘There are no children here’ by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More He further says that a program, ‘Better Days for Youth’ that aimed at reinforcing the situation in Chicago would only accommodate twenty eight children for every session (Alex, 1992, p.12).According to the book, 1949 saw the Congress harnessing efforts to construct 810,000 low-rent housing for the poor. But another question that arises is the number of people that would afford to pay the required rents if in Chicago. This is because affording food in the shacks was a nightmare. This is also a sign of poverty (Alex, 1992, p.22).
The buildings that Chicago Housing Authority built were of low quality and with inadequate communication facilities. There were no elevators on the storey buildings, and garbage lay all over. LaJoe had such awful memories of her early days. The level of insecurity in the city was worse.
The author records that in 1975, an unknown person murdered LaJoe’s sister while in bath tub. When her oldest brother heard about the incident, he also got heart attack and died. This shows the poverty level in which LaJoe’s family was sailing through (Alex, 1992, p.24).
Poverty is also displayed by the limited space between the blocks of the buildings in Chicago slums. There was no space for such facilities as basket ball pitches, a situation that promoted criminal activities among the city dwellers. This also increases the levels of police shootings in the city.
Bullets would find one even in the corridors outside the house. Cleaning the room and furniture was the only way to destruct LaJoe (Alex, 1992, p.26). The room in which LaJoe lived was also so small to accommodate the nine of her family. The writer of the book says that when Pharaoh’s father was in, he could only sleep on the couches. This is also an indicator of poverty (Alex, 1992, p.25).
Poverty makes people live in sub-standard humane conditions. LaJoe’s family faced so many challenges in the building they were living in. Insects and maggots feasted on the children (Alex, 1992, p. 27). There was no proper drainage system and limited water allocation system (Alex, 1992, p.28).
Culturally, poverty in the book was depicted by the fact that LaJoe believed that since her parents had lived in the same poor conditions, then she was subject to live under similar challenges and so her children. Such believes limit individuals from maximizing their ability to have a prosperous life contrary to their background roots.
Recommendation and conclusion If I had the power to change the life course of children’s life like Pharaoh and Lafeyette, I would ensure proper allocation of resources to those who live in the slums. Such resources would include having better houses, surrounding, drainage system, recreational facilities and also bringing educational facilities close to them.
They would not have to pay for their education; rather I would ensure free education system is in place so as to accommodate those who have financial problems in education programs. More so, is to create employment opportunities for the jobless in order to reduce criminal cases.
Reference Alex, K. (1992). There are no children here. New York: Anchor books.
Aspects of Psychology Compare and Contrast Essay online essay help: online essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Introduction Psychological research is conducted using a range of scientific methods which depends on the kind of data to be collected. The data for psychological studies can either be qualitative or quantitative data and is analyzed to explain a given psychological phenomena.
The psychological research methods that are commonly used are case study, naturalistic observation, correlation research, survey research, and experimental method. Experimental and correlational studies are the two scientific methods of psychological study which are explored in this essay.
Experimental Psychology Experimental method of psychology involves the study of behavior in a controlled environment. This method establishes the cause and effect relationship of different variables and uses the results to predicts a given phenomena. The researcher identifies the dependent and independent variables of an experiment then control the dependent variables and make observations (Sharma
The History of Gaea Goddess Descriptive Essay scholarship essay help
The history and parentage of Gaea goddess
Over 200, 000 years ago, individuals in Africa formed beliefs and myths depending on their nature of life. This resulted from realization of the fact that they are finite in nature. Due to migration of people into the ancient East, the myths found their way into Greece.
Gaea is an ancient god on earth. Her siblings were among the other gods who lived on the land. All the other gods transformed into demons. Gaea was left fearing that the dead gods would finish the generations that were to come. She therefore asked the earth’s biosphere to use its force and eliminate the evil spirits.
She was the only one who survived amongst that entire god’s generation. As a result, she infused her godly nature on other living beings. She was believed to be the spirit of harvest, growth, life and change of planet and its renewal. It is also believed that Gaea was the daughter of Chaos and Taturus (Conway, 1995, p. 51-57). This paper seeks to analyze various issues associated with the goddess, Gaea.
The power of the goddess
Mythically, Gaea, a wife and mother of Uranus, was known for her powers with regard to motherhood and prophesy. She had the power to curse and release evil spells on those who defied her rule.
It is believed that Gaea’s Deep Breast hold the mountains and the sea around the earth. This power was believed to be very effective. Studies conducted on myths show that even after the male gods succeeded her Shrines, the gods still used her name when taking oaths. This shows that she was an extraordinary being (Conway, 1995, p. 53).
Gaea had the power to bring chaos upon the earth. Being the great mother on earth, Gaea had sex with herself and gave birth to the sky, earth and dark void. These were symbols of maiden, mother and crone respectively. This means that she would control humanity through the use of the moon, sky and the dreaded Cronus.
She also had the power to grant freedom to humans so that they could learn through experiences (Marier,
Instructional Design Model for Adult Education Research Paper custom essay help: custom essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
The Adult Education Model for Instructional Design
Model’s Congruence with ISD Principles
Strengths and Weaknesses of the Model
Introduction Instructional systems design solves problems and makes decision making easier in the course of training. Instructional design models are based on theories of learning with each model designed through the analysis of the requirements of training, design of the program to meet the needs of learning, development of the model, actual implementation of the design model and evaluation of the model to measure the success or failure of the program.
The process of designing materials for instruction is creatively done in order to synthesize practice, theory and research into the learning process.
Adult education has increased with the need of adults for career advancement, promotion, training on the job among other advanced learning. This paper acknowledges that the increased need for adult education requires a similar use of strategy of instructional models that allows adults to adequately benefit from the learning process as well as address their needs.
The Adult Education Model for Instructional Design There are many models of adult education which are based on the characteristics of adult learners. They differ in their theories which include cognitive and behavioral theories among others as well as in their implementation. This study focuses on the adult education model suggested by Dean (1994).
The Adult Education Model for Instructional Design is an instructional design model for adult learning. The model is aimed at helping adult educators in the process of developing the instructional activities that best suit the adult learners and make it engaging to them.
The model consists of needs assessment through gathering of information, designing of the necessary instruction and the assessment or evaluation of the instructional plan process. The gathering of information requires that the educator assesses his/her knowledge and skills and the content development by evaluating the content that is to be learnt to ensure that the educator has comprehensive knowledge of the same.
It entails getting to know the adult learner which involves getting to know their ages, careers, interests in the course to be learnt, expectations from the learning as well as their level of knowledge of the content that is to be learnt.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It also involves understanding the context within which learning is to take place, for example, the context in the training of nurses and that of the business-oriented fields are bound to be different and hence the educator has to be able to adequately apply the content to the context appropriately (Dean, 1994).
The next phase of the model involves designing the instruction which consists of the goals and objectives of the learning process, the activities the learner is going to engage in and the mode of assessing the learners to establish their gain from the process of learning (Seels
Computer-Based Communication Technology in Business Communication: Instant Messages and Wikis Report college application essay help: college application essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Enhanced business communication
Impending business communication
Possible risks and solution of problems
Introduction The development of computer-based communication technologies and the methods of how people prefer to use social networking have raised dramatically (Perkins 2008, p. 44). People are eager to improve their communication in business in order to make fast and effective decisions, develop proper relations, and engage more responsible partners within a short period and be sure of their correctness and success.
The technologies like instant messages (IM) or wikis are the best successful examples of communication technologies in business; however, as any other achievements in the computer world, they are characterized by many positive and negative aspects. On the one hand, IM and wikis make communication between different people possible; on the other hand, much work and implementations are required.
To solve the problems within the chosen filed, it is necessary to make people ready to challenges and provide them with the necessary amount of knowledge about IN and wikis’ peculiarities and properly explain the necessity to study these technologies on the high level.
Enhanced business communication Instant messaging (IM) is considered to be one of the frequently used communication technologies in the world of business. Many corporations have an access to IM and prefer to use this method in order to discuss current problems, share different files, and save their time.
“Corporate and government entities are increasingly using social networking to facilitate communication and collaboration among individuals and groups, both internally and externally” (Perkins 2008, p.44). IM is one of the simplest ways to share information; however, it is not the only advantage of this technology: these technologies also promote the reduction of e-mail traffic (Wilkins 2007, p. 31).
Wikis, in their turn, provide their users with a magnificent chance “to contribute to the content by editing the pages” (Fernando 2007, para.2). Many users are deprived of a chance to create an appropriate plan of their actions being far from each other. This is why the development of such communication technology is considered to be beneficial indeed: people are free to create an event by means of wiki services and add necessary changes, improvements, and suggestions at the same time.
The result of this communication is a clear and properly discussed plan that is suitable for each member of a team. One of the most successful examples of how wiki services influence the business world is the cooperation by Penguin Publishing and the creation of the wiki novel A Million Penguins (Fernando 2007, para. 7). This experiment in corporate writing proves that people have all chances to succeed in the chosen activity and help other people.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Impending business communication Considering the pros of the above-mentioned compute-based communication technologies, it is necessary to admit the negative aspects of IM and wikis. Though IM provides people with a possibility to generate new business (Pannunzio
Expenditure Plan Research Paper best essay help
Introduction Establishing a medical care facility can double up as a business venture or an entity for the general well being of the society. Demand for quality medical care is on the rise as population takes an increasing trend; to be a successful business man in this sector, one requires being a professional in the sector.
In this paper we will consider how a budget of $100million can be utilized by a group of 20 medical practitioners as they establish a health care facility in a locality with a population of 500,000 people; it will be located 30miles down town, it will consider financial, legal, and alternative health care models reinforced by your knowledge of strategic planning and capital budgeting.
Project Management/ Starting Up a New Business
Before one decides to take a profit making venture in a certain area, he/she should interpolate probability of success in the business. This comes before looking for funds for the project and continues further. After one has realized that it is possible that the said business can be a success, the next step is to project manage the start up.
The first thing before one sets out to start a business is the survey of the location that one wants to make an establishment. This is because; the success of the business is dependent on how well he is going to capture customers to buy from him. Different places require different set ups for their success.
In our case, it is a medical facility that is located 30miles from the main town; when it comes with the case of a hospital; the most important thing is the quality that patients are likely to get. The distance is crucial yes, but patients are willing to travel for longer distances if they will get quality medical attendance; with this the venture is not threatened by distance (Shane, 2003).
Before undertaking a project, but after realizing that the business venture is likely to be a success, the next step is project management. This is the point that financial outlay is considered; there are different ways to consider if projects will be viable; they include;
The pay back method of analyzing projects has been interpolated as the most easy and straight forward method of project analysis. The method is simply looking at the period of time that a certain project is going to take to recoup the amount of money that the investor has invested. What this means is that the method recommends not to be interested by the benefits that a certain project is going to bring but the interest should be on how long will the project take for you to get the money that had been invested.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Initial outlay ($100million) = gains from the business X payback period.
The next method of evaluating the project is using net present value, this involves taking into account the duration that the project is likely to be in operation then discount the income using cost of capital, if the NPV is a positive number then a project is viable.
N.P.V. = (discounted outflows – initial capital)
= (discounted outflow – $100millions)
If NPV is positive, then the project is viable, if it is negative then the project should not be started.
Capital outlaw in a business is an important aspect to consider when starting up; the capital initially employed in the business should be recouped in a certain period of time. If the capital was financed from a loan then it must be repaid; so there is need to ensure that a business will do well enough to cater for its financial obligation.
This will be in consideration of business risk; business risk is the uncertainty on to whether the kind of business that one has engaged in will be of success. This is in both existing business when they want to extend their business to other areas of a start up business. When investing in some kind of a business there is the initial and subsequent running expenses. In a business environment the proceeds from the business should cover all this and there will remain a portion that is the profit of the investor.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Expenditure Plan specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This is not always the case as one may invest and then only losses are accruing from the investment; the risk that the firm will have to undertake is that of possibility that the business leads into a loss. On the other side, this is a normal situation that must be faced in business. The most important thing is to do a good study of the market situation before you invest.
In our case the target population is 500,000 people, what is important to note is the kind of medical care that the population requires. If there is an area that the current medical care fails to satisfy the population then it is important to focus in this area more than those that are highly populated by practitioners.
I would recommend for professional service like dentals, surgery, ENT’s, mortuary, and gynecology among others. Clinical services though an important and inevitable part in any hospital set up should not be emphasized a lot since patients can have alternatives in other hospitals.
An outlay of $100million is enough to lay good medical facilities. Sustainability is another important issue when managing a certain project. For example, all health care policies are projects that require a long-term use of money. They can only be successful if there is adequate flow of money throughout the life of the project. During the evaluation, it is the time that the real cost of the project be calculated. This is then weighed upon the desired results.
If a businessman enters in an area that he cannot survive he is putting himself in a financial risk. This is the risk that the business will not be able to meet the long term and medium term financial obligations. This obligation means the financed capital obligation, the shareholders interests, and the cost of capital.
If the business has taken a loan to be able to finance the various projects then there must be a way that the loan will have to be paid. These will be involving the principal and the interest parts of the payment. The business can only be able to do this if it is run at a gain.
The shareholders, debenture holders, and interest creditors also invested in the business with the expectation that they are going to get a gain from their investment. The business has this obligation to fulfill. The risk here is whether the amount of profit that is being derived from the business will be enough to cater for all these expenses? There is the exposure of a company’s strength as the company law provides that the financial statements of any company must be prepared.
They have some disclosures that they must give and thus if the business is not doing well it will hinder future decisions of potential investors. This has the possibility of limiting the level of growth in the future because it cannot access equity from the issue of shares. It can also lead to reduced confidence on the part of investor, which may have a negative effect to the business (Livingston, 2008).
Not sure if you can write a paper on Expenditure Plan by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Alternative Medical Care
Competition is a good element in the business arena since it ensures that quality of goods and services provided are good; it is the one that keeps the businessmen on their toes to ensure that they earn customer loyalty. In the medical practice, quality and professional service is crucial since it involves the health of human beings.
Health care is provided by the government at a subscribed rate as one of the functions of the government. The number of government hospitals in the location and the kind of services that they provide should be interpolated to ensure that there is a need that they are not satisfying the customers.
In many countries, government hospitals are not efficiently managed and thus people seem to have a fading trust on their services. There are times that a huge number of people wait for services; this compromises the quality they offer as well as patient customer relationship. These are some of the areas that should be looked into and taken advantage of.
The private sector and nongovernmental medical care is another area that where patients are treated; here they have better services than government hospitals but they suffer limited facilities. Our initial capital, $100million is a good amount to make a better facility than those of private sector. Another area that has been of great concern in the medical sector is human expertise; we are lucky that we already have 20 qualified medical practitioners; in this case we will have a comparative advantage.
The cost of labor is likely to be minimized since we can give services at a lower rate. Leadership is another factor that can be used to keep off competition; the success of an organization is dependent on the quality of decision made by its manager. One of the major attributes that make a good manager stand out is his or her decisiveness.
The quality of decisions made by a manager is reflected in the performance of his or her organization. Other than the control by decision of the management, customers influence almost all parts of a business. The available target customers’ needs should be well understood so as when deciding the kind of business to engage in, one is aware of the available customer segment.
By segment we mean the class, social status, age, and income level. One must align himself to the interest of the customer and by so doing there will be continued business. When a business is established, the success will be dependent on the quality of the good/services that it will offer to the market. They must be those that satisfy the needs of the customer. As the business, he should listen what other people have to say about the entire process (Schmenner, 1995).
Capital budgeting is ensuring that the finances available for various long term developments are utilized in the most efficient way. In our case we have a budget of $ 100million that should be used to establish a medical facility. This money can be divided into two:-
a) Capital good purchase
b) Operational expenses
Capital Good Purchases
This is building of the facility and buying of facilities to be used in the business. To budget for this expense, a research should be done on the current level of technology that is in the market as well as their cost. Capital good purchase should have its special budget; it should consider the probable costs of all capital goods which will be required to establish the business. Let’s assume that our capital goods budget is $80million. A sample budget looks like;
A frame work of a probable capital budget
Amount Duration of the project Building and premises $40million Three years Equipments, plants, machinery and computers $22millions After completion of building and premises, it should take 6months. Legal and statutory costs $500,000 Undertaken after approval of the facility Vehicles and ambulances $4.5million Should be bought after approval but before start of operation Staff quotas 13million Should be made after approval of the building for a medical facility Operating Expenses Budget
Before a business breaks even, there are expenses that should be taken into consideration; these include salaries and operating expenses. The initial capital outlay should consider this.
A frame work of a probable operational budget
Salaries $10 million The amount is expected to be utilized as obligation arises Operation $10million There are day to day expenses that the facility will need to finance before it has become self reliant. Legal
Laws are set to regulate the way things are done in the economy; there are trade laws and professional regulations that a business should consider. The countries trade law requires that before starting a business its construction be approved by the relevant authorities. If the business has been approved, then a permit to start construction is given. Local council is mostly involved in this planning; they have to approve the site given for the construction.
After completion of construction, there is approval by medical practitioners body; they must ensure that the facility meets the standards set for the same, if they don’t meet the standard, then they are licensed to start operation. Professional body will look into the quality of the facilities adopted as well as the qualifications of the staffs.
If they are convinced that everything is set, then they give approval and go ahead. Council licenses, health licenses, and sanitation licenses should be looked for before start up.
Taxation is another legal responsibility that the business will have, measures should be put in place to ensure that at no one point will there be a conflict with the government. This is the functions of accounting department.
A hospital set up requires physical and human resources for its operations. How well the resources are blend determine the success of the facility and the quality of services that it is going to give to the people. There are various departments that should be planned effectively to ensure that success is attained.
Taking S.W.O.T. analysis is crucial;
Internal Analysis Strengths
The strength of an organization is vested on how well it understands and utilizes the available resources that it has, both internal and external. The leadership of the organization should be in the forefront in utilizing a company’s strengths and it must start with deliberate measures to understand its environs. It has a high capital outlay and experts in medical professional. This is the great strength that the business can utilize for its prosperity.
The need for quality health care is increasing with awareness for need for good health and increased population. Opportunities / chances of success of the company are dependent on both the internal and external assessment criteria of the organizations profile of operation. Some of the underlying opportunities for this company in regard to the macro environment are the diversification of its medical professional expertise.
Weaknesses and Threats
Every business is faced with difficulties when entering a certain market; there can be danger if the business is not able to face the risks that it will be exposed to from its incorporation. The following are the areas that should be planned for a great success;
Human Resources Planning
A medical facility is a service entity whereby patients are attended by professionals in all areas; the role of the management is to ensure that there are qualified and adequate human resources at any one time of need.
Human resources planning is an attempt to forecast how many and what kind of employees are required or will be required in future and to what extent this demand is likely to be met. It involves the comparison of organizations current human resources and the likely future needs and consequently, the establishment of programs for hiring, training, redeploying, and possibly discarding employees.
The main aim of human resources planning is to ensure that there is the right number of employees, at the right time, at the right place, and the right cost. The human resource department is given the mandate of ensuring that adequate employees are available at all times in the organization; it has both quantitative and qualitative aspects. Qualitative means the right number of employees and qualitative means employees with right skills (Rodkey, Glover, Janes, Grether, Tolman,
Family Tree and Its Importance Essay custom essay help: custom essay help
A family tree is a representation of the lineages of a particular family mainly consisting of relatives stretching as far as possibly establishable by the family. A simple family tree would basically constitute of great grand parents, grand parents, parents, siblings, cousins and so on.
With the continued complexity of modern livelihoods, development professionals in all cadres of work have opted for more details that should be included in family tree so as to be of more use (Adams, 2009). This is the basis upon which such variances of family tree as family medical tree have been suggested and used in the medical field for keeping medical information for specific families.
This is important especially considering that there are some medical cases that are genetic and therefore follow through the family. Knowledge of this medical consideration is important and can be used for treatment and preparedness of persons in that family (Halsey, 2009). This paper talks about family medical tree by considering specific questions of interest and giving short synoptic briefs about each question as discussed below.
Why is it important to know your family medical history?
Knowledge of family medical history is important particularly for specific medical conditions that are genetic and therefore run through given families.
This knowledge helps in the better treatment and handling of medical conditions within the family. It helps for medical practitioners to know of conditions in the family that can be inherited or which predispose family members to certain risks (Pisacano, 2009).
Does knowing your family history make you more aware of personal risk factors?
Yes. Knowledge of my family medical history makes me more aware of personal risk factors that I am likely to be exposed to by the virtue of being in my family.
Knowledge of family medical history is further important because certain health related sicknesses are so prevalent in the family and therefore can be passed down to children thereby making me more prone to such sicknesses in the event that there are there. With this knowledge therefore, I can better prepare for some of these cases (Stange, Zyzanski, Jaen, Callahan, Kelly, Gillanders, et al., 1998).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More How might being aware of your medical family history help you?
Knowledge of my medical family history has many ways in which it can be of help to me and one of the main areas is to help me in my preparation for my health.
This is important for my current preparation as well as for my future too (Stange, Zyzanski, Jaen, Callahan, Kelly, Gillanders, et al., 1998). In a time and age where insurance policies and providers are flooding the market offering all sorts of services, it is almost paramount for these providers to know some of these conditions so as to better prepare for their services they provide.
Life insurance policies mainly base most of their terms on medical conditions of persons and it is the knowledge of my family medical history that will put me at a vintage point when taking medical covers and other related insurance policies (Stange, Zyzanski, Jaen, Callahan, Kelly, Gillanders, et al., 1998).
In conclusion, family medical history is very important for the families just as much as it is important for national planning and development for countries. This in a snapshot briefly explains what family medical history is and its importance for families and its relations (Stange, Zyzanski, Jaen, Callahan, Kelly, Gillanders, et al., 1998).
References Adams, B. (2009). Patient Brochure. American Board of Family Medicine, 5(10), 218- 300.
Halsey, A. (2009). Primary-Care Doctor Shortage May Undermine Reform Efforts. The Washington Post.
Pisacano, N. (2009). History of the Specialty. American Board of Family Medicine, 3 (5), 282- 291.
We will write a custom Essay on Family Tree and Its Importance specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Stange, K., Zyzanski, S., Jaen, C., Callahan, E., Kelly, R., Gillanders, W. et al. (1998). Illuminating the ‘Black Box. Journal of Family Practice, 46(5), 377-389.
Leadership Traits and Characteristics Essay best college essay help
The video starts with the introduction of the guests present in the program. The host, Charlie Rose gives a comprehensive coverage of some of the great achievements of both guests, Bill George and John Whitehead. He identifies them as leading business leaders with careers in key leadership positions spanning over four decades.
Bill George is currently at Harvard Business School as professor of management practice. He was the chairman and Chief Executive Officer of Medtronic, well known as the leading company dealing with medical technology. He is also the author of bestselling books on leadership. John C. Whitehead is a former US Navy officer where he was in charge of D-Day.
He later joined the Goldman Sachs where he rose to the chairmanship position and later a Co-chairman. Whitehead also served in the US government’s administration as Deputy Secretary of State. He currently chairs the World Trade Center Memorial Foundation. The conversation then moves on to invite the insights about leadership from each of the guest’s perspective. Before that, the host highlights the idea that a biography is a central part of every leader.
Discussion Leadership Traits and Characteristics
Leadership has been a major concern over a long period of time in virtually all parts of the world. Outstanding leaders have existed since past generations and they have exhibited specific characteristics and traits. Some people have always believed that great leaders are born and do not need any training on how to lead while other schools of thought are convinced that anyone can learn how to become a leader (George
Successful Business Communication: Chapter Overview Report college application essay help
The chapter selected for the purpose of summarizing the overview and adoption of the book is “Achieving Success through Effective Business Communication”. The chapter is an excerpt from the book Business Communication Today written by the author Courtland L. Bovee and John V Thrill. The chapter introduces some of the most important concepts of communication that can considerably provide opportunities for development in businesses.
This Chapter is superbly written, brief, and has a tough academic foundation. The author had used variant sources while writing this chapter. The author of this book has mentioned contents including different forms of communications such as communicating in office, remote communication, communicating about products and services, communicating with customer, and etc (Bovee
Elements of Literature Critical Essay essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu
The elements of literature connote the aspects that make up a piece or work of literature such as a poem, biography, prose, epic, story or play. To be able to write a complete work of literature, a writer, poet, or playwright needs to use certain elements of literature to make the work have meaning.
The basic elements of literature found in most writings include the plot, setting, character, structure, conflicts, point of view and theme. These elements however differ from the various types of literature work. For example the literature elements found in novels or short stories might differ from those found in poetry or prose (Bhattacharyya, 2010).
DiYanni in his work mostly focuses on theme as the main element of literature in his analysis of various works. Theme is the central idea or basic meaning that is underlying in a story, poem, novel or play. The theme is identified in terms of looking at the characters in a literary work or the author’s perspective or view of the literature piece. The theme is seen to reflect the society or world as a whole (Werre, 2003).
DiYanni (2007) explores the theme of denial in his comparisons of literature by Faulknet, Miller and Poe. He notes that denial is very prominent in the story of” A Rose for Emily” and in the play “Death of a Salesman” and in the poem “The Raven”. Within the play, the story and the poem each, the theme of denial is prominent because of the central character’s refusal to accept the reality.
This creates a dreamlike situation that enables them to remain indifferent to the truth about their lives and surroundings. This state of denial is however seen to be a momentary solution to their problems.
In his theme analysis of “A Rose for Emily”, the main character, Emily Grierson is seen to be withdrawn into her own unrealistic dream world. The people in the town she lives in feel that disrupting her unrealistic world will upset her causing her to react in a negative way. When her lover, Homer, tries to threaten her unrealistic world, she kills him and hides his body in an upper bedroom in her house. Homer’s body is discovered well after Emily’s death and funeral (DiYanni, 2007).
Diyanni further analyses Emily’s character and her creation of the unrealistic world by looking at her actions that revealed she was in denial. In the story, we are told of how Emily keeps her father’s body for three days denying that he is dead and also denying the townspeople his body.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Her denial was evident in her refusal to believe that her father was dead despite persuasion from doctors and ministers who had called on her to dispose of the body. Emily’s other denial was that she saw her marriage to Homer Barron and his existence to never have been real. This is evident in the quote:
“The man himself lay in the bed…… The body had apparently once lain in the attitude of an embrace, but now the long sleep that outlasts love has cuckolded him” (DiYanni, 2007, p.84).
In the story, the town gets free postal delivery services which require that every town’s member have a mailbox and house numbers attached to their house. All the townspeople agree to have the mailboxes and numbers attached to their houses except Emily. She refuses to get a mailbox and house numbers hanged on her house which is see to be a form of denial. Other than the mail services, she refuses to pay tax to the local government (DiYanni, 2007).
The townspeople also experience some denial where in a traditional stance; they claim that Emily is no longer a member of the upper social class because she does not possess the qualities to belong to that group. The townspeople believed the Grierson family held themselves in high esteem, more than what they truly were.
The townspeople also deny that they have a right and obligation to inform Emily that there is a foul stench around her house. They withdraw from the reality by covering up the smell with sprinklings of lime around her house and all the outer buildings. The townspeople also deny that Emily and Homer could be in a love relationship because they think it would be improper for a lady like her to have a relationship with a day laborer from the North.
They also deny that a lady from the Grierson family with such a high standing in society would take a person like Homer Barron seriously. They even go to the extent of denying the relationship by saying that grief would not cause a real lady to forget her high ranking social status in the town’s society (DiYanni, 2007).
DiYanni’s next analysis of the theme of denial is in Miller’s play “Death of a Salesman. The main character of the play, Willy Loman, lives in a delusional world in which he is successful and adored by the people around him.
We will write a custom Essay on Elements of Literature specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Willy’s wife Linda and their two sons, Happy and Biff, support Willy’s unrealistic world because they do not want to disrupt his dreamlike state, claiming that he will eventually realize the truth on his own. Willy’s denial occurs when he denies that he is a mediocre salesman in the first Act of scene three. He claims that he is known in all of New of England in a conversation with his two sons (Diyanni, 2007).
He further exaggerates the circumstance of his denial when he claims that he can park his car in any London street and no one would touch it because the police would protect it like it was their own. He also appears to be delusional when he claims that he never has to wait in line to see a buyer.
Willy’s denial from reality is also evident where he is has an antagonistic view towards anyone or anything that wants to threaten his unrealistic world. This is evident when Willy tells off Bernard for saying that his son is about to fail school and also when he chases his son Biff out of the house for calling Willy a fake after discovering that he has a mistress .
Willy’s wife Linda also faces some denial when she refuses to accept the fact that her husband tried to kill himself. These is evidenced where she writes a letter claiming that all the car accidents Willy had been involved were not accidents at all. She first removes and later replaces a rubber hose from behind the water heater that Willy used to try and kill himself with because she feels that removing the hose might insult Willy.
Linda also contradicts the self-depreciating remarks that her husband makes. She is noted to say that her husband is the handsomest man in the world and that he doesn’t talk too much, he is just a man with a lively personality. She is also quoted as saying “There’s nothing to make up dear. You’re doing fine” (DiYanni, 2007).
Linda summarizes the things that have pushed her husband into denial as being his old buyers who were also happy to see him and brought him constant business when he was a younger salesman. Now his buyers were either dead or retired. She also says that Willy drives for seven hundred miles without making any money from his long and tiring journey.
To counter his wife’s statement about his fruitless sales journeys, Willy lies to his wife that the fifty dollars he borrows from Charley is the salary he makes when he goes on his seven hundred mile journey.
Willy’s sons are also in denial that there is something wrong with their father. They perpetuate Willy’s delusions by playacting out one of their father’s daydreams in which they are both successful businessmen. Happy is seen to be telling his brother about how they are going to sell start a sporting good line known as the Loman Line that will be worth a million dollars.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Elements of Literature by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More On the other hand, Happy’s brother Biff is pretending to go for a job interview with Oliver who is his former boss. The job will make him to be a successful salesman for sports goods (DiYanni, 2007).
When Biff confronts him with the rubber hose he used to try and kill himself with, Willy faces a nervous breakdown. Biff wants his father to acknowledge the fact that he was trying to commit suicide and he also confronts his father on the fact that Willy is not a successful salesman. He wants his father to accept the fact that he is a failure and a thief.
In the events that lead up to his death, Willy has a last argument with his son after which he drives off in his car and later crashes it. This scene is viewed to be a reflection of Willy driving away from the truth and reality of himself and his mediocre life.
The next theme of denial to be analyzed is Poe’s poem “The Raven”. The narrator of the poem attempts to deny the fact that his love, Lenore, is dead. He is faced with denial when he is made angry by the raven’s declarations that his lover Lenore no longer exists which in the end makes him view the raven as nothing more than just a bird.
In stanza two of the poem, the narrator denies that his Love Lenore is gone where he states” Eagerly I wished the morrow; vainly I had sought to borrow from my books surcease of sorrow-sorrow for the lost Lenore” (DiYanni, 2007, p.1173).
In the fifth stanza of the poem, the narrator faces denial when he states in the poem that he gazed down the hallway and stood there reveling in the fact that his lover was no longer among the living. His denial is in evidence again in the eighth and ninth stanzas when he refuses to accept the fact that he is lonely. The stanzas in the poem also reveal that the presence of the raven is seen to be a distraction from the narrator’s experience of solitude and loneliness after the loss of his lover.
His denial of loneliness is also in evidence in the tenth stanza where he believes that the raven will leave at some point, likening its departure to that of his friends, his hopes and dreams. The narrator is in denial when he refuses to accept the fact that the raven is only just a bird. This is evident in the fifteenth and sixteenth stanza where he labels the raven to be a prophet of doom. He also likens the bird to a fiend and a devil.
DiYanni compares the different characters of the play, poem and story noting that the narrator of the poem, Emily Grierson and Willy Loman are all similar in that they allow outside influences and their unrealistic worlds to affect their decisions. DiYanni also notes that all the three characters are lonely with the narrator being lonely from the death of his lover, Emily Grierson loosing both her father and Homer and Willy being the lone salesman trying to make a living.
The characters are also lonely in that they live in their own delusional worlds which make it difficult for them to relate with the other characters in their lives, creating situations that are filled with tension and antagonism (DiYanni, 2007).
The aspect of the main characters in the play, poem and story placing some distance between them and the truth creates a situation where they are unreceptive and antagonize anyone who tries to threaten and distort the truth about their unrealistic world. In each of the three works, death is seen to be a consequence of each characters extreme denial.
In the case of Willy, the removal of denial from his life in the play gives him the motivation to commit suicide. Emily Grierson murders Homer as a result of a withdrawal from her unrealistic life while the narrator looses his sanity when he strains himself to question the reality of the raven (DiYanni, 2007),
Another similarity of the three works is seen when the family of Willy helps to perpetuate his fantasies because they believe they have no right to interfere with his unrealistic world. This is similar to when the townspeople help to perpetuate Emily’s delusions. All the three characters deny reality because the truth to them will mean having to reevaluate their ambitions, goals, priorities which would mean redefining their happiness.
Emily, Willy and the narrator use physical and violent outbursts as a way of showing their defiance and resistance to the fictional and factual true predicaments of their lives. The three characters also run from the truth about their unrealistic worlds by either committing murder as was the case with Emily killing Homer or committing vehicular suicide as done by Willy or becoming mentally insane as evidenced by the narrator questioning whether the raven was truly a bird (DiYanni, 2007).
The theme of denial in most of the works analyzed by DiYanni has revealed the fact that the character in focus by the author will most often face denial in the form of refusing to accept that their surroundings are real. The characters also refuse to accept that the existence of their friends and family members are real.
They refuse to deal with their emotions and deny any confrontations with the people that are close to them. The characters are seen to violently refuse any person or thing that tries to threaten their world or alter their chosen view of reality. An intrusion into their dreamlike worlds results in disastrous consequences which are more than likely death or suicide.
References Bhattacharyya, A. (2010) Elements of Literature. Web.
DiYanni, R. (2007) Literature, reading fiction, poetry, and drama. 6th Edition. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Werre, P. (2003) The elements of literature. Web.
Antitrust Claims Filed against Microsoft by Netscape Communication in 2002 on Behalf of AOL Opinion Essay best essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Introduction When one company has monopoly in the market there are high chances of antitrust claims from equivalent competitors in the industry. With monopolistic behaviors, customers continue to buy products from the company despite the high prices. Sellers in such a case exploit the monopoly to increase their profits and market share.
In the business world, competition is permitted only when the agenda is to bring success to the business as well as when it grants the competitor an advantage (Mallor, Barnes, Bowers,
Heroes in History Research Paper college essay help near me: college essay help near me
People use the word hero to describe great persons who ever lived. Thus, a hero is a man of eminent bravery or ability, well-liked by many people because of his valiant actions and dignified qualities.
For example, during the time of crisis, adversity or danger, certain characters flaunt courage and self-sacrifice for the greater good of communities, societies or nations. These characters amid the difficulties and dangers facing them forge ahead in order to save all humanity-heroism.in some cases, there is no reward for these people.
However, through their bravery acts, heroes remain vital figures in human history for their personal commitments. Each society or nation has its own heroes. For example, many Africans regard freedom fighters as heroes. This is because freedom fighters displayed moral excellence by resisting colonial rule and at the end, many African countries got independence.
In United States, stories of civil rights movements and the resistance to white supremacy dole out as moral examples hence, heroism. In classical antiquity, heroic figures like Perseus, Heracles and Achilles, involved themselves in imperative roles in the Ancient Greek religion, which left them venerated heroes. The paper will examine how Perseus became a hero in Greek mythology (Hero, 2010, p. 1).
Once upon a time in Greece, an oracle told Acrisius the king that his grandson will kill him one day. And so, Acrisius decided to imprison his daughter Dannae in a tower of brass in order to keep away men from reaching her. Nevertheless, this did not work as Zeus came to her rescue and later on married her.
It took Acrisius four years to discover the union of Zeus and Dannae. However, as it came out, it was late for Acrisius as the two had sired a babe who most likely will instigate the death of king Acrisius. King Acrisius immediately ordered the death of Dannae and Perseus by throwing them into the sea. Conversely, Zeus definitely resisted any attempt to kill Dannae and Perseus. He therefore directed the king of the island to save the Perseus.
Under this direction, Perseus landed safely in one of the many Cyclades and survived. Of course, there was a prerequisite to this. The king of the island wanted the head of Gorgon Medusa as a birthday gift. With the protection of Hermes and Athena, Perseus went ahead and beheaded Gorgon Medusa and took her head to the king of the island.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Additionally, in an act that showed his heroic nature, Perseus fought and set free Andromeda withheld by the sea monster. Perseus went ahead to change the Polydectes into stone so that he can liberate his mother. As an act of fulfilling the oracle, Perseus visited Argos in order to participate in athletic events. In the event of being ready to throw the disc, the wind swept the disc away and landed into Acrisius killing him almost instantly.
In Argos, Perseus claimed his inheritance and later became the king of Argos. However, Perseus felt guilty of killing his grandfather and reigning on his behalf. He decided to exchange kingdoms with Megapenthes of Tiryns. His leadership led to the establishment of two cities, Mycenae and Midea (Greek Mythology Link, (n.d), p.1).
Clearly, Perseus was a true hero who defied all odds and killed his grandfather and Gorgon Medusa. In Greece and some parts of Asia and Egypt, many people refer Perseus as a great hero who ever lived. Following his death, the Greek mythology assigned him a place among the stars to reckon his heroism.
Perseus can compare with a classical hero. A classical hero aims at something and at the end of it all, accomplishes it. Just like a classical hero, Perseus aimed at wining the golden prizes set out by the king of the island for whoever will bring him the head of Medusa.
Like a classical hero, Perseus went through life threatening and bizarrely intimate forces but finally became triumphant. A classical hero aims at personal divinization-apotheosis just like Perseus. For instance, in most cases, there is a plot to kill a classical hero at birth forcing the parents to rear him in a far land. Such heroes meet their death when they are at the peak with enormous sepulchres.
Individual characters such as bravery, determination, intrepidity, valor, gallantry, fortitude and sacrifice are few examples, which ignite heroes to perform greater good for all humanity. In the contemporary world, such characteristics make people vigilant and ready to fight for their rights (Raglan, 2003, pp. 2-31).
Modern fictional heroes in a way resemble classical heroes. These heroes illustrate protagonist or love interests in the story contrary to prodigious expectations of heroism. Some of these heroes show prowess in fantasy features such as epic fancy and sorcery instead of issues dominant in the real world.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Heroes in History specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In the modern movie world, heroes prevail at the end no matter the circumstances. Some action movies exhibit invincible heroes who posses phenomenal strength and fortitude. Astonishingly, these heroes are murderers, villains and alluring evildoers in order to gain heroism.
However, certain heroic characteristics affect the general outlook of modern life especially when some people opt to kill others gain heroism through genocide and political violence. As for me, I believe that heroism should help people solve the problems affecting them for the greater good of humanity (Hein, 1993, pp. 1299-1302).
Perseus Cellina (Guerber, 1895, p.245).
Reference List Greek Mythology Link. (n.d). The Myth of Perseus and Medusa. Web.
Guerber, H. (1895). Myths of Greece and Rome. New York: American Book Company.
Hein, D. (1993). The Death of Heroes, the Recovery of the Heroic. Christian Century, 110(1), 1299-1302.
Hero. (2010). Retrieved from
Raglan, L. (2003). The Hero: A Study in Tradition, Myth and Drama. Mineola, New York: Dover Publications.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Heroes in History by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More
Writer’s Choice Essay essay help: essay help
Read through the case study and consider how you would respond to this situation. Be sure to address the questions provided in the case study. Then, apply one of the ethical theories we’ve covered in this course. Write about why you chose that theory to help you solve the ethical dilemma. Be sure to explain the theory and how it applies to the situation.
f you feel that it is most helpful to apply more than one theory, you may do so. Just be sure to write about both.
Ethical Theories Covered so far
Virtue Ethics (Aristotle)
Prima Facie (Ross)
Veil of Ignorance (Rawls)
Test of Publicity (Sissela)
Ethics of Care (Gilligan)
Language and Thought Essay (Critical Writing) best essay help
Theories of language development There are several theories that have been advanced to explain language development. They include behaviorist explanations, nativist explanation and interactionist explanation. This paper seeks to give an explanation of theories of language development.
This theory was proposed by Noam Chomsky, an American philosopher and scholar. This theory suggests that human beings biologically programmed to acquire knowledge. According to Shaffer et al (2009, p.47), LAD has grammatical knowledge present in all languages, and LAD is common to all human beings.
This theory suggests that all kids obtain knowledge through operating conditioning principles that are simple. It was advanced by Skinner. Skinner (1984, p. 547) explained that anything that an organism can do should be described as a behavior. The theory further says that children often imitate sounds emitted by adults. (Cummings
The Protagonists and Antagonists in Poe and Oates’ Short Stories Research Paper cheap essay help: cheap essay help
Table of Contents Similarities
The passing of time only manage to improve the potency of Poe and Oates’ storytelling like vintage wine. In Poe we have a writer who was prolific in the 19th century and in Oates we have a master storyteller who gained recognition decades ago and yet the force of their prose remained the same as if they have published it last week. Reading these two short stories is like watching a suspense-thriller the only difference is that the characters came bursting forth not from a movie screen but from the pages of a book.
The readers feel empathy for the victims because the authors were able to describe the scene so perfectly well that they could also feel as claustrophobic as them. There is a similarity to the plot and at the same time there are major differences to the way the authors tried to tell the story of how a criminal mind can use words to control another person.
Similarities In The Cask of Amontillado the reader was introduced to Montressor, a man with a serious grudge against Fortunato. He was a brilliant strategist who carefully planned how he would exact vengeance on the person who insulted him. It was strange because Fortunato consider him a friend.
He had no idea that he had besmirched Montressor’s reputation or if he had cheated him in any manner or even if he had said something that has caused him shame. But apparently Montressor viewed Fortunato’s actions in the past to be worthy of death and murder was his intent.
Montressor was no ordinary killer, he was a calculating murderer for he studied his would-be victim, Fortunato. He was an excellent judge of character for he knew Fortunato’s weakness and he built a plan around the idea that his ego regarding his skills as a wine connoisseur will make it impossible for him to resist going into the catacombs and there meet his untimely death. This is similar to what Alan Friend tried to do to Connie.
Alan Friend just like Montressor did not spring the trap without first an elaborate preparation. Alan Friend did not only study Connie, he used surveillance tactics as he observed her every time she would go out at night with her friends. It was the perfect time to observe girls like Connie because it was summertime and she and her girlfriends had ample time to waste going to the malls and hanging out in restaurants where an observer can easily disappear from the crowds.
But his surveillance did not only end in the said nighttime prowl, Alan Friend would even go to the trouble of finding out the behavior of Connie’s family and he discovered that every Sunday they would go to another house to enjoy the weekend and leave Connie behind.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Montressor and Alan Friend used words like a gunslinger would expertly handle a gun. They were ahead of their victims; they knew what they would think and how they would react when a phrase was spoken.
In the case of Montressor he would utter the name of a rival to challenge Fortunato and make him feel that it is his duty to go down the catacombs and endure the ghastly sight of skeletons just to determine if the Amontillado sitting down below is real or not. In the case of Alan Friend he used words to paint a world that is both isolated and fragile, eliciting the feeling of helplessness on the part of Connie.
Differences In Amontillado the attack was motivated by the need for revenge because Montressor believed that he had to deal with the insult heaped upon him by Fortunato. In Where are You Going, Where have you been?, the attack was motivated by lust and the need to control helpless women.
Furthermore, the traps that they laid were effective but due to different reasons. In the case of Montressor he was able to bring Fortunato to a vulnerable state by playing upon his ego and his penchant for wine. Fortunato was drunk and careless when he descended the steps towards the catacombs. Connie was bright and knew something was wrong but Alan Friend knew her weakness, she was alienated from her family because she finds them boring.
Another difference is the final resting place, assuming of course that Connie was dead after Alan Friend was finished with her. In Amontillado, Fortunato started the journey with Montressor in a wide open space, near the celebration, near the crowds of people and he ended the night alone buriend in the catacombs.
In Oates’ story Connie started her interaction with Alan Friend feeling claustrophobic inside a house. But at the end she died outside the cramped place of the house and traveled in a car to the countryside where there were plenty of wide open spaces. The similarities and differences enable the reader to appreciate how the authors tried to tell how a criminal mind would try to discover a weakness in the victim and exploit it.
Conclusion There were similarities and differences in the short stories. The similar use of cunning and smooth-talking murderers is a good way to appreciate the story and at the same time understand why it was so effective. The concept of claustrophobia was used in both stories and this gave the feeling of suspense and this was deliberately used by the authors to create a feeling as if the reader was inside the catacombs or trap in a small house in a small town.
We will write a custom Research Paper on The Protagonists and Antagonists in Poe and Oates’ Short Stories specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The differences on the other hand helps in distinguishing the way the authors tried to justify the reason why Fortunato and Connie were killed. Fortunato died because he was no sensitive enough to know that Montressor was angry and Connie died because she ignored her family.
Works Cited McMaham, Elizabeth
Latent Fingerprint Examination Research Paper scholarship essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
History of Fingerprints
History of Fingerprint Identification
Requirements and Certifications for Fingerprint Examiners
Introduction As Barnes ((n.d), pp. 2-3) argues, using fingerprints is one of the most dependable ways of identifying different individuals, as every individual has a unique pattern of fingerprints. Therefore, because of their uniqueness among different individuals’ fingerprints, the use of fingerprints as a mechanism of identifying individuals finds wide application in many scientific fields, for example, criminology.
Fingerprints are marks left behind by the friction ridges of the skin once individuals holds or gets in contact with any surface. During identification, for examiners to determine the owner of the left behind friction skin ridge impressions, examiners must evaluate a number of factors between known fingerprints and the fingerprints in question. Such factors include the arch, loop, and whorl patterns and the minutia characteristics, for example, ridge ending s and bifurcation.
History of Fingerprints Unlike other human characteristics, which change with time, the fingerprint ridge pattern remains the same as one grows older hence, making fingerprints the most dependable identification method. Historically, as dating experiments show, the first human fingerprints were left behind more than 4,000 years ago by builders of the Egyptian pyramids.
In addition to such discoveries in Egypt, the use of fingerprints was also a common practice among Chinese traders in the 3rd century B.C, as this was the most dependable method of proving that certain business transactions took place. Although the use of fingerprints was a common practice, individuals had no interests in the uniqueness of fingerprints until 1684, when an academician named Nehemiah published the first anatomical paper on fingerprints.
This publication was followed by more scientific tests and publications on the uniqueness of fingerprints by scholars such as Marcello, J C Mayer, and Purkinje. Because of such discoveries, in 1858, the use of fingerprint for contractual purposes became an official practice in some countries, for example, India.
The use of fingerprints for identification purposes took a turn in the late 19th century with the discovery by Henry Faulds that fingerprints remained the same even after an injury. This discovery gave birth to more discoveries, some of them widely applied presently, for example, the use of printer’s ink to reproduce latent prints on surfaces (Barnes, (n.d), pp. 3-14)
Fingerprint identification This involves the process of matching questioned fingerprints with some known fingerprints, as a methodology of authenticating the identity of the questioned fingerprints.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Fingerprint identification (latent print identification) is of great significance in solving most crime cases as it provides one of the most dependable methods of identifying the identity of those involved in certain criminal activity. Currently, examiners combine chemical, electronic, and physical processing methods to accurately match any questionable fingerprints regardless of their nature.
To match questionable prints with known prints, it necessitates for one to have the required expertise, as most fingerprint identification results are crucial evidenced in courts of laws. Their work entails dusting for fingerprints and collecting of tangible evidences, which can be used to identify the crime perpetrator.
Examiners are also of significance in the immigration department, in controlling the flow of both foreigners and locals into and out of the country. On the other hand, it is the duty of the fingerprint examiner to cross-match the collected fingerprint hence, their significance in providing evidence in criminal cases (Prabhakar, Jain, Maio,
Business processing model Essay essay help online
Business processing model refers to the manner in which concepts are handled in a firm, as opposed to what is being done. This is the main distinction between this concept and system modeling. It facilitates in deciding the nature of business undertakings, therefore, facilitates competent decision making as pertains to the concepts to be adopted. They record daily activities, making it is easier to determine processes that can be managed easily and those that need upgrading.
This concept, if adopted by Wood House Day Spa in Cincinnati, Ohio will be of immense benefit to their undertaking. This firm concentrates on promoting personal health through diet and other fitness activities. Clients are taken through a plethora of training regimes, both in the gym and outdoor events.
They undergo regular massage sessions and have access to a spa. In addition to this, Wood House has a retail outlet for their beauty products and food supplements. Since it is a new company, they offer their services at affordable costs and have ambitions of transforming themselves into market leaders. In order to achieve this, it is imperative that they adopt a suitable Internet based business processing model.
Business model and Its Importance In order for one to achieve success in online marketing, they should staunchly believe in the philosophy that success relies on consumers, as opposed to purchasers. Computers characterize life for a majority of the populace. With these in mind, they should be willing to avail free information on their products online, since a majority of persons will not be willing to spend on commodities they do not know.
The utility model is flexible enough and can serve them well, helping them achieve their goal. It contends that although users consider service a necessity, reliability is essential, and this may limit utilization of capacity.
Functional stipulation for Internet use and benefits of a Website Electronic retailing is among the fastest growing online ventures at the moment. By designing a website, they will publicize their products on a large scale, without any restrictions. They also stand a chance of earning proceeds if people will want to advertise on their portal.
Wood House can post information about their organization and products on select websites, with links to their portal for further information. They stand to benefit a great deal from this since most people prefer remote shopping. Delivery services can be outsourced from other companies hence keeping their overhead low.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Communication with their customers will be swifter and more reliable. They can establish email addresses and premium numbers as to serve as hotlines for use incase of any emergency. Random clients can also be picked to participate in online surveys to help them improve their product and service quality. In line with this, the Manufacturer Direct concept is the best model they can adopt.
This front provides them with several models, most notably the purchase model, which will allow them to sell their goods directly to their purchasers. They will enjoy all profits arising from the sales. For their therapeutic products, they can adopt the lease model.
They will allow customers to access to services for a specified duration before billing them as agreed upon. This method can be used for regular customers. Lastly, the Brand-Integrated integrated approach can also be used to interact with customers and sell them products. Wood House will formulate messages with information on the products and relay them to target audiences. In order to achieve this, they require a server.
References Bono, E and Heller, R. (2006). Internet Commerce: You can’t afford to bide your time with new technology. Web.
Fox, S. C. (2008). Internet Riches: The Simple Money-Making Secrets of Online Millionaires. New York: AMACOM Div American Mgmt Assn
Rappa, M. A. (2004). The utility business model and the future of computing services. IBM Systems Journal Vol. 43 No 1.
We will write a custom Essay on Business processing model specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Rappa, M (2010). Business Models on the Web. Digital enterprise Retrieved from http://digitalenterprise.org/models/models.html
Key Drivers of China’s Rapid Economic Growth and the Global Impacts Essay college application essay help: college application essay help
Introduction China has amazed the whole world at large because of the tremendous growth in its economy (Chow, 2005, p.123). Although China has a very large population, the Chinese people have proved to the entire world that they can be very hard working. Recent research shows that it comes second after the super powers United States of America in terms of the economy defeating countries like Japan, Russia, India and other developed countries.
In the past 30 years, that is from the year 1979 China’s growth has been averaged to a rate of ten percent per annum, which shows a very great improvement(Mamdani,2008,p.1). China is also the largest exporter in the world exporting a wide variety of commodities such as agricultural commodities like rice , machinery, electronics, nuclear weapons and textiles just to mention but a few. Other than just exporting it is the second largest importer of goods majorly from Japan, Taiwan and South Korea (Martin, 2006, p.1).
China’s major imports include; oil, minerals, plastics, other machinery it lacks and many others. This therefore is enough evidence that China is good at trading with many trading partners all over the world (PTI, 2006, p.12). This paper will therefore discuss the key factors that contributed to the rapid economic growth and how the rapid growth has affected other nations of the world (Xinyu, 2009, p.1).
Reforms made by China Three decades ago that is in the year 1978; China was ranked the tenth country from the top in terms of economy. At that time it had a Gross Domestic Product of US$150 billion (Breslin, 2009, p.1).
This was very low since it was only 6 percent of the Gross Domestic Product of the United States of America. However, in the year 1979 China made reforms in its economy and began to improve from that time at a rate of 10 percent per annum. The major goal of the Chinese Government was to make the economy independent and self-sufficient. Some of the reforms made included:
The government wanted to encourage both imports and exports into and out of the country (Fogel, 2009, p.1). Therefore the government accorded farmers permission to sell their products to private merchandisers in the country. The prices of commodities were tremendously reduced so as to attract investors from foreign countries.
The government also gave financial incentives so that the citizens could be able to make investments in foreign countries. The government also made reforms in the cities and coastal parts of the country and assigned them to be developmental areas (Chow, 2005, p.123).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Factors that contributed to China’s rapid growth The reforms made during that time by the government are the ones that influenced the economic development of the country (McDouglas, 2009, p.2). Therefore the key factors that led to the rapid growth in China’s economy after the reforms included the following;
Availability of cheap labor
China is highly populated. Therefore the presence of the large number of the human capital which was of high quality was a great advantage to the government. This is because the people were willing to work despite the low wage rate that they were being offered (Arora, 2005.87). The government took this as an advantage and made great use of the available workforce to improve its economy.
Investment in Technology
The government made investments in the education system such that it involved technological training sessions. It emphasized on teaching of industrial method in schools. This was advantageous as it made the schools produce graduates who were endowed with technological knowledge.
The resulting graduates therefore worked in the manufacturing sectors of the economy and thus led to the improvement of the quantity and quality of outputs (Grumbine, 2007, p.1). Due to this the country was able to increase its exports and as a result improving the state’s economy.
Reforms in the agricultural sector
Agriculture is among the top most sectors of China’s economy. Research has indicated that the agricultural sector of China results to 60 percent of its Gross Domestic Product hence being a determining factor of the state’s economy (Breslin, 2009, p.1). China produces the highest quantity of rice in the world. It also produces other agricultural products such as wheat, cotton, maize and tobacco which is exported thus the government earning foreign exchange.
Foreign investment in technology
China has invested greatly in technology leading to production of high quality products. In a bid to achieve this, it imported advanced machinery, plant and production facilities from trading with other countries (Martin, 2006, p.1). The investment in these facilities advances the technology of the country hence improving the quality and quantity of products produced.
China’s commodities are among the top most sophisticated products in the world hence attracting investors from other countries. It is because of this that the total factor in productivity of China has grown by 4 percent per annum.
We will write a custom Essay on Key Drivers of China’s Rapid Economic Growth and the Global Impacts specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The government policies
The government implemented policies that were driven to achieving economic growth at a fast rate (Fogel, 2009, p.1). The government reallocated resources in different sectors of the state hence making them run well financially. After the allocation of resources the government privatized them so as to ensure efficient running and high productivity unlike when they were run by the state.
Domestic and International demand
This is also a factor that made China improve in terms of the economy. The large population it has also increases the demand for its products and in turn the supply (Grumbine, 2007, p.1). The world at large has a great demand for China’s products because of their affordability and quality hence making it produce more and more products.
Impacts of China’s economic growth
The rapid growth in China’s economy has led to so many implications both positive and negative (Omvedt, 2005, p.50). These effects have been felt by most countries of the world include Asia as a continent. However, the rapid economic development of China seems to have more positive implications compared to the negative ones (Song, 2010, p.1).
As a matter of fact the growth in China’s economy led to availability of opportunities in trading system of the world. This comes about because of the availability of large markets for trading in a variety of commodities.
The presence of human capital that is readily available and cheap is also a positive impact to the nations of the world (Humphrey, 2004, p.23). This is because other countries that have manufacturing procedures that demand a large amount of labor move their processing procedures to do them in China where labor is cheap and available.
Once this is done the resulting product have low prices hence attracting more consumers. The result of shifting manufacturing procedures to China has a negative impact in that it leads to loss of manufacturing jobs in the domestic countries. It therefore a problem as such nations does not get the opportunity to grow in terms of technology.
Due to the rapid economic growth, China has been able to take advantage in the trading market therefore making its imports expensive while the exports are cheaper. Most nations blame this on the currency policy of China (Taylor, 2007, p.68).
This has a negative impact on the other trading partners as they are disadvantaged and oppressed when it comes to earning their foreign exchange. Because of this the other trading partners of China have raised concerns through introduction of bills to address the issue of China’s currency (Arora, 2005, p.67).
Not sure if you can write a paper on Key Drivers of China’s Rapid Economic Growth and the Global Impacts by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More As China tries to grow economically, it is also competing to be the best in the world. This has led to it wanting to acquire the very large companies in the foreign countries. It is thus threatening the developed countries like the United States of America which is the world’s super power.
Another impact as a result of the rapid economic growth of China has been brought about by the high demand it has for the raw materials it uses in processing. Energy is among the major raw materials or factors of production. The high demand it has for such commodities makes it able to dictate the prices of the commodities.
Since it has a high demand then they are able to purchase them even at the highest cost since they greatly need them for production (Mamdani, 2008, p.1). As a result, this affects the other countries that demand the same product but are not in a position to acquire them at that price. China may also deplete the sources of the raw materials since they acquire in large quantities hence threatening their existence.
Since China imports minerals and energy from Australia, the rapid development of its economy has a positive impact on the economy of Australia. This is because as the rate of production increases so does the demand for energy and minerals, thus increase in the quantities purchased. As it purchases more, Australia earns more foreign exchange which leads to tremendous growth in its Gross Domestic Product.
Conclusion From the aforementioned factors of China’s economic growth and their impacts it can be concluded that China has undergone a great revolution.
This revolution can however be accounted on the reforms made by the government of China in the year 1978. However, there are problems that are rising to counteract the economic growth. Among these challenges we have lack of skilled labor and the increasing rates in labor, these are posing a great threat to the manufacturing sector as it depends on them. This effect also will affect the other foreign countries that have invested in China and as a result posing a great danger in the world at large (Breslin, 2009, p.1).
China can therefore be said to be holding the economy of the whole world at large and therefore any arising issues of China become of concern to the whole world. Lastly, it can be said that the reforms that the Chinese government did are the major contributing factors to the current economic state of the country (Hertel, 2004, p.84).
Bibliography Arora, V. (2005). China’s Economic Growth: International Spillovers. Journal of Economics, pp. 52- 109.
Breslin, S. (2009). China’s Place in the World. Web.
Chow, G. (2005). Globalization and China’s Economic and Financial Development. New York. Wadsworth Publishing.
Fogel, R. (2009). China’s Expected Economy by 2040. Web.
Grumbine, E. (2007). China’s Emergence and Prospects for Global Sustainability. Web.
Hertel, T. (2004). Global Impacts of China’s Economic Growth. California. Barnes
Content Analysis of Two Different Forms of Media Essay essay help
Table of Contents Bottom-Line
This study will focus on two different forms of media. The first one is a television news program popularly known as CNN or Cable News Network and the second is a website of FoxNews.com, a site delivering online news content.
Although the first one uses television and the second uses the Internet and the World-Wide-Web to deliver content to consumers it must be pointed out that these two are rivals and basically has the same goals. They also share the same passion which is to be in the business of delivering news to people all over the world.
It is therefore interesting to find out that even though CNN and FoxNews.com were both created to deliver news content there is now an emerging pattern that can be easily observed by merely looking at the programming at CNN and the layout of FoxNews.com’s website. Their programming and content is based on the need to increase their ratings and to ensure the profitability of their respective organizations.
CNN has a reputation for delivering news coming from all corners of the planet and one can still see the dominance of that type of content in their programming. A regular 24-hour schedule is usually taken up by what CNN calls “World Report”, current events reporting from all over the globe. However, one can also see the “Larry King Live” show and Larry King does not always interview politicians or even CEOs.
He is also known to interview celebrities such as movie stars, artists, athletes, and those who gained fame through controversial means. Aside from this type of show CNN devotes at least two hours a day to talk about sports on “World Sport.” On weekends there is a show called “Revealed” and again celebrities and pop icons are featured there.
A pattern is beginning to emerge. CNN was made popular by daring delivery of hard-hitting news but now it seems content to dish out light topics for a good reason. And it has something to do with ratings and advertising money. The same thing can be said about FoxNews.com.
A mere glance at their website will reveal that there are twelve major tabs that users can click in order to access content and these twelve tabs are revealing because five of these should have been more at home in a magazine’s website rather than in a news website.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More These five tabs are labeled as follows: 1) Entertainment; 2) Leisure; 3) Health; 4) SciTech; and 5) Sports. Another tab named “Opinion” can be misleading because it is not strictly about political opinion – for instance there is an article making fun of Donald Trump’s hair (FoxNews.com, p.2). It is “infotainment” at its best.
Bottom-Line It can be simply explained as the consequence of the law of supply and demand. Viewers and consumers of online content will tune in a lot longer and click more web pages if the content has the right mix of “infotainment” and not just straight and plain news. This is a new mentality that news companies such as CNN and Fox has to deal with.
The reason of course is the need to increase ratings for CNN and online traffic to FoxNews.com. This was clearly explained by one researcher who said that in the minds of executives without good ratings there are no good profits (Anderson, p.156). The delivery of news has now been reduced to a numbers game direly related to advertisers and investors needs as well as the demand of the general public.
This is nothing new as early as the 1990s, researchers discovered that new stories were being framed to be dramatic and entertaining and thus the policy-relevant aspects of the news were often overshadowed (Thussu, p. 27). This is not a good thing considering the ability of mass media to influence policy-making and its power to move people to action by simply focusing the spotlight on certain issues.
This new phenomenon was succinctly explained by one researcher who said, “Over the past two decades the content of new in daily papers, television newscasts, and magazines has shifted from substantial levels of reporting on government activities and policy problems to an increasing proportion of soft news features that resemble entertainment formulas more than the kind of hard information that citizens might use in grasping the political events that affect their lives” (Kaid, p.283). But again, the eyes of the executives are on the bottom-line.
Infotainment A few months ago CNN and Larry King Live went to Akron, Ohio to interview not the mayor, the governor or even the biggest employer in that corner of the globe. Instead, the resources of Larry King Live and CNN were needed to interview a basketball player. He is no ordinary basketball player though, he is a super-athlete named Lebron James.
However, he was not on the verge of retiring, did not commit a heinous crime or announced the discovery of something that was earth-shaking that he deserved that level of attention especially from someone with the caliber of Larry King. And yet they went.
We will write a custom Essay on Content Analysis of Two Different Forms of Media specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More There were other more important topics to discuss. Larry King’s talent could have been used to increase awareness of a particular issue. Since the host of the show had to go to all the trouble of leaving the comfort of his home and travel long distance to a town in Ohio it would have been better if the purpose of the visit was to help the poor children of Ohio or the homeless families forced to live on the streets or even the need for more funding to improve education in the said city but that was not the main goal and the main result of the interview. Nevertheless, the people who watched the show were entertained and they knew more about Lebron James.
In the FoxNews website one can see the words “news” and “fair and balanced” emblazoned in the logo. Thus, it is interesting what one can find if they would click the “entertainment” tab – will there be news-worthy material in it? But those who did click on this tab will discover the headline: “Oprah Gives Entire Studio Audience 8-Day Australian Vacation.”
It is clear that this is not news and so what is it doing in a website that was supposed to deliver substantial news that will help in policy-making and help in discussing crucial issues faced by the nation today? This is a good argument but at the same it has to be pointed out that many will want to read why Oprah gave them eight days of vacation to Australia.
In the middle portion of the website there is a series of images containing the faces of celebrities like Lady Gaga with her bright-colored hair and Ana Kournikova in a swim suit. This is already interesting because Fox News.com is now on the verge of copying a formula usually reserved for tabloids.
But FoxNews.com is not yet finished on the far right of the said picture gallery one can find the images of Jesse James the ex-husband of Sandra Bullock and TV star David Duchovny with the title “The Guide to Sex Addiction.” It is easy to understand why it was placed there, the organization knew that people will click on these images to know more.
Conclusion CNN and FoxNews.com it seems are lost when it comes to long held standards about journalism and the need to bring out relevant and important information to the general public. This may have been the case when CNN aired a one-hour special featuring Lebron James and why FoxNews.com is increasingly moving towards tabloid type of reporting.
CNN and FoxNews.com did evolve but it is not because they have forgotten the standards. These media conglomerates had to change because they knew what was at stake. They are driven by the need to make money because if they cannot produce it then they will have to disappear. There is a need to discuss more important issues but investors and advertising money coming in, CNN and FoxNews will cease to exist.
Works Cited Anderson, Bonnie. Journalism, Infotainment, and the Bottom-Line business of Broadcast News. CA: Jossey-Bass, 2004.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Content Analysis of Two Different Forms of Media by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More FoxNews.com. “Final Round: GOP Establishment, Tea Party Go Head-to-Head.” Accessed from https://www.foxnews.com/
Kaid, Lynda. Handbook of Political Communication Research. New Jersey: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, Inc., 2004.
Thussu, Daya. News as Entertainment: The Rise of Global Infotainment. CA: Sage Publications, 2007
Deep Sea Volcanoes and their Effects Research Paper college essay help: college essay help
Table of Contents Background
Absorption of Carbon Dioxide
Rising Temperatures and Melting Ice Caps
The ocean floor is comprised of many hills, mountains, valleys, volcanoes and certain forms of life, easily unimagined to the common man.The entire global ocean floor is approximately 366 million square kilometers and the entire surface area is a volcanic terrain (Fisher, 1998, p. 81). Of the entire ocean floor, there are about a million deep sea volcanoes. Approximately 75,000 of them rise over a kilometer above the ocean floor. The number of active volcanoes is however not determined but it is projected to be in thousands.
Deep sea volcanic eruptions are quite prevalent than is otherwise known. In fact, about 4 cubic kilometers of volcanic lava is erupted annually according to estimations developed from the movement of the earth’s tectonic plates (Fisher, 1998, p. 82). Most of these eruptions are however not seen on the earth’s surface but they are often observed when ridges stretch into dry land.
Oceanographers have in the past carried out research to better understand the ocean’s volcanic terrain. However, their conclusions have not been comprehensive enough; especially with regard to the effects of deep sea volcanic eruptions on the environment. This study therefore explores the relation between deep sea volcanic activities and the environment, with specific reference to existing myths on global warming, an emphasis on marine life, general climatic conditions and topographical effects.
Background Not all volcanoes are a menace to the environment because of their toxic gases and molten lava. The effects of volcanoes are varied and may even result in the development of lahars. For instance, in September 1996, an undersea volcano with a magnitude of five on the Richter scale shook the Southeastern part of Iceland.
A month later, a deep basin formed on the glacier. Subsequent glaciers were also observed on the same zone (Patricia, 1999, p. 201). This indicated that melting was going on underneath the glacier and generally, the effects of deep sea volcanic activities go beyond toxic gases and molten lava.
The impacts of deep sea volcanoes are therefore varied, and the predictability of a volcano erupting is as difficult as predicting an earthquake (Patricia, 1999, p. 201). However, scientists at present use various parameters and devices to predict volcanic activity such as seismicity (which is also used to predict earthquakes and tremors) and other changes in gravity or electrical impulses.
Also, key in the study of undersea volcanoes is the subsequent earthquakes and tremors that occur after eruptions. Due to the fact that volcanic activities occur close to dry land or deep into the sea; they are bound to affect aquatic life and human life respectively. Their gas emissions also affect the environment. These variables will be categorically analyzed further in the study.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Absorption of Carbon Dioxide A group of Australian and French scientists have in the past undertaken several studies on the effects of deep sea volcanic eruptions on the environment and established that volcanic activities undersea produce large volumes of iron which plant species known as phytoplankton use to soak up carbon dioxide when they bloom (Fogarty, 2010).
Carbon dioxide being the main greenhouse gas in the world; the studies never focused on the impact of volcanic activity on the environment and especially carbon storage in the Ocean. Deep sea volcanoes are present under deep sea ridges of the ocean floor and the above research has been based on the amount of carbon dioxide that is present in depths of four kilometers on the ocean floor. The studies are therefore shallow.
Carbon is present in small volumes along the ocean floor and this prevents the growth of phytoplankton. However, science has often affirmed that large amounts of carbon often come from wind borne dust. This may be witnessed through sandstorms or iron rich sediments from the ocean which in turn triggers rampant phytoplankton growth (Fogarty, 2010).
At present, research studies have pointed out that deep sea volcanoes constantly produce a significant amount of iron over constant timescales. This has also been identified as the main factor which accounts for about 5%-10% of the total carbon storage in the oceans. Such studies have been observed in the Southern ocean but in other regions, the amount of carbon storage may go up to 30% (Fogarty, 2010).
The implication here is that the iron produced in the ocean and in turn the carbon retention witnessed, can act as a buffer when factors such as sandstorm vary. However, climate change has affected the progression of iron onto the earth’s surface, after deep sea volcanic eruptions. Ocean stratification has also been observed to be another cause of low iron penetration onto the earth’s surface (Fogarty, 2010).
Large amounts of Phytoplankton have been observed at the Antarctica, meaning the region is rich in iron. However, some studies have shown that huge winds will eventually blow the iron onto the ocean surface. In turn, more phytoplankton will grow and capture more carbon dioxide from the air (Fogarty, 2010). A vast network of deep sea volcanoes therefore produce mineral rich water each year soaking up large amounts of carbon dioxide produced by man. This has reduced the acceleration of global warming.
Landslides Deep sea volcanoes are known to cause massive landslides because of their massive cones (International Consortium on Landslides. General Assembly, 2005, p. 257). The main cause of landslides for deep sea volcanoes is caused by the very forces that created the volcanoes in the first place.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Deep Sea Volcanoes and their Effects specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This is essentially the rise of lava. Every time lava is pushed aside, the surrounding rocks that create ground stability are shoved aside to make room for the molten rock. In turn, internal shear zones are created and this oversteps one or more sides of the cone (US Geological Surveys, 2009).
Normally, the magma that never comes out releases certain volcanic gases that are partially dissolved in the ocean, creating strong hydrothermal systems that further weaken the rock underneath the ocean floor and thereafter burning them to clay (US Geological Surveys, 2009). In addition, the thousands of layers of lava and rock debris often lead to fault lines that weaken the ocean surface. This is often accelerated by the downward pull of the cone by gravitational force.
These factors are especially detrimental when the deep sea volcano is near dry land. This easily triggers a landslide due to a weakened earth surface and also allows part of a volcanic cone to collapse under the pull of gravity into the volcano (US Geological Surveys, 2009).
Certain factors have been observed to accelerate this process including; intrusion of magma into the volcanic surface, deadly earthquakes under the ocean floor, and a saturation of the volcano with large volumes of water; especially preceding an earthquake (US Geological Surveys, 2009).
A Landslide caused by these volcanic activities often destroys everything that stands in its way and also initiates a flurry of activities like explosive eruptions, buried valleys, generation of lahars and a trigger of deadly waves that have even been witnessed in the recent past (like the tsunami) (US Geological Surveys, 2009).
In addition, such landslides may cause varying degrees of topographical effects; ranging from development of hills and closed depressions, created by accumulated debris. Sometimes, the deposits left by these volcanoes create tributaries and later cause flooding, either through the misdirection of tributaries or subsequent forming of lakes and other smaller water bodies (US Geological Surveys, 2009).
After eruptions, a large part of the volcano’s cone is usually displaced and this triggers the landslides which decrease the pressure on the magmatic and hydrothermal systems and in turn cause varying degrees of explosions, ranging from small to large steam explosions (US Geological Surveys, 2009).
Rising Temperatures and Melting Ice Caps Contrary to popular opinion that melting ice and rising temperatures are solely as a result of global warming, deep sea volcanic activities have been identified as another cause of this observation. In fact, scientists have reported that recent volcanic activity under the Arctic Ocean floor have resulted in a large spew of fragmented lava into the sea.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Deep Sea Volcanoes and their Effects by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Such eruptions have been observed in Gukkel ridge which records one of the most massive eruptions that even buried Pompeii. This took place in 1999, from an underwater volcano located at the tip of green land near Siberia (Ajstrata, 2008).
Scientists have pondered whether there is a relation between subsequent earthquakes and volcanic explosions (School Specialty Publishing, 2006). Further explorations under the ocean rubbished reports that earthquakes were caused by slow spews of fragmented lava because they discovered that there were huge explosions taking place in the ocean (Ajstrata, 2008).
In understanding the melting of ice at the arctic, it should be understood that the Arctic Ocean resembles a closed system which has very limited outlets (Ajstrata, 2008). The natural basin and its characteristics emphasize the belief that volcanic eruptions are the cause of the melting ice because there isn’t much room for the heat generated out of the deep sea volcanic activities to circulate out of the basin. Ice and glaciers have therefore melted over the centuries.
These discoveries have led to many questions being asked about the real causes of ice melting. Interestingly, the arctic surface has recently had very thin surfaces of ice and either by sheer coincidence or not, the ocean floor underneath is home to some of the most active volcanoes on the ocean floor (Ajstrata, 2008). Evidence at the arctic therefore attests that volcanic activity is one of the primary reasons why ice is quickly melting on the global surface.
With regard to the thickness of ice underwater, it is often observed that bout 90% of icebergs is underwater. Interestingly, areas that have thick ice resemble inverted mountains but areas of thin ice resemble valleys (Ajstrata, 2008).
Evidently, if we were to analyze the effects of deep sea volcanoes, it makes perfect sense that the zone resembling a valley gets heated up fast because it takes less time for the heat to reach the ice and similarly, it would take a long time for the heat to reach the thick ice because of the stumbling inverted mountain-like barrier (Ajstrata, 2008).
Marine Life There is enough evidence to prove that deep water volcanoes improve the aquatic life undersea. For instance, an active volcano at Guam has recently caught the attention of scientists because despite its regular spewing of lava, it remains home to numerous aquatic lives, including ocean critters, shrimps, limpets, crabs and barnacles (Rosaly, 2005, p. 20).
The volcano is now high enough to resemble a 12 storey building and with recent observations, there has been a growing population of aquatic animals living at the volcano’s dome. The development of a positive relationship between an increase in volcanic activity and the growing population of animals around the volcano is therefore inevitable.
Some scientists even point out that some of these animals found at the volcanic tip are completely new species. Interestingly, these animals are well adapted to their environment which is essentially toxic, in relation to other marine environments. Normal marine life wouldn’t survive there either (Ajstrata, 2008). It is therefore inevitable to conclude that the surrounding marine life is nourished by the deep sea volcanic activity.
Scientifically, this phenomenon has been explained by the slow deposits of bacterial filaments over surrounding rocks that provide a good source of food for the surrounding marine life (Ajstrata, 2008). Some shrimps have even been observed to have adapted to the volcanic environment by developing pruning claws to extract food from the rocks. Another animal species known as the Lohili shrimps has perfectly adapted to its environment by grazing on the bacterial filaments through the developments of garden like shears.
These species however graze as a primary source of obtaining food but as they develop into adult life, they develop their claws to become predators (Ajstrata, 2008). In this regard, the shrimps become predators and feed on dead animals like fish and squids which were jumped up by the volcano (Ajstrata, 2008). These underwater volcanoes have therefore provided better ground for understanding volcanic activities than volcanic mountains on land would.
Conclusion Deep sea volcanoes have a huge impact on the environment. Virtually, marine life is largely dictated by volcanic activities that go on in deep waters. This is in reference to an evident change of aquatic life conditions especially in light of toxic gases released in the deep waters.
These volcanic activities also rival existing facts about global warming because their activities have been noted to increase world temperatures and result in ice and glaciers melting. In the same regard, landslides and earthquakes have been attributed to a destabilization of the earth’s surface by volcanic activities.
However, we cannot pass a blanket judgment that deep sea volcanoes only have detrimental effects because this study identifies that it helps reduce green gas emissions through carbon dioxide reduction. Conclusively this study identifies that the effects of deep sea volcanic activities have been largely underrated and more research needs to be done to quantify its effects.
References Ajstrata. B. (2008). Global Warming or Simply Under Water Volcanoes. Retrieved from http://strata-sphere.com/blog/index.php/archives/5589
Fisher, R. (1998). Volcanoes: Crucibles of Change. New Jersey: Princeton University Press.
Fogarty, D. (2010). Deep-Sea Volcanoes Play Key Climate Role: Scientists. Retrieved from https://www.reuters.com/article/us-climate-volcanoes/deep-sea-volcanoes-play-key-climate-role-scientists-idUSTRE62E0QJ20100315
International Consortium on Landslides. General Assembly. (2005). Landslides: Risk Analysis and Sustainable Disaster Management: Proceedings of the First General Assembly of the International Consortium on Landslides. Amsterdam: Birkhäuser.
Patricia, L. (1999). The Oryx Guide to Natural History: The Earth and All Its Inhabitants. Boston: Greenwood Publishing Group.
Rosaly M. C. (2005). The Volcano Adventure Guide. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
School Specialty Publishing. (2006). World Atlas. New York: Carson-Dellosa Publishing.
US Geological Surveys, (2009). Volcano Landslides and their Effects. Retrieved from https://volcanoes.usgs.gov/vhp/landslides.html
Analyzing and Interpreting Movies Research Paper argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help
Introduction Films are important to human life. They serve as tools for entertainment, educating and disseminating people. During weekends and holidays, people-young and old, spend most of their leisure watching movies either at home or at movie theaters.
Depending on one’s perception and art of viewing, the moving image within a movie can entertain, educate or inform. Notably, a person watching a film with an informed awareness is more likely to understand the elements behind film production. For example, an informed awareness instills dexterity and background instructions as ingredients of film understanding.
Apart from entertainment, critical and attentive film watching imparts greater thought in addition to awareness. Additionally, viewing a film not only lifts up a person’s celluloid experience, but also enable persons to understand the complexity, dense language, principles, cryptograms, and signs cinematic attributes exhibited during viewing.
Other essentials paramount in understanding and interpreting a film include reading some facets of cinematography and familiarization of film terms that will enable one to comprehend the film language. This will stimulate thought as regard to the film, hence making the viewers cinematically literate. Most importantly, with an informed awareness, every viewer can interpret and analyze a film without any complication (Boggs
Recent Legislative History: Control of Educational Standards Essay (Critical Writing) essay help free
Table of Contents Introduction
Introduction The educational system of the United States of America is full of captivating events which have significant contribution to the life of every American citizen.
There are three different levels which promote proper development of the system and which are responsible for obligatory control and funding: they are local, federal, and state authorities. Each type of control has its own peculiarities in accordance with which schools and other educational institutions are able to vary, be improved, and develop during a long period of time in regard to the current living conditions.
Educational standards vary considerably from time to time, and now, it becomes very important to provide teachers with necessary education and license before they could start doing their jobs. According to Pullman and Van Patten (2007), this kind of legislative control is crucial to make educators meet special standards and correspond to the national model required.
In my opinion, it is necessary to support control of educational standards by local, federal, and state authorities in order to present proper quality of education, professional teaching, and obligatory variations. To defend this necessity, it is better to pay more attention to each type of control and its outcomes on the educational process and to define how exactly these authorities may promote the growth of professional teachers.
Analysis According to the International Colloquium on Private Education (2009), any kind of government is entitled to control educational standards in order to promote growth of sufficient education in regard to the national context.
For example, local government is primary responsible for the quality of educational processes; federal authorities usually deal with the standards settings; and state department has to take care of provision of information, resources, and various technical material to schools. In case this type of control weakens, the quality of education may undergo considerable changes, and these changes could be hardly called positive.
Randi Weingarten (2010) admits that the role of education is considerable indeed in the life of every person: professional educators have to be ready to complete any kind of duty prescribed. However, it does not matter how mature an educator can be: if there is no support from local, state, and federal authorities, the professionalism of educators cannot serve as the only reliable basis.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This is why there is no reason to struggle against control of education by local, state, and federal authorities, but instead, it is very important to find out more powerful grounds to improve the quality of the control of these authorities and improve the cooperation between the authorities and educational systems to be able to achieve one goal: provide students with necessary education of a good quality and provide teachers with a number of possibilities to get necessary practice and appropriate certificate.
Application The chosen position may considerably enhance the processes of teaching and learning. It is possible to focus on “a constructive, meaningful, and ongoing system that incorporates standards and best practices for the teaching professions” (Weingarten, 2010, p. 37) and helps teachers to realize how information must be learned but not tested (Pullman
The Lancaster Treaty of 1744 Essay writing essay help: writing essay help
While war between the English and Indigenous Peoples occurred often during the colonial era, the Lancaster Treaty of 1744 succeeded in preventing conflict between the Iroquois and the English. The Iroquois faced some of the same problems that other Native groups did but such problems did not result in conflict.
The main grievance of the Iroquois was that white settlers were crossing beyond the Blue Ridge into the Shenandoah Valley and the treaty was to prevent them from moving east towards them. The English were however never prevented from advancing west of them (Merrell 5). This study identifies that the Lancaster treaty of 1744 provided the framework to which amicable solutions were developed and eventual prevention of conflict achieved.
Iroquois and English Conflict A year before the signing of the Lancaster treaty, the Iroquois caused a lot of skirmishes to settlers in the Shenandoah Valley. They also almost declared total war on the Virginia territory until its governor paid them a sum of 100 sterling pounds for any claims they had on the valley. This action was to be later followed by a sellout of all their stakes in the Shenandoah Valley for 200 pounds.
However, this agreement was followed by numerous misunderstandings between the two parties because the Virginians understood that the Iroquois had relinquished all their claim for the land that was demarcated as Virginia territory in 1609 but the Iroquois understood the treaty as a relinquish of claim only to the land in the Shenandoah valley; which was to the west of the Ohio watershed (Merrell 7).
This disagreement was partially resolved by subsequent agreements in 1752 through the treaty of Logs town which forced the Iroquois to recognize English rights to the South East of Ohio. However, subsequent treaties saw the Iroquois relinquish all their claims of Ohio and Tennessee rivers.
Negative Consequences of Colonization for the Iroquois The interaction of the Iroquois with the Europeans had a profound impact on the economy of the indigenous people because the expansion of European settlements in Iroquois land destabilized the economic equilibrium that previously existed. By the onset of 1800, much of the Iroquois population had been pushed to reserved lands.
This caused them to lose most of their land through the intrusion of European settlements into traditional highlands. There was also a negative impact of European trade with the natives because the Europeans took advantage of the virtue of gift-giving by showering the locals with many manufactured goods from Europe that created dependency on certain goods like rifles and metal axes which were not in any way beneficial to the Iroquois.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The consequences to the imposition of the Europeans on the natives were discussed in treaties and deeds like those that settled grievances on land. However, before such forms of agreements were made, the natives often engaged the foreigners in fights to claim control of their property and rights which the Europeans were slowly depriving them of.
Such warfare can be compared to the mourning war where the locals engaged their opponents in wars and often conspired against their enemies with like minded partners. Nonetheless, negotiations solved the grievances the Iroquois had.
The negotiations were majorly aimed at increasing the foothold of the Iroquois’s diplomatic presence in most aspects of governance. Essentially, this incorporated the extension of the clan system and the Iroquois confederacy into the governing elite.
Trade rights and empowerment of the military were also negotiated between the Europeans and the locals, especially after the Europeans adapted to the local systems of governance and also after adopting a change of attitude with regard to superiority over the Iroquois. Land was also a primary factor that was negotiated in the talks and the Europeans had to settle on a financial understanding with the locals.
The European colonialists joined the negotiations at Lancaster to add on the ongoing debate over land disputes. Essentially, they aimed to achieve a more formidable presence over the Shenandoah Valley and also stamp their authority amid growing French influence in the surrounding territory. This therefore prompted them to side with the Iroquois to limit French control in the surrounding territories. In addition, the Colonialists also sought to entrench their culture over other existing cultures and more so, the French’s.
Reflections of the Lancaster Negotiations on the Europeans and the Iroquois The Lancaster negotiations exposed underlying elements of both negotiators throughout the entire process. The Iroquois came out as very adamant people because of their resilience in fighting for their land rights. This especially exposes their belief on the fact that their traditional land was given to them by God and that it was to benefit the entire community and not a few individuals.
This fact was especially enforced after the land on the Shenandoah Valley was personalized and they could no longer enjoy the benefits which they initially did. On the other hand, the negotiations exposed the Western ideals the Europeans held about land and community property with respect to finding amicable solutions.
We will write a custom Essay on The Lancaster Treaty of 1744 specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The Europeans believed in the capitalistic view of land ownership as opposed to the community ownership of land which the natives upheld. The negotiations also exposed an underlying belief of the European community that resources had a value attached to them and property could change ownership through payments; a principle that the Iroquois never held until later in the negotiations.
Conrad Weiser Conrad Weiner was a key mediator in the dispute between the Iroquois and the Pennsylvania colony. He played the roles of an interpreter and a diplomat between the two warring factions. Conrad commanded a lot of respect and trust from both parties, effectively enabling him to mediate between them.
He was therefore able to negotiate the deal that saw the Iroquois sell their land, West to the Blue Mountain. Among his key roles in the Lancaster negotiations was his interpretative role but thereafter, he was sent to streamline the differences that emerged after the negotiations. He was therefore able to make both parties understand the implications of the Lancaster negotiations (Merrell 14).
Compromises from the Lancaster Negotiations One of the major compromises the Iroquois made was to sell their rights over the Shenandoah Valley to the colonialists. In addition, the native community also recognized the rights of the English over their native land; at least to the South Eastern part of Ohio.
On the other hand, the English settled their long standing dispute by parting with 100 sterling pounds which it paid to the Iroquois for their land rights. Additionally, the English also recognized Blue Ridge Mountains as the official demarcation between their territory and the Iroquois’s which they wouldn’t infringe on.
Conclusion The eminent conflict between the Iroquois and the English was repetitively solved from the Lancaster negotiations of 1944. The settlement of the land rights through financial means and the recognition of official boundaries also imposed a sense of calmness on the aggrieved parties.
Matters were done overboard and the Iroquois were willing to sell their rights over traditional land. However, the greatest success came from the adaptation of the English form of land system into the Iroquois’s, such that both parties operated through a streamlined system that encompassed the desired of both parties.
The role of negotiators also helped streamline negotiations and the presence of a common enemy (French) also helped curb angry sentiments by the Iroquois. Nonetheless, the Lancaster negotiations provided the ground work to which all these conflict resolution mechanisms were developed and eventual aversion of conflict achieved.
Not sure if you can write a paper on The Lancaster Treaty of 1744 by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Works Cited Merrell, James. The Lancaster Treaty of 1744: With Related Documents. Bedford/St. `Martin’s, 2008.
“Everyday Use” by Alice Walker Essay college essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Introduction “Everyday use” by Alice Walker is a fictional story analyzed years over, in academic and professional circles from an initial collection of In live and trouble (Donnelly 124). The story is narrated from a first person point of view (by a single mother, Mrs. Johnson) and dwells on the perception of two sisters regarding cultural artifacts (Wangero). Maggie has a shy personality but Dee is a representation of a pretentious native African identity.
Throughout the story, Walker develops a deep criticism of postmodern ideals through symbolism, with the story’s meaning going deeper than the surface analysis, because even the title “Everyday Use” is a representation of whether cultural heritage should be preserved and used on an everyday basis or not.
The quilt is especially mentioned as a representation of culture and heritage, especially when Dee wants to hang the quilts: she has essentially removed the artifacts from their everyday contextual meaning and creates some form of symbolic representation of the quilts.
This study therefore identifies there points; in that, Walker seeks to convey the principle that art is a living and breathing part of its origin, a significant cultural possession, and a critique of the postmodern treatment of cultural art.
Analysis The story asserts that art should be valued in the context of its cultural and heritage origin. The quilt is strategically used in the story as a representation of cultural art and its existence has a rich cultural significance. The quilt is later depicted as inseparable from its culture because the historical trace of the quilt essentially represents the history of the Johnson family. Walker specifically says “In both of them were scraps of dresses Grandma Dee had worn fifty and more years ago.
Bits and pieces of Grandpa Jarrell’s Paisley shirts and one teeny faded blue piece, that was from Great Grandpa Ezra’s uniform that he wore in the Civil War” (563). This shows that not only do the quilts represent the heirloom of the family, but they are a core factor in the family’s identity. The gist of this symbolism is that, not only is the quilt a representation of the Johnson culture but also an inseparable element from the culture itself.
How Mrs. Johnson treats the quilts shows that cultural artifacts should be treated as a significant cultural possession. Dee on the other hand views the quilts as financially and aesthetically valuable. When Dee realizes her mother intended to give them to Maggie; she exclaims that they were priceless.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Dee further adds that Maggie has the capability of wearing them everyday, something that she did not think was right for the quilts; implying that she viewed the quilts as an object instead of an item that should be used on a daily basis. Some sense of individualism is also noted from Maggie’s perception of the quilt, RO because in her opinion, the quilts bore some form of personal and emotional significance, which became clear when she said, “I can member Grandma Dee without the quilts” (Walker 564).
Maggie therefore implies that she perceives the quilt from its deep family connection. Moreover, she understood the fact that the quilts ought to “stay alive”, generations on end, through continuous renewal. Walker even points out that “Maggie knows how to quilt” (Walker 564), implying that she had the cultural significance of the quilts at heart.
The representation of the two sisters’ attitudes and perceptions of the quilts is a critique of the postmodern treatment of ancient artifacts and the way cultural art is treated in today’s society. Essentially, Dee’s perception of art for its monetary value represents the postmodern view of art while Maggie’s perception of the quilt for its personal significance is a representation of the contemporary view of art.
The author however does not leave us a in a huge dilemma of which perception is right because Mrs. Johnson snatches the quilts from Dee and gives them to Maggie thereby depicting the contemporary view of art as the right perception.
Conclusion Walker’s literary piece is a good example of an educational piece that reflects the current perception of art, especially thriving in today’s commercially, oriented world. Basically art in its right form should be kept alive through generations on end in everyday use. This literally, “can be perceived”, through the short story, but should be perceived in a symbolic manner as a facet of conventional art (Factstaff 3).
Walker therefore shows that the true significance and meaning of art that can only be traced back to the culture or the root it came from. This is contrary to postmodern use of ancient artifacts as an object to be observed, by future generations, as Dee tries to express. Walker therefore shows that cultural artifacts should be used as a significant cultural possession, and be kept alive through generations.
Moreover, she didn’t write the piece with the intention of being microscopically analyzed, or to be quantified monetarily; her literary piece, despite being written in past decades, was meant to be explored, investigated, questioned and even debated by today’s commercially driven society where culture is slowly fading away and postmodern values are quickly catching up (Factstaff 4). In summary, the author says that cultural artifacts with a special reference to the quilt should be put into everyday use.
We will write a custom Essay on “Everyday Use” by Alice Walker specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Works Cited Donnelly, Mary. Alice Walker: The Color Purple and Other Works. New York: Marshall Cavendish, 2009. Print.
Factstaff. Quilts and Art in “Everyday Use”. 23 February. 2010. Web.
Walker, Alice. “Everyday Use.” New Jersey: Rutgers University Press, 1994. Print.
Psychology Aspects in Spearman’s, Stenberg’s and Gardner’s Models of Intelligence Argumentative Essay essay help online
Intelligence is among the most studied topics in the field of psychology. Ironically, it has not been possible to come up with one definition of intelligence acceptable in the whole world. Some scholars believe that intelligence is a single general ability while others believe that it incorporates many aspects like skills, talents and capacities. Nevertheless, every scholar comes up with a different definition suitable for a particular model of intelligence.
Various scholars have come up with different models of intelligence with an aim of explaining and understanding the whole concept. However, even though models are different, all have similar concepts were it not for the fact that they are explained differently. However, this does not negate the fact there are some notable differences. Bent on that, this paper shall discuss Spearman’s, Stenberg’s and Gardner’s models of intelligence and narrow down to major differences and similarities.
Scholars describe intelligence differently especially after testing their theories. Spearman describes intelligence as a cognitive ability or g factor that can be measured numerically and expressed as such (Plucker para 4 ). He was able to make the conclusion after conducting a number of mental aptitude tests and discovered that the scores of the tests were similar (Sternberg p. 18).
On the other hand, Gardner unlike Spearman illustrates that it is not accurate to measure intelligence numerically because according to him, it is composed of skills and abilities that are greatly valued in different cultures. In addition, his model explains that there are eight different types of intelligences which are inclusive of bodily kinesthetic, musical, verbal-linguistic, logical, naturalistic, intra-personal and interpersonal forms of intelligence.
Finally, although Stenberg agreed that there is more than one form of intelligence, he proposed that some of the Gardner’s forms of intelligence can be perfectly described as human talents (Gardner Para 4). However, he grouped intelligence in to three categories which include practical, creative and analytical intelligence.
As much as there are some differences between different models of intelligence, similarities present cannot be overlooked. All models seem to have a clear concept that intelligence is the cognitive ability of an individual that helps individuals become successful in certain areas of their lives.
For instance, Sternberg explains that intelligence which results from a good balance between analytical, practical and creative abilities helps individuals to be successful within different contexts in the social environment (Sternberg pp. 92). Similarly, Gardner also proposed that different types of intelligence which are generated by mental energy enable individuals solve problems and create products that are important in different cultural settings.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Lastly, Spearman model also illustrates the same concept of intelligence which is the cognitive mental ability of an individual that helps them solve some problems and that is why he used tests to measure intelligence and latter expressed it numerically as a g factor (Matthews, Zeidner
The White teeth Essay best essay help: best essay help
White Teeth is a celebrated novel published by a British writer Zadie Smith. The book delves into the social engagements of two war comrades, Samad Iqbal with Englishman Archie Jones along with their relatives in the multi-ethnic London.
Exploring the thematic significance of the novels title “White Teeth” it would be instrumental to argue that the title touches on the aspects of cultural identity. Consider the fact that the author explores the life’s of diverse families with distinct skin colors but all with white teeth. Therefore, the symbolism of white teeth can be linked to the ethnic or racial origin of the families.
Profoundly the novel creates a pool of pathos with humor, while in the same way demonstrates the hardships faced by the immigrants as well as their children as they are faced by challenges of dissimilar society. From such attributes the reader is introduced to British cultures which are very much diverse from those of the immigrants. Hence, these differences are illuminated through the depiction of middle and working class English cultures as embraced by Chalfens with Archie.
The significance of the title rests in that we all have our unique origin, despite personal inclination. Therefore, White Teeth reflects the challenges of multiculturalism including the hardships of encountering assimilations.
For instance, examining the pedestal meaning purpose of the teeth, it is widely accepted that white teeth are a sign of health and beauty, thus, in literal meaning, the novels title could equally be translated to convey the message of cultivating unpollinated cultures. And this would result in racism or ethnic cleansing.
Perhaps that is why Alsana is depicted as dealing with aspects of prejudices apparent in London society. Hence, the author states “Black people are often friendly, though Alsana, smiling at Clara, and adding this subconsciously to the short ‘pro’ side of the pro and con list she had on the black girl. From every minority she disliked, Alsana liked to single out one specimen for spiritual forgiveness.”
From such perspective the author thus delves into diverse social aspects which touch on the symbolism of white teeth. More so, concerning the legitimacy of having pure cultures which translates to racism the author asserts “I just sought to demonstrate that there are societies that perform well. There’s wretchedness for the manner custom is fading away but I sought to illustrate people making an endeavor to comprehend each other, regardless of their cultural dissimilarities.”
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More As the narrative unfolds it becomes obvious that the families are not willing to let go their past, their identity and origin. This expressly anchors on the purpose of white teeth; ones pure origin ignites pride and self consciousness. And this is illustrated by the manner Samad perceives the English life being non-conducive in regard to Islamic upbringing. Yet the irony of this dynamism is shown in Magid who discards his faith to be a man of science.
Looking at the manner the theme of teeth is replayed in the novel, it would be instrumental to state that the symbolism is employed to illustrate the overchanging attributes of White Teeth. No matter the condition, tone, color, religion, country or gender, we all have white teeth.
To reinforce the significance of ones origin we have Irie becoming a dentist and this shows that she embarks on finding for unifying factors in the society. Thus, the title White Teeth touches on the uniqueness of ones cultural identity amid the growing multiculturalism.
Reasons why readmission of CHF patients is high in local setting Essay writing essay help
Abstract CHF is a health condition that affects normal operations of the body of a human person by interfering with the supply of blood to other body parts leading to the impairment of their normal functioning. The condition affects many people in different countries throughout the world. The U.S. is one of the developed countries that are affected by the CHF patients. It is estimated that about 5.3 million Americans suffer from this condition.
Due to the critical nature of the condition and other factors, this study seeks to establish reasons for increased number of CHF patient readmission in a local setting (Nasif
The Inn on Cortes Island Report (Assessment) custom essay help: custom essay help
The tourism industry in British Columbia has been growing rapidly over the past years thus making it quite possible for hotels within the hospitality industry such as Cortes In to enjoy more commercial success. As of the year 2000, the region had over 22 million visitors who raked in an amazing $ 10 million.
Additionally, the tourism mix of the district of British Columbia did not only come from locals but also from foreigners ensuring that demand is stable. Despite the fact that business opportunities did present themselves for those within the hospitality industry in Cortes Island, it apparently became difficult for those within the tourism industry especially inns such as The Inn on Cortes Island due to the threats on tourism industry that were brought by the 9-11-01 attack by terrorists that reduced tourist traffic.
Issues of human resource availability and skill levels of those employees expected to serve within the industry also made it hard for the industry to flourish due to the perception jobs within that industry did not pay well. Additionally, the outbreak of SARS and the west Nile virus made it hard for the tourism industry to flourish.
The Task environment within the Island was suitable and good for business considering that the industry raked in over $ 10billion annually. Vancouver was well known for its business expos and this had made British Columbia a respected destination in the tourism industry attracting millions of people especially during expos which brought the society together. The only form of political hostility arose from terrorism activities that followed 9-11 bombings.
The availability of websites, DVD/CD technology available to customers meant that the customer experience was maximized. The task environment was thus highly favorable due to the fairly good political, economic and socio-economic culture that was good for tourists arriving from local and international destinations.
The Hotel and hospitality industry within British Columbia was a free and fair industry in accordance with the principles of free market economy, meaning that just as Jonathan Armitage entered the industry since he had the capital, any other participant could to enter the industry.
This fact made the threat of entry quite high within the market. Due to the fact that there were other many similar Inns and resorts in the region, some of which were in the high end and low end of the market this meant that consumers had a wider range from which they could choose from. Thus, making the business environment even more competitive.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Hollyhock retreat resort is one such resort that offered camping facilities which can serve as a substitute for hotel rooms. Despite the unique ambience of the ICI, the presence of camping sites and Rustic dorm rooms have in some way increased the threat from substitute products because individuals who don’t opt to sleep in rooms may go to tents hoping to get close to nature.
The product and service The Inn at Cortes Island is an establishment that targeted mainly middle income earners who paid somewhat average fees to enjoy their services (the average fee per room is $ 225 and $ 110 per cabin). These prices were found to be suitable for middle income earners who frequently toured the Inn and recommended it to others.
The problem is that the price is too high for some target customers turning them away. The Inn had both rooms and cabin spaces facing the beach, Jacuzzi tubs, fireplaces, DVD/CD players for entertainment, and high quality linen in rooms, that were suitable for couples, tourists and even weeding events. Additionally, apart from offering sleep facilities the Inn also provides local gourmets and exclusive food.
The product design should also be differentiated for high end customers. The design of the room was quite cool because it was done by artists who ensured that earth tones were used to create an atmosphere of relaxation which was expected by the customers. In addition, the rooms and furniture ware fitted with high quality linen to ensure that the place looked good. The design of place has no weakness.
The Inn used its website as part of their promotion tool and thus designed it properly. Additionally, the hotel depended upon word of mouth to promote its brand.ICI management also hired A media consultancy farm to create publicity for them occasionally. The current promotion efforts are not enough and should be more vigorous.
The intended market of The inn Cortes Island was tourists and locals who especially fell under the middle class bracket of the economy who were searching for a unique spot that had the best ambience.
The segmentation is good and highly attractive having no weakness. Other competitors within the Island were Hollyhock Retreat Resort and April Point, which provided high end services; also there were other many resorts and Inns in the Island which could provide services similar to ICI’s thus making competition stiffer. Because the Inn did not offer high end services it is bit of a disappointment for customers with high end needs.
We will write a custom Assessment on The Inn on Cortes Island specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The competitive advantage of ICI was the Inn had unique ambience and design, a good website and world-class cooks together with the availability of capital to expand the business. The Inn serves the affluent middle class who need to run away from the busy urban environment and go to the Island to watch and enjoy nature. Customers visiting this inn usually wish to have some peace and spend time with their loved ones.
The availability of a beautifully designed website has made it quite easier for the Inn to access its clients and serve them better. Also other technologies such as the availability of DVD/CD players for entertainment have ensured that guests who visit the place are well catered for in terms of entertainment.
Jonathan is the sole shareholder and CEO the Inn. He decided to hire someone who would take the position of a general manager to ensure a smoother day to day running of the organization. ICI has its organizational structure divided into four main functional divisions, which include the front desk, housekeeping, maintenance and grounds, and food services each of this functional area is headed by an individual manager.
At the beginning, the owner had decided to hire a mother and son team with the mother serving as the general manager while the son serving as the chief chef but the decision turned out to be a bad one the forcing the owner to employ a more experienced and professional general manager, Edward Bourgogne. Upon his arrival the general manager put in place new systems and brought in a new chief chef Jackie Newcome, a move that saw improvement in the relationship and quality of work in the Kitchen.
Investment-Pay Back Exit Plan
The construction of the Inn was made possible by the help of loans and the forecasted Revenues are expected to assist the shareholder to repay the loans. The management forecast expects that approximately 70% occupancy rate of the Cabin throughout the year will be needed in repaying the loan.
The bank current total loans have accumulated to $4.8 million, with the latest loan awarded to ICI being $1.8 million the current twelve-monthly principal and interest payments are expected to be around $38,700 per month, which will be spread across loan repayment schedule of 240 months.
The business expects to make revenues of $2.2milion and this is expected to increase by 10% within the following year although no profits are expected in first two years as the company is expected to start breaking even in the third year of its operations. This will ensure that the company repays its loans comfortably.
Table 1. The Business Environment
Not sure if you can write a paper on The Inn on Cortes Island by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Opportunities Threats Political The resort was established after an approval was made by the local council, federal fisheries department and island trust
The state supports tourism industry
The September 11 incidence brought a decline of the number of tourists in British Columbia
Economic The state puts tourism as a major source of the nations revenue totaling to about $10 billion from a total of 22.5 million overnight visitors
Downturn in the economic position of the state reduces overall demand of services and products
Societal The resort has established a reputation as being a family oriented resort
Most residents residing in and around the result are frequent visitors
The population present is small constraining the availability of staff
People look at tourism sector with no good employment opportunities due to low pay
Technological The resorts website provide quality and in-depth information to its customers and aspiring visitors
The media firm offers the resort an opportunity to avail information about the resort to the people for publicity purposes
Not each person is conversant with new technologies
Table 2. Industry Conditions
High Neutral Low Threat of new entrants x Bargaining power of customers x Bargaining power of suppliers x Threat of substitutes x Intensity of competition x Key success factors
Table 3. Financial Size-Up
Strengths Weaknesses Profitability and Cash Flow: Has helped improve its dining room to fit in a world class menu
It has also helped them estimate the expansion expenses needed
Strains the relationship between the resort management and the banks
Liquidity: Helpful for short term financial issues enabling the business meet its current obligation
It can uncover the weaknesses in the financial position of the resort especially during bank scrutiny of the resort
Stability: Indicates the strong interim profit performance of the resort
The stability record may not be convincing to the banks due to poor timing for expansion plans
Efficiency: Serves as standardized metrics to measure financial efficiency for investment opportunities
Unexpected cash flow models may be used which will not much up predictions made
Growth: the continuous interim performance of the Inn contributes to the need of wanting to undertake cabin expansion
Constraints from financial sources hence intense scrutiny by the bank
Table 4. Marketing Size-Up
Strengths Weaknesses Market tactics Price
The target market for the resort is the middle come earners meaning the place it quite affordable.
It has a good reputation for food and beverage service.
It’s situated along the richly stretched sandy beach with boldly well constructed rooms giving an earthling feeling that are featured with Jacuzzi tubs fire places dvd/cd players.
In terms of product promotion, it has a media consultancy department that deals with publication for publicity purpose including a comprehensive website.
Infatuation of the tourism industry leads to constant changes in the market especially in pricing
Market analysis Segmentation
Its market segmentation targets the middle class hence affordable to many
The resort is situated in a secluded area that is quite different from the urban environment
It also enjoys an upscale world class menu for its clients
Expansion plans will be an added advantage to the resorts competitors as it will attract more visitors
The media consult department is a major advantage to the resort as it’s able to publicize to its target market.
The poor cannot afford the resort facilities
The product needs to be differentiated in market segmentation to provide high class customer services.
Market strategy execution The strategy was executed properly through positioning and segmentation giving ICI a good and definite market which it intended to serve.
The management could have been more vigorous on implementing the strategy by launching more serious comprehensive campaigns.
Table 5. Operations Size-Up
Strengths Weaknesses Operations process Business operation are well managed hence the constant profit result
Lack of organized and permanent staff Members
Risk management issues The expansion plan is seen as A major project that will increase the number of visitors coming to the resort
Its expansion plan is a risk taking step
Legal issues Do not exist
Do not exist
Location issues Its strategic position creates a Good environment that is peaceful and fresh as compared to the city life
Less staff for the resort due to low population size
Use of technology Gives comprehensive information about the resort.
Provides entertainment opportunity to the visitors
Not each person is conversant with new technologies
Table 6. Human Resource Size-Up
Strengths Weaknesses Human Resource function Recruitment and Hiring
Training and Development
Compensation, Performance and Incentives
Staff hiring and training was at first done quickly
To retain staff members staff housing was a benefit for all staffs
Employment of an individuals with decent leadership skills and with good interpersonal skills stabilizes staff relationship
The rural location of the resort encounters low population for hiring staff members
Most people discriminate the tourism sector because of its low payment
Recruitment of employees is low due to small population size
Leadership issues Organizational Structure
Teams and Teamwork
Its headed by a CEO who is the owner of the resort
Besides the CEO, the resort has a general manager overseeing everyday operations including departmental managers
Every staff member has to undergo training to develop their skills
The resorts departments are divided into four each headed by a manger. The manager becomes the team leader of the department
The resort was first run as a family “family team” which later became a problem
Staff members do not stay on permanent basis
Table 7. Technology Size-Up
Strengths Weaknesses Technology concept and product Introducing DVDs/CDs was a good move to keep the visitors entertained just like in the urban areas. The concept of their comprehensive website provides quality information about the resort to those who visit it for any queries
Not each person is conversant with new technologies
Intellectual property issues Its competitive nature has increased the resorts ability to provide high value-added products and services at competitive price
It Details company’s past experience to prove that the resort can execute on the opportunity
It is not easy to put the company to bank scrutiny
Potential risk factors Expansion plans are promising to the growth of the business
The expansion plans will have to surpass the internal challenges especially in the human resource department
Table 8. Expansion decision
Rationale and Risk Assessment
Financial risk: Mitigated by: Financial planning, whereby the management laid out a good loan repayment schedule that would take close to 20 years to repay the loan easing stress on the shareholder. Market risk: Mitigated by: Developing a marketing mix that appeals tom customers and is up to date with competitors ensuring that ICI is more likely to succeed in the market Operations risk: Mitigated by: Hiring a good operations manager that is able to manage the employees and the heads of all, other department thus reducing conflict and enabling smooth flow of day to day activities. Construction risk: Mitigated by: By planning the entire construction process and assigning roles clearly to construction personnel in order ensure construction is according to schedule. Management risk: Mitigated by: Hiring qualified managers in all functional areas and hiring a professional operations manager to oversee management of the entire organization.
Human Relations – Walmart Essay essay help free: essay help free
Correlation analysis differs from regression analysis in that: 1) it determines if a relationship exists between two variables, and 2) if the relationship exists, it identifies it. Regression analysis on the other hand, attempts to predict the value of a dependent variable by using a single or multiple independent variables.
The correlation coefficient tells of the strength of the relationship between two variables (Doanne and Seward, 2007, 490). Additionally, if it is a positive value e.g. 0.1 it tells that the relationship is positive and if it is a negative value e.g. -0.1 it tells that the relationship is negative.
The quick rule for the significance of a correlation at α = 0.05 is |r| > 2 / √ n. The limitation for this rule is that it can only be used for α = 0.05.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More For i = 1…n, the sums needed to calculate a correlation coefficient are: 1) the sum of the product of xiyi, 2) the sum of xi, and 3) the sum of yi.
The two ways of testing the significance of a correlation coefficient are: 1) using the t-test, where the test statistic, r, is r√((1 – r²)/(n – 2)) , and 2) the Z-test, where Z = ln[|(r 1)/r-1)|]/2 .
From the question, Let x = weekly pay, y = income tax and n = 35. From the ANOVA table, the fitted regression equation is ŷ = 30.7963 0.0343x.
From the output table, the degrees of freedom are 33 and the critical value at α =0.05 from appendix D is 2.035.
We will write a custom Essay on Human Relations – Walmart specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Part c
Since the p-value = 0.0161 is less than α = 0.05 we conclude that the correlation coefficient, r, is zero and accept the slope value of 0.0343.
With a 95% level of confidence, the true slope lies inside the closed interval 0.0101 and 0.0584.
Now, t = 2.889 and t² = 8.35 = F. This is the verification.
From the table, since r² = 0.202 then the regression equation, ŷ = 30.7963 0.0343x, explains 20.2 % of the correlation that exists between the two variables.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Human Relations – Walmart by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Question 12.50
From the question, X = total assets ($ billions), Y = total revenue ($ billions), and n = 64.
From the regression output, the fitted regression equation is ŷ = 6.5763 0.0452x.
The regression output shows that the degrees of freedom are 62. The critical value at α = 0.05 is 1.999.
Now, from the regression output t = 80813, which is much greater than the critical value of 1.999. Thus, the conclusion is that, the true slope ≠ 0.
With a 95% level of confidence, the true slope lies inside the closed interval 0.0342 and 0.0563.
Now, t=8.183. t²= 66.96 ≈ F. Thus F = t² for the slope.
X1 as the predicting value accounts for more than half of the variability of y. Additionally, the true slope of the line is not zero. From these two facts we conclude that X1 is a good predictor of y.
From the stepwise regression analysis and the results we note that: 1) addition of variables causes an increase in r², which is normal behaviour, and 2) the addition of infant mortality causes r² to decrease in tiny amounts. From these observations, we can conclude that: 1) the variables used in the analysis do not give the model sufficient exploratory power.
A likely reason for such a case to occur is that the variables in the analysis might contain to a significant extent the same information. 2) The addition of variables GDPcap and Literate causes LifeExp and InfMort to be no longer highly significant.
The results of the regression analysis describe a highly predictive regression model. This is because the independent variables in the analysis explain 81.1% of the variability of the dependent variable.
The graph is shown is shown in Appendix A.
America was in war in the 1960’s and 1970’s thus the high number of aviation shipments during these periods is a result of increased creation of war planes
A fitted trend would not be helpful for the above data as no trend reveals itself whether linear or not.
The graph is shown in appendix B. Again, a fitted trend would not be helpful for the above data as no trend reveals itself whether linear or not.
The best trend model for the data is shown in Appendix C where the regression equation is, ŷ = 182.21x – 362294 and r² = 0.7257. The forecast for 2004 is given by substituting x with 2004 in the regression equation. Thus, the forecast is 182.21 ×2004 – 362294 = 2854.84. The reason why it is good to ignore the earlier years is so that we get a sub-dataset that can be properly analyzed using an appropriate regression model.
Quiz question one.
The table in Appendix D gives the respective starting salary averages (in thousands of dollars) for each gender in each of the MBA majors. Additionally, it also gives the starting salary averages (in thousands of dollars) for each of the MBA majors.
From the averages in this table, the dean can conclude that: 1) males are paid more than females in each of the MBA majors except marketing where the opposite is true. 2) Finance is the highest paying MBA major followed by Accounting followed by Marketing and Management is the least paying MBA major. 3) Both males and females should major in Finance if they wish to maximize their starting salaries.
Quiz question two.
Let p1 be the proportion of male doctors who took 325 mg asprin tablet. Thus, p1 = 104/11307 = 0.00942. Let p2 be the proportion of male doctors who took placebo. Thus, p2 = 189/11304 = 0.01713.
The null hypothesis is: H0 = p1 – p2 ≥ 0, which when interpreted means that the proportion having heart attacks is not significantly lower for male doctors who took 325 mg aspirin tablet than for male doctors who took placebo. The alternative hypothesis is : H1 = P1 – P2 < 0, which when translated means that the proportion having heart attacks is significantly lower for male doctors who took 325 mg aspirin tablet than for male doctors who took placebo.
The test for these hypotheses is two-tailed. Let z be the test statistic, thus z = z = (p1 – p2) – D0 / σp1-p2 where σp1-p2 = √ p (1 – p)(1/n1 1/n2). From the question and the hypotheses set, n1 = 11307, n2 = 11304, D0 = 0, p = 293/22611 = 0.013. Therefore z = ((0.00942 – 0.01713) – 0) / √ (0.013 (1 – 0.013)(1/11307 1/11304)) = -5.00. The p-value for z is 0.000000285.
Since the p-value is less than 0.001 we have extremely strong evidence that H0 if false and thus we accept H1 and conclude that, the proportion having heart attacks is significantly lower for male doctors who took 325 mg aspirin tablet than for male doctors who took placebo.
References Doanne, D. P. and Seward, L. E. (2007). Applied statistics in business and economics. (1st ed). McGraw-Hill/ Irwin: New York. 490
Appendix Appendix A
Figure 1. Graph for data on U.S. Manufactured General Aviation Shipments, 1966–2003
Figure 2. Graph for data on U.S. Manufactured General Aviation Shipments, 1992–2003
Figure 3. Graph showing fitted trend model for data on U.S. Manufactured General Aviation Shipments, 1992–2003
Table 1. Averages for each gender and MBA major
Accounting Finance Management Marketing Male 96.2 99.9 80.27 74.23 Female 84.2 82.9 60.23 78.1 Average 90.2 91.4 70.25 76.17
Management Problems in Social Media Report best essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Findings and discussions
Lack of privacy
Lack of proper government laws
Privacy issues in YouTube
Conclusions and recommendations
Introduction It may prove difficult to draw clear difference between infringement of personal privacy and fair usage of social media due to the availability and ease with online materials can be accessed at any given time. One may not know which video files, songs or pictures to upload and use without permission.
It is therefore the duty of the management of social media sites such as Facebook, twitter and You Tube to protect themselves and their users from infringement of privacy. According to studies carried out by recent empirical researchers, loss of privacy can be minimized by designing an End User License Agreement (EULA), a term of service that will to some level, control loss of privacy especially on copyright infringement (Aula 2010, p. 45).
Tackling this management problem will save social media companies from heavy losses due to payment of huge fines for any form of privacy infringed. Additionally, it will save the image of social media sites from severe damage linked to sites where the rate of infringement of privacy is high.
The use of, or viewing of personal materials without express permission from the owner is a violation that demeans intellectual property of the owner.
Due to lack of thorough regulation, many internet users especially in sites like facebook have tremendously violated privacy laws. Lack of strict regulation may be due to the fact that most governments and management teams have given the issue of violation of privacy a laissez-faire approach (Coeckelbergh, 2011, p.132). This has immensely contributed to increase in violation of privacy.
On the same note, distribution of private materials in the internet has become commonplace. Theft, unauthorized access to materials of other internet users and distribution of illegal copyrighted materials like movies, music, photographs, literature and games have tremendously increased. Modern technology has necessitated sharing and uploading files in social networks.
A bigger portion of the uploaded and shared materials infringes on copyright and privacy. This essay will examine how lack of proper management on Facebook, twitter, You tube, MySpace and other social sites has led to loss of privacy.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Findings and discussions To begin with, Facebook is a networking site that connects people in different geographical locations who study and stay around them online. In addition to being a social site, there are quite a number of other social interests that are carried out.
They include sharing of links and videos, knowing each other and uploading photos. Social media sites have spread far and wide with over one million registered users who can open files and browse freely, receive and send messages and pictures (Hall, 2011, p. 425). The graph below shows adoption of social media over time alongside elements of management policies.
Facebook and other social media sites users can also post and share their interests and biographies with other users as well. The site offers its users opportunities to connect in almost every area in life. It has numerous benefits that touch both social and economic sectors.
It gives the user the access to the intrinsic value of the social world. This is practical in the sense that if you have a brand or an organization, and a potential researcher sees your profile, can easily access you. A number of factors cause violation of individuals’ privacy in social media as discussed below.
Insecurity The act of sharing of files on social network sires has increased tremendously with over 5 million active users and over 200 million people who log in everyday. Photos, music, videos and other literary materials are uploaded and exchanged each day (Kemp
Object recognition Analytical Essay college admission essay help: college admission essay help
Cognitive processes involved in object recognition Object recognition refers to an individual’s ability to pick out physical properties of an object such as texture, color and shape, and apply to object attributes that are semantic in nature such as its relationship with other objects in terms of usage (Auckland et al., 2007). It involves high-level visual processing, a mechanism that is controlled by right cerebral hemisphere. Besides, it is a process that creates awareness and knowledge through overtly verbal thinking, memory, perception and experience (Gordon, 2004).
Processes that are involved in object recognition are divided into four main stages drawn from neuropsychological evidences. They include applying semantic attributes in order to provide meaning to a visual representation, learning, feature integration, planning, and feature coding as well as reasoning (Auckland et al., 2007).
The most important process is applying semantic attributes in order to provide meaning to visual representation. Research studies indicate that human beings tend to recognize objects through their characteristic features. It is imperative to note that giving meaning to a visual representation is influenced by motor sequence and occurs at the basic level (Brockmole et al., 2006).
This makes this process to be important since visual representation, which occurs at the basic level is more accurate and rapid, and works better than other processes in other taxonomic levels.
In understanding its importance, it is worth noting that in object recognition, objects are naturally and systematically categorized in groups in terms of their attributes. This indicates that human beings use minimum inter-individual variability features that are consistent to recognize an object.
Such features include those that they use to extract class invariance and high cue validity (Brockmole et al., 2006. Conceptual knowledge base on visual representation is vital in guiding behavior, solving a problem or even drawing a conclusion.
Does context influence on object recognition? It is a fact that context influences object recognition. In visual perception, despite occlusions and illumination changes as well as variability in pose, human beings are able to recognize different categories of objects. Matching available image features with target object representation without background features has been a major problem in object recognition.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In this case, context makes it impossible to detect process by creating random distractors (Torralba et al., 2006). Contextual associations have been considered as important in visual system since they co-vary with the environment and other objects. It is agreeable that objects in an inconsistent scene appear inaccurate and are less detected and processed than those in familiar and consistent backgrounds.
The influences of context in object recognition effects at multiple levels such as pose, spatial configuration and semantics. The latter, which include size, position and presence of objects, and physical object scenes, have a contextual relationship that can hinder or allow target objects to be detected (Brockmole et al., 2006).
It is important to note that to accurately recognize an object, the relationship between context and object must be strong. Using scene consistency-inconsistency framework, a consensus is reached that objects and context mutually influence each other.
In fundamental nature, context influences object recognition by changing it perpetual analysis (Torralba et al., 2006). The formation of objects at the perpetual level is influenced by context through integration of features. Besides, analysis of images is affected by context as observed in contingencies existing between target object location and distractor objects of arbitrary configurations (Brockmole et al., 2006).
References Auckland, M.E. et al. (2007). Non-target objects can influence perceptual processes during object recognition. Psychon. Bull. Revision.14, 332–337.
Brockmole, J.R. et al. (2006). Contextual cueing in naturalistic scenes: globaland local contexts. J. Exp. Psychol. Learn. Mem. Cogn. 32, 699–706.
Gordon, R.D. (2004). Attentional allocation during the perception of scenes. J. Exp, Psychol. Hum. Percept. Perform. 30, 760–777.
We will write a custom Essay on Object recognition specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Torralba, A. et al. (2006). Contextual guidance of attention in natural scenes: the role of global features on object search. Psychol. Rev. 113,766–786.
Nietzsche: Death of God Research Paper essay help site:edu
Table of Contents Introduction
The Mad Man
Existence of God
Introduction The question of whether God really exists has elicited heated debates and remained unsolved for as long as documented history can trace. This is mainly caused by the belief that unless man establishes the existence of God he can not really understand the purpose of his existence. The belief in God is what maintains world peace and morals as most people desist from violence and crime for the fear of God.
It is the realization of God’s role in the maintenance of orderliness that inspired Nietzsche to create a hypothetical situation where God did not exist.
He told a story of a mad man who ran around the market place searching for God. Many of the Atheists who were around at that time teased him. They asked the madman whether God was hiding or had lost his way like a child. Some asked whether God was afraid or whether he had ran away. They cajoled and laughed at him.
The mad man, after listening to their questions jumped into their midst saying that they had all killed God. They were all God’s murderers.
He thus asked a series of questions to the effect that it was almost impossible to mkill God but they had done it. He compared killing God to drinking up the sea, wiping away the horizon or unchaining the earth from the sun.
The Mad Man The mad man concludes his speech by wondering how we humans could comfort them in the face of such a grave sin. What festivals of atonement or ceremonies could they perform to wipe God’s blood of themselves? Could they substitute God with themselves and perform his role? As his listeners reflected on his speech the mad man implied that mankind had killed God by disregarding his morals and yet distanced them from it. He later went to several churches and declared them tombs of God.
This story appeared blasphemous at first glance and as expected aroused a lot of criticism from the church at that time. Perhaps the story was meant to show how the degradation of morals had turned God into a far off notion. Nietzsche does not imply that God existed at one time and then died literary. The death of God represented the erosion of Christian values and Christian morality.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More He essentially tries to foresee a future when such erosion will reach a level where there will be nothing to guide human actions. He therefore tried to create an alternative source of morals, which is why the madman asks whether man has tried to replace God. By deviating from the guidelines of Christianity men destroyed the very concept of God as we knew it.
Most people including the Christians of the time took “the death of God” literary. This put Nietzsche at odds with them. In defense he argued that God was only a notion in their mind which continued fading into an illusion with each passing day. He proposed that mankind needed an alternative source of morals which was not based on the wishes of a supreme being.
Since the idea of God is in peoples minds they might as well learn to live in peace with each other without fear of divine punishment. It is in this sense that the mad man said that people had murdered God or the notion of him thereof. This had happened through the hypocrisy of believers which discouraged potential believers. Their actions demeaned God to the extent that he became an object of ridicule the likes of the atheists at the market.
Basically Nietzsche was talking of the death of belief in the metaphysical realm. If metaphysics is not strong enough to sustain its influence on people’s lives, it is wiser to think ahead and prepare for a world run without it. He viewed metaphysics as an idea that was bound to collapse just like anything else with a beginning.
A world without God, to him, was not only possible but inevitable. This world would be less restrictive and would enhance mankind’s creativity and material progress. In this world human beings would no longer turn to heavens for guidance but would discover the strengths within them. This would usher in a new era in human existence where man would fully realize the potentials locked in the world. All values that guide humanity would be reviewed and a new code would guide their actions.
In Nietzsche’s opinion people do not accord the physical the attention it deserved. It is because of this devaluation of the world around them that they seek comfort in the spiritual and metaphysical ideas which are not compatible to human reality. They seek answers for the uncertain nature of life in abstract beings which limit the bounds of their creative potential. He proposed that the solution to this would come in the form of mankind learning to rely on itself for enlightment (Nietzsche 49).
Nietzsche, being one of the believers in the rule of the body over the body over the mind believed that ideas contained inhibited the body’s actions (72). Thus the body is the true self though it it can be denied that inner feelings drive it. This means that qualities like bravery, laziness, or physical exhaustion can greatly influence the physical condition. The idea of the mind operating on its own and controlling the body is just a manifestation of the body’s power.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Nietzsche: Death of God specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This power is displayed as will or determination. The psychological part of a human being that controls these qualities is connected to the unconscious part of the mind. In his other woks he suggested that this subconscious part of the human mind is what some people referred to as God. What people referred to as visions are simply a connection of multiple ideas in the mind. The fragments of ideas gained in the course of ones lifetime.
In his work Thus Spoke Zarathustra He described the mind as one of the many components that were necessary for the body’s survival. He in effect proposed that the mind could survive on its own without the external influence of religion or the belief in God. “Behind your thoughts and feelings, my brother, there stands a mighty ruler, an unknown sage- whose name is self. In your body he dwells; he is your body (William 61).
There is more reason in your body than in your best wisdom. And who knows why your body needs precisely your best wisdom?” (Nietzsche 49).
This view contrasted with the Christian doctrine that depicted the body as the very epitome of evil. The bible urges Christians to ignore the body’s desires since they eventually led to sin. By ignoring the body’s desires one has to ignore its abilities as well and seek to over-rely on the mind.
Nietzsche was brought in a Christian tradition. His radical views and materialistic ideas might have been a rebellion against tradition. He thus sought to change the view of the world as a sinful and dirty place. In the same way the body to him was a self sufficient entity with multiple abilities. To him there was no need to refer to the mind or the supernatural realm for answers that were easily available in the physical realm.
In the 19th century saw the popularization of the importance of the body and the physical world. Many scholars scandalized conservative beliefs and the mainstream morals.
Existence of God The inevitable finality of life further drives people to seek the comfort of an imaginary life beyond the present which distracts them from their present day to day life. Thus, the idea of heaven or the after life blocks the full realization of exploitation of the world’s resources.
People concentrate so much on the imperfections of life and spend little time trying to make it easier by withdrawing into the utopian world where life is more perfect. Sensible people on the other hand take their troubles in stride and consider the realities of life as inevitable. Just like the non-believers in the market place we should not distract ourselves with the idea of the existence of God.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Nietzsche: Death of God by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More It is this attitude that Nietzsche called “the death of God”. They just went about their daily business and suspected that God was afraid of them or had simply deserted them. However man simply can not live without something to believe in.
With the rise of science many intellectuals tried merge it with their Christian values with disastrous results. The two were simply incompatible. Science does not accept anything that can not be supported by facts. The mad man in Nietzsche’s story wonders whether there is still an above an below.
This suggests that God and his existence can be supported by the physical world. The death of God would mean that the death o0f the physical world too. Our very existence is the proof that God exists. Therefore science does not substitute God but is just one of the supporting facts to the existence of God.
Without God, according to the mad man, there would be no above and below, no horizon, and no world. The material world in itself must have originated from somewhere beyond the physical real.
As Doctor Lewontin put it “It is not that the methods and institutions of science somehow compel us to accept a material explanation of the phenomenal world, but, on the contrary, that we are forced by our a priori adherence to material causes to create an apparatus of investigation and a set of concepts that produce material explanations, no matter how counterintuitive, no matter how mystifying to the uninitiated” (Lewontin 28).
Science supports the existence of God rather than his death in more than one way. The laws of nature that scientists so much insist on must have been created or set in motion by an external force. A scientist takes the long route of tracing the interconnection between the forces of nature to arrive at the same conclusion with the mad man.
An astronomer will eventually conclude that the universe must have had a single beginning.
Since Islam and Christianity depict God as “ a being than which no greater can be conceived” it is only logical to argue that he too exists (Lewontin 132) The amazing nature of the universe which science itself confirms the existence of greater scientist who engineered it.
It is in this sense that the mad man asked “Who had given man the sponge with which to wipe away the horizon” scientists confirm that the earth is designed with such precision the if the earth and the sun were a bit further from or closer to each other than they now are, life on earth would be simply unbearable. Such precision defies the random nature through which evolutionists claim that the world came into being. The chances of a single protein molecule forming at random are simply impossible.
The philosophical law of cause and effect states that things can not simply come into being. The existence of the universe can therefore be looked at as an effect which must have occurred by a divine cause. Despite Nietzsche’s emphasis on the dynamic nature of the body and the physical realm, he confirmed the internal willpower is what drove the body.
This subconscious part that he equated to God is what the Bible refers to as conscience- the God in man. The existence of this part of man can be further supported by universality of some of the laws and values that are dear to man. Regardless of race, culture and time in history murder, vices such as stealing, lying are prohibited.
The dates provided by Darwin’s theory do not concur with the dates that an astronomer would give to explain the formation of the world. Molecular biologists eventually agree that no amount of time would see to the complex make up of cells. Philosophers would eventually agree that at the heart of science is a set of laws that makes objects not fall upwards. These laws must have been put in place by a force beyond the physical realm (William 136).
Believing in this force would call for adherence to faith which contrasts to the law of logic that is central to science. While religion has done its best to accommodate science the latter seems to thrive on the denial of the former.
The world, at Nietzsche’s time and today, relies more on the scientific-technological realities and would rather ignore the possibility of the existence of a force beyond the physical world. Science has become the basis of truth and seems to come to the fulfillment of his prophecy.
This seems to further confirm the swiftly approaching death of God in people’s minds. Religion continues to adjust itself to accommodate science which relentless strives to annihilate it (Gabriel 112).
Nietzsche cunningly put the ideas he opposed into a madman’s mouth. The mad man may not have been literary crazy since his thoughts were coherent and sensible. What made him look mad to the crowd was that he had realized how people had denied God without realizing it (Altizer 118). While many were aware that God was no more, few realized that it was they who had killed him.
Some of them still went about their business as if God was still supreme, not willing to accept the fact that their actions were a continuous denial of his existence. By developing a science-based system of thought and belief the people had slowly edged God out of their lives. What remained was just a shell of rituals that people went through out habit and tradition.
The whole parable seems to have been directed at people’s hypocritical ways. Humanity had ceased to act in the ways of religion but continued it give lip service to God. They practiced science and preached religion. As a result the world became so full of chaos as a result of people trying to subscribe to two opposing doctrines. The mad man further compares the chaos to the world being unchained from the sun.
Nietzsche also seems to support the idea that God is a product of a fantasy that all mankind escapes to. He therefore seems to be for that man should either conform completely to religion or abandon it instead of slowly killing God. He thus proposed ways of approaching both options.
Works Cited Altizer, Thomas. Radical Theology. London: Mac Milan, 1936.
Gabriel, Robert. The Culture of our Post-Christian Era. London: Random, 1968
Lewontin, Fredrick, Billions and Billions.NY: Random Publishers, 1997.
Nietzsche,Friedrich .The Gay Science. NY: Vintage Publishers,1882.
William, Edwin. Death of God. Priceton. Princeton, 1972.
Planning functions Essay cheap essay help
Planning is a decision making process. It helps one to decide on what to do and how to do it. There are six steps to follow when planning. First and foremost, one has to analyze the situation. Two constraints are very important at this stage and they are time and resources. Gathering of information and interpreting is done at this stage.
Also, a summary of all the relevant information is done. Identification and diagnosing planning assumptions is done. In addition issues and problems are identified. The second step is having alternative goals and plans. Alternative goals that can be implemented later are provided. It also gives plans used to implement the goals. Thirdly, evaluation of goals and plans is done.
Advantages and disadvantages on alternative goals and plans are evaluated. Also, the possible effects of the goals and plans are evaluated at this stage. Fourthly, selection of the goals and plans is carried out. The most appropriate and feasible goals and plans are selected. Right judgment is crucial at this stage. In the fifth step, implementation of the designed plans takes place. This helps one to achieve the set goals. To implement a plan, the manager must understand it well.
Also, resources to implement the plan must be available. Finally, monitoring and controlling are important. These help one to know whether his/ her plan is succeeding. Continuous monitoring of the actual performance against unit’s goal should be done. Implementation is the most important step in planning. The reason behind this is that implementation of plans helps in achieving the set goals (Darlkir, 7).
There are three types of plans that can be used in different organizations. These include, single used plans, standing plan, and contingency plan. Single-use plans are used in activities that are done only once. They are one time-time use plans. They also have specific goals.
They may be used for duration of few days. In addition, they may last for a number of years. Projects and programs are good examples of single-use plans. Also, budgets can be considered as single-use plans. The activities involved are like the special sales program.
Programs cover ‘who’ and ‘what’ in an activity. It also covers ‘where’, and ‘how’ the activity will be done (Ingram, para.3). Standing plans are applied in activities that take a long time to complete. In some cases it might be indefinite time. They can be adjusted so as to cater for the changing situations. Mostly they are created from information from different sources over a longer period. They also cover several departments in an organization.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Examples of standing plans are policies, a procedure and rules (Ingram, para.4). Contingency plans are meant for specific situations. This is incase things don’t move as expected. Contingency planning involves flexibility and adaptation. Also, mastery is needed due to the changing conditions.
They include planning for marketing. The reason behind is to get support from the stakeholders. In addition, they allow for understanding from the stakeholders (Ingram, para.5). In our organization we usually use standing plan. The reason behind is that we usually deal with activities that need much time before completion. Also, in our organization we have many different departments where this kind of planning is more applicable.
From the above literature, I have been able to learn that planning is one of the key aspects in any organization. Implementation of a plan is one of the most important steps in any planning. Implementation helps in achieving the already set goals. Without the implementation of a plan, the other work done during the planning process will be of no importance. Different plans can be applied in different organizations. The kind of plan to be used depends on the type of activities taking places in an organization.
Works Cited Darlkir, Kimiz. Knowledge management in theory and practice. New York: Technology partner. 2011. Print.
Ingram, David. Define single use, contingency
Command Spanish Essay writing essay help: writing essay help
The mission of Command Spanish is to provide high quality occupational Spanish language and cross-cultural training and training programs to English-speakers throughout the Grand Valley. Command Spanish offers a service that will equip businesses with desperately needed job-related Spanish-language training which will allow the businesses to better understand its Spanish speaking customers.
The current marketing goal of Command Spanish is to increase communication among businesses and its Spanish speaking customers. Increased communication will allow companies to provide better customer service and improve safety for Spanish speaking people. Current marketing objectives are to spread awareness of its occupational Spanish classes and convey the need the business community has for this service because of the increasing Spanish speaking population of the Grand Valley.
These goals and objectives are consistent with the mission of Command Spanish and the increasing demographic shift of Hispanics has created a stronger need for occupational Spanish classes in the Grand Valley. Command Spanish is relatively new to the Grand Valley and little marketing has been done; advertising has mostly consisted of word of mouth promotion.
Review of current marketing strategy and performance
Command Spanish has a strong product to offer the Grand Valley as many businesses have noticed its customer base expanding in Spanish speaking people. The marketing strategy has not yet been carried out, and therefore, this is little awareness of Command Spanish in the community.
There are few direct competitors and the quality of service offered by Command Spanish creates an advantage over competitors in the market. The customers have confidence with the service they are provided due to the constant communication between the instructor and client.
Channels of distribution for the occupational Spanish classes are one-on-one or group classroom settings or through the Internet. The instructor uses various resources including aid books and audio CDs to enhance the service delivery and to benefit clients.
Current and anticipated organizational resources
The most important resource that Command Spanish has is the experience and knowledge that the instructor possesses of the Spanish language. The instructor is nationally certified as a Command Spanish Certified Instructor and has taught the Spanish language for over 15 years. Command Spanish also invest financial resources in research and design to develop new courses to meet demands for customers in many different industries. Currently Command Spanish has around twenty different courses and new ones are constantly being added.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Moreover, Command Spanish has recently created a new and innovative e-Training program which is based on Command Spanish’s exclusive, revolutionary Language Power-Lock System. It claims that the “seven brain-compatible, interactive processes” unites to provide contextualized, purposeful learning opportunities. It employs an integrated “switchback method” to engage the learner through visual, auditory, and psychomotor pathways.
This is an effective system for the learning and long-term retention of practical Spanish language for the workplace because the interactive learning processes is easy and user-friendly. It is anticipated that resources for new courses and innovative e-Training programs will continue to be a priority of the organization. On the other hand, resources for marketing budget have been limited and are not likely to increase.
Customer Environment Current and Potential Customers
The customers or potential customers for Command Spanish’s services are any corporate or government entities that do, or may in the future, do business with or employ Spanish speaking people.
These customers are non-Spanish speaking people in the workforce. Potential or current customers either work or have businesses in the Grand Valley and desire to have job-related communication with their Spanish speaking customers or employees. Most of these customers do not feel it is necessary to be fluent in the Spanish language in order to improve their business, but would benefit from knowing at least the Spanish language that is work related.
Other customers may purchase this service because they do not have the time to learn more than the amount of Spanish that simply allows for job related communication. The language classes that Command Spanish teach eliminate the tedious grammar instruction found in most other language programs.
Command Spanish offers many different courses for customers and are able to customize for each business including those businesses in the construction industry, financial institutions, schools, health industry, law enforcement, retail sales, those interested in Spanish for basic workforce or travel, and the community.
Construction supervisors can benefit from the Command Spanish classes because miscommunication can cost time and money; with occupational Spanish language training, supervisors can communicate expectations and maintain a safe work environment. Financial institutions such as banks, loan offices, and insurance companies can adequately communicate with Spanish speaking customers by learning common phrases in determining transactions such as deposits, withdrawals, or cashing checks.
We will write a custom Essay on Command Spanish specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The health industry can also better assist the Spanish speaking community from Command Spanish classes. The courses offered in relation to the health industry include hospital nurses, medical office nurses, physicians, emergency medical services, physical therapy, respiratory therapist, dentist, and dental hygienist.
Each course is tailored more specifically to the business. For example, the nurses and physicians learn Spanish that pertains to calming patients, initial assessments, routine in-bed and out-of-bed procedures, and taking vitals or collecting blood or urine samples. Physical therapists learn Spanish that helps them communicate body position, basic physical commands and physical treatment.
Paramedics and Emergency Medical Technicians (EMTs) are trained to communicate with Spanish-speaking persons in order to make an initial assessment of the situation upon arriving at the scene, determine the main complaint, gather a history of any existing health issues, communicate body commands to make assessment and treatment and acquire patient identification for the request or refusal of transport permission.
School teachers that have periodic interaction with Spanish speaking students can better handle the classroom with knowledge of classroom management phrases, and general instruction management phrases. It is also advantageous for them to know some of the basics such as greetings, numbers and the alphabet.
Librarians can better assist with simple phrases of checking out books and directions on how to use catalog finder. Retail sales employees would greatly benefit from being able to communicate matters dealing with the register such as returns, exchanges, refunds, credit card transactions and numbers.
Customer Purchase Patterns
Customers who purchase Command Spanish services are typically the managers of the company who recognize that their employees could better suit customers with the knowledge of key job related Spanish language. Employees may influence the purchase decision of Command Spanish by requesting this type of training.
Other customers include managers or supervisors who need to communicate to their employees such as in many construction companies. Many companies have money set aside in a training budget that would cover this investment. Because Command Spanish instructors have the ability to adjust courses to be appropriate for each customer, the length and number of classes to schedule can be negotiated to fit around the business’s schedule.
Command Spanish provides a common phrase sheet and other supplemental information in a packet and it is important for the students to use it to practice what they have learned. Instructors also offer for students to call in the future if they have any questions or additional products may be purchased such as books and CDs from Command Spanish website. These products can be purchased directly off the Internet or through Command Spanish instructors.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Command Spanish by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More As more Spanish speaking people move into the Grand Valley, more businesses will realize the need for Command Spanish services. Social perceptions of the need to accommodate for the Spanish speaking population may also increase demand. Command Spanish currently does not do promotional events and most marketing has been through advertising of word of mouth.
Command Spanish bases price on the length of the class and number of students. Due to the poor economy, Command Spanish instructors have worked with many customers on price and been able to provide a discount for large classes.
Customers select Command Spanish classes because it is differentiated from traditional Spanish speaking training programs. It is efficient in meeting the company’s needs with training that is customized specifically to each occupation and then personalized through Command Spanish’s classes. It is also unique in the sense that Command Spanish has done extensive research to put together dialogs and phrases that will by widely recognized among all Spanish dialects.
Cross-cultural training is also addressed in the occupational Spanish language classes for English-speakers. Command Spanish adequately meets the needs of customers that are looking for occupational Spanish classes as opposed to being fluent in the language and Command Spanish classes are faster and less expensive than learning the entire Spanish language.
Most competitors offer courses or products that teach the Spanish language in a broad scope instead of occupational based. The demand for occupational Spanish is expected to increase in the near future as the number of Spanish speaking persons increase. Customers can develop long term relationships with Command Spanish instructors since they have the opportunity to call whenever they have questions.
Command Spanish instructors can further this long term relationship by calling customers to touch base on how they are doing with the Command Spanish. It can be very beneficial for Command Spanish to stay in contact with previous customers to show that interest in customer success with the product. Furthermore, it can also keep their perception of Command Spanish high which could possibly lead to word of mouth promotion for Command Spanish.
Rationale of Noncustomers
Noncustomers may not know Command Spanish classes exist. Others may not purchase the product because they do not realize how much their ability to communicate to Spanish speaking customers could improve their business. Especially in this economy, some companies that realize they have a need might not purchase Command Spanish’s services because they cannot afford it. Companies that already have an employee fluent in Spanish may not see a need for other employees to know any Spanish.
With the Spanish speaking population rising, many firms find it necessary to seek out an employee that can communicate fully to their Spanish speaking customers. However, hiring cost can be expensive and even companies with employees fluent in Spanish may be able to meet the rising demand by having their English-speaking employees trained in Command Spanish to avoid hiring costs of another fluent Spanish speaking employee.
Awareness of Command Spanish classes can gain customers that do not know about his services. Furthermore, educating customers on what Command Spanish offers through the classes and the direct benefit it can have on the business can change the perceptions for those businesses who may not think they need it.
The External Environment Direct Competition
Within the Grand Valley the only major direct competition for Command Spanish, is Spanish Now, located at 203 Grand Ave, Grand Junction, CO. Spanish Now is a business which offers fast and easy Spanish lessons to the general public as well as business groups (Spanish Now, 2009). There are four level courses available to take; each course builds on the previous one. Each course focuses on teaching everyday conversational needs.
Each level course is 16 hours long and occurs two days a week. There is a $10 registration fee and each course runs from $150 to $160. Spanish Now also offers a business course where a company can gather up to eight people in a group and learn Spanish based on their business needs (2009). Everyone must take a level one course and then a course will be set up for their specific needs.
Cost depends on the location of the class but can start as low as $40 an hour. Spanish Now also offers private lessons, lessons for children, special courses and well as a translation service. Customers are able to go to the Spanish Now facility register and takes classes there. They have also built a website where customers can view their services and are given instructions on how to register. They can also be contacted by email (2009).
Profluent (2009-2011) can also be considered a direct competition for Command Spanish. Profluent not only teaches Spanish to employees dealing with the Spanish speaking population, but they also teach Spanish to those who need to be able to communicate between employees.
Profluent teaches Spanish using a “Total Physical Response” method, which encourages the use of body language to “act out” the commands, that way they learn the language mentally as well as physically (Profluent, 2011). Profluent has two courses and each course is 18 hours long and $199.99.
Profluent is not a local competitor, but they send instructors to wherever they are needed. The only way they market their services is through word of mouth as well as their website. Someone may also become a consultant for Profuluent and earn commission to help spread the word (Profluent, 2011).
As more and more people gravitate to online resources, major competitions for Command Spanish are the thousands of websites that offer Spanish lessons. Many of these websites are also free. Customers can learn Spanish in the privacy of their own homes and at their convenience.
The target market for these classes includes anyone who wants to learn Spanish and has access to a computer and the Internet to do so. The major marketing done for these online lessons are through its websites, on-line companies are dependant on people who want to learn Spanish and turn to the Internet themselves for help. Online Spanish lessons, however, lack the one-on-one contact between the instructor; Command Spanish incorporates conversations between students.
Language Learning Software
Visual Link Spanish is another competitor for Command Spanish. Visual Link Spanish has sold over 130 countries around the world and is currently being taught in corporations, government agencies, and universities. The language is learned in themes, which include “Basic Needs”, “Location”, “Survival Expression”, and “Communication”. Each Spanish word is then linked to a moving image to help store the word in the brain.
The words are then broken down into groups and chosen to form sentences. This is a much faster and easier way of learning Spanish. Visual Link offers 11 free online lessons. Visual Links also has a course on workplace Spanish. By using the program employees are able to learn full sentences related to their business and are able to communicate to customers.
Visual Links Workplace Spanish course teaches employees to ask and answer questions from customers. Companies are also able to a personalized “Workplace Spanish” module created. The course includes two CD-ROMS with interactive computer lessons, 10 audio CDs to review what has been learned and a conversational manual to practice anywhere. Visual Link also offers the whole course on a MP# player. Prices vary depending on the order.
Rosetta Stone (1999-2011) is another competitor for Command Spanish. Rosetta Stone provides software to help one learn a new language as well as incorporating the Internet. They believe in the natural method of teaching a new language, no translation just direct language. They also believe that is should be fun and easy.
Rosetta Stone targets its products to several different types of people. They offer five different categories for learning a foreign language, personal, governmental, corporate, educational, as well as home school (Rosetta Stone, 2011). Rosetta Stone markets online, in stores, as well as through TV advertising.
They are a multimillion dollar company and are the “leading language-learning software in the world,” (Rosetta Stone,1999- 2011). Their Marketing budget far exceeds anything Command Spanish could compete with. They provide Kiosks in malls and have knowledgeable sales reps available to customers. The closest Kiosk to Grand Junction, CO is in Denver. Prices vary upon location.
Those who Speak Spanish
Although Command Spanish teaches Spanish, another competitor would be those in Grand Junction who are already capable of communicating with the Spanish speaking population while on the job. Many businesses through the Grand Valley look to hire those who are fluent in Spanish, because of the savings on training for each employee, as well as the potential of losing customers because employees are unable to communicate.
Within these businesses, it is possible that they may only have one or two bilingual employees, so incorporating lessons to all employees would allow for more convenience not only to customers, but within the business as well.
Some businesses may market to through its advertisements, billboards or signs within the community, that it has bilinguals on staff. This competes with Command Spanish in an indirect way because these businesses are not teaching Spanish they are merely informing the public that they have Spanish speaking employees for customer convenience and don’t need the services offered by Command Spanish.
Economic Growth and Stability
Mesa County and Grand Junction are still trying to recover from the 2007 recession and it was not until 2009 that the recession took a toll on Mesa County. The decline in oil and gas industry had a large effect on the rest of the county. Due to oversupply and decreasing prices, many commercial businesses have taken dramatic hits.
According to the Department of Labor and Employment, Mesa County has been projected to grow on average of .7% from 2009 to 2019. New job openings has been estimated to reach about 779 per year and replacement job openings is estimated at 1, 467 per year. By 2019, general employment for Mesa County is to reach 71, 284 jobs (Department, 1998-2011).
Command Spanish focuses on teaching Spanish to businesses to be able to communicate better to the Spanish speaking population. As long as there are customers who mainly speak Spanish, there will be a market for this type of business. Spanish has become the unofficial second language of the United States.
This requires more employees to understand and communicate with the Spanish speaking population. More than 40 million Hispanics live in the US today and that number continues to grow every year. This trend is creating demand for Spanish speaking employees (Bilingual? 2007).
Banks, Mortgages, Hospitals and retail companies are all experiencing demand for Spanish speaking employees. Rather than only being able to hire one or two bilingual employees, companies can pay a much smaller amount to have everyone on their staff communicating with the Spanish speaking population.
Command Spanish’s customers are optimistic about the economy because they are putting forth a better service for their customers and adding value to their businesses. Businesses that spend money on their employees are enhancing their products or services in order to gain a better return. By teaching their employees Spanish, these businesses are also engaging in a wider range of customers which can lead to higher profits because more of the population is purchasing there services.
Selling goods and services to multicultural markets is now requiring that more and more employees become familiar with other languages. As the Hispanic population grows, so does their buying power. Despite the recession the Hispanic buying power has been estimated to grow to $1.3 trillion in 2014 (“U.S. Directory”, 2006). If companies are wishing to gain more profits from these consumers, they must learn to adapt to their needs.
The biggest political issues that could affect Command Spanish are the changes in immigration laws. As of now, Visas cannot be re-issued in the United States. H-1B work Visa which allows the holder with a Bachelor’s Degree to work in the United States for up to 6 years has reached its limit and no more of these are being offered for this fiscal year (Madison, 2011). Many immigrants also fear laws, like the one passed in Arizona, which allow police to check for legal status, will soon pass in other states as well.
More immigrants may stay in hiding to avoid being deported, which can reduce the need to communicate with Spanish speaking customers. Fortunately, even with immigration being limited, the Hispanic population continues to grow with higher birth rates as immigrants are younger today (El Nasser, 2008). Command Spanish is a small company in the Grand Valley, so political influence from the company is not likely.
Legal and Regulatory Issues
Command Spanish is a licensed provider of Command Spanish. The instructors is certified to teach the materials offered by the Command Spanish Company. The legal issues concerning Command Spanish would be copyright infringement.
Instructors or other companies may not take credit for the materials being used in any course or provide services to another instructor’s exclusive area of operation. Instructors must maintain a current license to teach. Currently there are no international marketing, therefore changes in global trade agreements or laws do not affect these opportunities.
Today customers are able to receive Spanish lessons from many different venues. There are online websites with interactive lessons, as well as a huge variety of cd-rom software and several different teaching methods. Videoconferences and webinars have also aided in the distribution options in teaching and learning Spanish lessons.
In 2009, 15.8% of the US population was made up of Hispanic and Latino Americans. The United States Census population projected that in 2010 that number would rise to 16% and by 2050 it would be at roughly 30% (“Demographics”, 2011). In 2009, 9% Hispanics accounted for 9.1% of the total United States’s buying power and have a combined disposable income of $978 billion buy 2014 their buying power will top $1.3 trillion (U.S. Directory of Latina Owned Businesses, 2006).
More and more businesses are finding bilingual employees to be very valuable. Financial Institutions, private banks, the insurance industry, and companies dealing with consumer goods are most interested in Spanish speaking professions (Rigoli, E., 2007).
With the buying power of Hispanics increasing, more and more consumer goods are being translated into Spanish as well. For example, labels on food packaging and many directions are printed in both English and Spanish. Furthermore, the self-checkouts at the grocery stores have an option button for Spanish and automated phone services have the option to listen to selections in Spanish.
Businesses are beginning to understand that today Spanish is becoming America’s second language and rather than just a courtesy to those who do not speak English, it has now become a necessity to accommodate for Spanish speaking customers.
The attitude of the general population towards immigration and the adaptation of the Spanish language have been debated for years. While many feel that it is a good thing to accommodate for Spanish speaking people to allow many people from different backgrounds to communicate better with day to day activities, there are also many who feel if these individuals are going to live in America, then they should learn English.
If marketed right, expanding knowledge of another language may prove to be a great thing. Not only is it convenient for customers, but for the employees as well. Companies that are able to adhere to the Hispanic population’s needs and become more marketable, as well as more profitable because they attracting more customers to their businesses.
SWOT analysis Quantitative Assessment of the SWOT matrix for Command Spanish
M I R M I R Strengths Opportunities Customized classes to meet individual business’ needs to create exceptional customer service 3 3 9 Demographic shift increases the Spanish speaking population in the Grand Valley which increases the need for occupational Spanish 3 3 9 Instructor is nationally certified 3 3 9 Rising buying power of Hispanic population 3 2 6 Wide variety of classes offered with over 20 categories of occupations to choose from 3 2 6 Chamber of Commerce is accepting memberships which provides marketing and networking in the business community 2 2 4 Learning made easy and effective through phonetic teaching style 3 3 9 Create long term relationships with customers through communication 1 2 2 Instructor has high knowledge base and over 15 years of Spanish teaching experience 2 3 6 Advanced technology enhances teaching and learning capabilities and opportunity to hold webinars or video classes 2 1 2 On-site training saves on travel costs of customers 2 2 4 Inventory is easily attainable 2 1 2 Classes are easy to schedule with the instructor because they have a flexible schedule 1 3 3 Instructor is well known in community and have good reputations 2 1 2 New and innovative Language Power-lock System revolutionizes language e-Training 2 1 2 TOTAL 50 TOTAL 25 M I R M I R Weaknesses Threats Customer awareness is low -3 3 -9 Poor Economy -3 3 -9 Customers may perceive classes to be too costly -3 2 -6 Competitors -3 3 -9 No marketing image -2 1 -2 Many companies hire bilinguals instead of paying for current employee training -3 2 -6 Limited financial resources for marketing budget -2 1 -2 Local businesses may need corporate approval before they can make decision for the training classes -2 2 -4 New immigration laws may stop or reduce increasing number of Spanish speaking people -2 1 -2 Free online Spanish teaching services -2 1 -2 TOTAL -19 TOTAL -32 Strengths
Command Spanish provides quality service to its customers by customizing the classes to meet individual business needs. Not only is the instructor certified, but has over 15 years of teaching experience. The phonetic teaching style used has had a great amount of research done and proven effective.
Another strength of Command Spanish is that the learning experience is fun for the customers. This helps customers engage in the learning process and have an enjoyable time without being overwhelmed. Conversational learning is also incorporated, which allows the students to interact with each other in Spanish. Repetition helps students to learn the material faster with more accuracy and gain confidence in speaking it.
The main weakness of Command Spanish is the low customer awareness. Because it is a new company in the Grand Valley and little marketing has been done, there is little brand recognition of the company. Even with a limited marketing budget, these weaknesses can be converted into strengths simply by marketing and networking to the business community.
The most cost effective way for Command Spanish to market to its business customers is to join the Grand Junction Area Chamber of Commerce. The basic level of membership offers some marketing such as a listing in the printed and online directory, business referrals via Chamber staff, website, publications and other members. Moreover, it allows access to over 300 annual Chamber networking events.
Some business may perceive the cost of Command Spanish classes to be expensive training. However, Command Spanish has a strong product that is needed in the Grand Valley as more Spanish speaking people move to the area.
Command Spanish can change this weakness into a strength by communicating to businesses how costly it is to lose Spanish speaking customers to competitors who can communicate effectively and accommodate them. Once the business community realizes how advantageous occupational Spanish can be for attracting and retaining Spanish speaking customers, Command Spanish will gain more customers.
Command Spanish has the opportunity to further word-of-mouth promotion by developing long term relationships and calling past customers to check on how they are progressing with the occupational Spanish they learned and see if they have any questions. Not only will this develop a relationship with customers, but it will also keep Command Spanish at the front of their minds and in a positive light to recommend to other businesses.
One of the opportunities Command Spanish has to get in touch with many of the businesses in the Grand Valley is to join the Chamber of Commerce. This is especially important as the Spanish speaking population increases and their buying power rises because businesses in the Grand Valley need to be able to communicate effectively to accommodate these customers to stay competitive in the market. Command Spanish has the opportunity to capitalize on this need.
One of the major threats facing the organization is competition. One way Command Spanish can and has been managing the threat of competition is by differentiating themselves in the market. Command Spanish targets a specific niche of occupational Spanish learning for businesses.
Command Spanish needs to emphasize the value of customer service in having a real person to listen and make sure students are speaking it correctly as well as answer questions. The confidence level of the students knowing they are pronouncing the words correctly is going to have a great impact on the success they have with learning the Spanish words and actually using them in the workforce.
Another similar threat of competition that has been ushered in through advanced technology is the numerous online resources that aid in teaching Spanish. Many of these resources are free. Command Spanish has already lessened this threat with their innovative Language Power-lock System for its e-Training classes. Besides that, Command can market its personalized customer service through tailoring the material to each individual business, which is something that the online resources cannot offer.
Hiring bilinguals in place of training current employees is also a threat, but by effectively communicating the benefit of having all employees learn occupational Spanish can change this threat into an opportunity, especially since hiring and training cost for new employees can be very expensive.
Another factor that may keep some businesses in the Grand Valley from getting the Command Spanish classes is that some may not have the decision making power to purchase the training without corporate approval. By providing enough information for managers to believe their store has a need for occupational training, may allow them to convince corporate it is necessary.
The poor economy is a threat to all businesses, but by effectively demonstrating the cost of losing customers and expressing the importance for companies to differentiate themselves to increase business of the increasing Spanish speaking population, can lessen this threat for Command Spanish.
Competitive Advantage The competitive advantage of Command Spanish is based off customer intimacy. Command Spanish works to know and understand their customers’ needs. Businesses have discovered that with the fast pace business world and an increase in the Spanish speaking population, there is a strong desire for occupational Spanish instead of being fluent in the language.
Command Spanish uses its strengths of teaching and expertise and matches it to the opportunity and need for workplace Spanish communication to create a strong competitive advantage.
Command Spanish is very flexible and offers customization to meet its customer’s needs which also gives them a strong competitive advantage over their competitors. Not only does Command Spanish have a vast array of material that covers many different occupations, they listen to the customer to determine which phrases will be necessary to learn in order to properly communicate.
urthermore, Command Spanish has worked at understanding their customers and studied the most successful way for them to remember and confidently speak the Spanish they learn. They have invested in research and design to create a system using phonetics as an easy and effective way to learn and have recently developed a new e-Training program called Language Powerlock System.
Command Spanish constantly exceeds customer expectations by going the extra distance to spend time with the students to ensure that they are speaking correctly and have confidence to use their skills in the workplace.
Not only is the instructor nationally certified, but he also has years of experience teaching. Furthermore, customers have the convenience of having the classes taught on-site which can drastically reduce travel cost for the clients. With this strong competitive advantage, Command Spanish is able to gain market share and succeed over competitors.
Strategic Focus With several internal strengths and quite a few external threats, Command Spanish’s strategic focus is diversification. Command Spanish has a great deal to offer its customers, but some external factors affect the ability to pursue an aggressive strategy. By using a diversified strategy, Command Spanish should be able to capitalize on its strengths and avoid some of the external threats.
A diversification strategy targets new segments of customers and expands product lines to differentiate from competition. Command Spanish can target educational businesses around the grand valley, such as ITT Tech or Western Colorado Community College, and join with them. ITT Tech focuses education in specific careers, so Command Spanish could teach those students the Spanish they would need to know within the career they are going to school for.
Western Colorado Community College offers several certificate programs as well as well as technical programs. Also, instead of Command Spanish going from business to business, targeting whole industries at a time could potentially bring a larger profit as well as a wider range of customers. Larger conferences could be held for the example the banking industry, lodging industry, or medical industry. Pricing could be charged on a per person basis.
Expanding product lines to include general Spanish courses at different levels including home school or private lessons would also help Command Spanish to put into action a diversification strategy. Furthermore, families going on vacation or mission trip groups would benefit from crash courses before their trip; Command Spanish could offer this as a new product line for travel Spanish.
Another service that may Command Spanish could expand into would be translation services. For companies that are not interested in Spanish courses, Command Spanish could still appeal to them by offering translation services.
In implementing a diversification strategy, Command Spanish would be able to increase profits by reaching more customers targeting different customers and expanding product lines. Command Spanish has a lot to offer with a distinct way of learning Spanish and great customer service, making it possible to increase profits and brand awareness without having to implement a more aggressive strategy.
Moreover, Command Spanish will be able to lessen some external threats, as well as capitalize on strengths of broad and in-depth knowledge of the Spanish language and culture.
Marketing Goals and Objectives Through the goals and objectives listed below, Command Spanish will accomplish a diversification strategy.
Goal 1: Create more awareness throughout the Grand Valley.
Objective 1: Join the Grand Junction Area Chamber of Commerce. Attend at least three Chamber meetings and network events a year.
Goal 2: Target whole industries rather than just specific businesses.
Objective 2: Advertise to specific industries and hold conferences to teach larger groups. Hold a conference, invite businesses and explain the benefits of Command Spanish to those businesses.
Goal 3: Create alliances with educational businesses throughout the Grand Valley.
Objective 3: Join with ITT Tech, Western Colorado Community College or Colorado Mountain College to teach occupational Spanish to students. Book at least 4 classes every semester.
Goal 4: Expand product line.
Objective 4: Offer private or homeschool lessons to children, as well as general Spanish courses at different levels. Product line can also be expanded to offer crash courses for upcoming business, personal or mission trips, and translation services.
Goal 5: Increase sales volumes of material that compliments Command Spanish
Objective 5: Place emphasis on the books and CDs that complement the course by direct ordering through the instructor.
Marketing Strategy Primary Target Market
Command Spanish’s primary target market consists of businesses throughout the Grand Valley and western slope areas. These businesses either work with or wish to work with the Hispanic community. Industries targeted for Command Spanish include but are not limited to construction, wholesale, retail, food/accommodation services, finance, administration, educational services, as well as health care services.
These businesses can range from multimillion dollar corporations to local mom and pop shops who are all trying to reach a wider range of customers throughout the community. These businesses care about their customers as well as their employees. They all understand diversification as wish to tap into the Hispanic community and better service providers to accommodate the Hispanic community’s needs.
Many employers of these jobs are well educated with college degrees can range in age from 18 to late 60’s. These businesses should have between 5 and 30 employees working under a group of managers. These businesses should have the funds to afford the Command Spanish services. Most businesses within the target market have Internet access as well as a location for the classes to take place.
Basic Needs and Requirements
These businesses need a service to provide Spanish lessons to their employers. They are somewhat on a time schedule and need lessons to be quick and precise to what they need to know.
These would include customized material to fit their specific needs. Many businesses may either be losing customers and therefore need to expand the customer base, or other businesses may want to tap into the potential buying power the Hispanic community has to offer. These businesses may also be filling their training budget and find the services of Command Spanish to be affordable as well as convenient.
The service may also be seen as a value –added attribute to those businesses. The need for industry specific Spanish may also have been suggested by the employees thus influencing the company to attain those types of services. Educational directors of technical schools may feel the need to have specific industry based Spanish curriculums offered at their facilities. Students or teachers may have suggested such programs therefore; the school may feel the need to offer those classes.
Purchasing/Shopping Habits and Preferences
The purchase and shopping habits for Command Spanish’s primary target market shops for services monthly to yearly. For those businesses who continuous employee training, the type of service Command Spanish offers would only be one type used for those businesses. Management of those businesses would research this type of service as well as determine the benefits before purchasing industry Spanish classes.
This would not be an impulse purchase. Businesses may continue to purchase these types of classes annually depending on the turnover for its employees. Other businesses may only purchase this service once. Educational services may purchase these classes per semester or on a yearly basis.
The product strategy is to differentiate from others by providing the highest quality of service using the best methods of delivery. Unlike its competitors, the Command Spanish products are specifically tailored for occupational purposes and not just for a broad understanding of Spanish.
The major features and benefits of the Command Spanish training program is that it is brief and yet sufficient. It has an exciting approach to learning a conversational style and uses a wide variety of interesting modern tools such as CD’s, Internet, books and videos to enhance learning. It is customized to the needs and ability of every customer. The attention given to every student is a very strong characteristic as it shows the commitment of the company to the success of every customer.
Command Spanish strives to create brand equity through strong customer relationships. The company instructor Mr. Sandoval is well renowned and respected and he delivers personalized training to all his customers. In addition, the curriculum is well researched and incorporates dialogues and phrases that are widely recognized among all Spanish dialects.
Command Spanish positions itself toward businesses and employers, who in their consumption habits, have demonstrated that price is not their number one concern. Value of the product and relevance to individual company needs are critical.
By positioning Command Spanish as an affordable solution to satisfy the communication barrier between companies and its customers, Command Spanish will be seen as a necessary tool for attaining and achieving customer base for companies. Currently, Command Spanish cost structure is based off of cost-plus pricing where the price is set based on average unit costs and its planned markup percentage. The only fixed cost Command Spanish must cover is the licensing fee.
Variable consist of the material which is tailored specifically for each industry. Pricing had been set at $439 per person, but recently lowered to $300 per person due to the economy. Because of the monopolistic competition, Command Spanish can individualize its prices to its customers which give it some control to overcome the threats imposed by the wide range of substitute products.
Command Spanish can offer gradual pricing and offer a 10% discount to students after a group of 8 people from a company sign up. This will create an incentive for companies to encourage more employees to take the class. Another price strategy is spouse pricing where employees who brings a spouse can receive 10% off them and the spouse. This may also increase the effectiveness of the class, as the students will have their spouse to practice the Spanish language they learn at home together.
Distribution and Supply Chain Strategies
Command Spanish marking channel structure is exclusive distribution. There is only one instructor that has the sole right to teach Command Spanish within the Western Slope. There is a simple supply chain with headquarters to get the materials needed for classes quickly and efficiently. While most of the Command Spanish courses are taught on site making it convenient for customers, Command Spanish also has the ability to offer video-conferences and webinars for an additional charge.
Integrated Marketing Communication (Promotion) Strategy
The current strategy heavily depends on word of mouth to promote the company and its products. Word of mouth advertising should be continued in addition to print advertising such as businesses cards and well-designed brochures that can be placed in businesses in the Grand Valley.
Hotels that regularly attract business customers, the Grand Junction Area Chamber of Commerce, the Convention Center, and the airport would be ideal places to promote Command Spanish. Personal selling can be done throughout the educational institutions, construction sites, and financial industries. The company can sponsor or co-sponsor events such as sports to increase visibility and take opportunity of the event to explain itself and its products.
It should extensively use the power of free advertising presented by new social media such as Facebook, Twitter, Groupon and Linkedin. The popularity of these sites with young well educated tech savvy people presents a good marketing opportunity. The company can also use branded items such as pens, writing pads, mouse pads, and office calendars to increase visibility.
Secondary Target Market and Marketing Program Secondary Target Market
Secondary Product Strategy
The Command Spanish workplace Spanish courses aligns well with the needs of business customers. For other market segments, Command Spanish can diversify the product line by offering general Spanish classes at different levels. This will reach the younger generation through home school or private lessons. Many parents realize that children pick up languages far easier at a younger age. Since most schools do not teach language classes until middle school or high school, Command Spanish can capitalize on this unreached market. Crash courses for mission trips or family vacations can reach other segment of the population that would not have a use for workplace or business Spanish courses. These courses can be personalized to the Spanish speaking area that each group plans on traveling to. To reach those businesses that do not communicate with the Spanish speaking population enough to desire Spanish speaking courses, Command Spanish can offer translation services.
Secondary Pricing Strategy
To reach Command Spanish’s secondary market, it can offer home school or private lessons for $600 for a semester long course. Many home school children receive a stipend that can be used for elective classes such as this. Crash courses for mission trip groups or family trips can be priced at $500 per group of 5 for a 5 hour personalized course. Translation services can be priced per hour at a rate of about $1.50 a minute for telephone interpretation or $80 a page for document translations.
Based off Translation Services USA and Language Translation, Inc., these prices are in line with competition (cite). Although telephone interpretation is set a little lower assuming it will only be offered certain times of the day or certain days of the week. This may require the instructor to leave this time free from scheduling any other classes. This pricing strategy can be altered based on demand.
Secondary Distribution Strategy
Primary and secondary distribution strategy is done through on site classes or seminars. Although for an additional charge, videoconferences or webinars can be arranged. Translation services for documents can be accomplished through e-mail or FedEx. Telephone interpretation can be through three-way calling. The client would simply ask the Spanish speaking customer to hold for a translator and three-way call Command Spanish for services.
Secondary Integrated Marketing Strategy
Integrated Marketing Communication will be the same for primary and secondary markets. The Grand Junction Area Chamber will help network to create awareness and gain customers. The brochures created can include information for both primary Command Spanish workplace Spanish, as well as information for its extended product line. The budget of $2,685 is dedicated to the Integrated Marketing Activities.
Marketing Implementation Given the diversification focus on the marketing plan implementation of these marketing goals will be done through the organizations culture. Command Spanish has a centralized culture, therefore; the implementation of this plan will be done through one person. This person will be in charge of ensuring that timelines are met and the completion of the overall plan. The marketing strategy has become part of the overall mission and vision of Command Spanish.
Evaluation and control Formal Controls
Prior to implementation of the marketing strategy, resource allocation decisions need to be made based on manpower and capital available for each tactical implementation activity chosen. The above table shows the assigned responsibility, required budget and estimated time completion for each activity.
Based on Command Spanish’s organizational structure the most important process control is to commit to the marketing activities it wishes to implement.
Based on the firms marketing objectives, performance standards should be set to ensure accurate assessment of the marketing activities. Performance standards should include information such as how the client heard about the Command Spanish, numbers of customers before and after the marketing activities were implemented, and the effectiveness of the course based on individual customer needs.
One such way to obtain some of this information is to collect a comment card that can be included in course handouts. This comment card should include name, contact information such as e-mail address or phone number, questions as to how they heard about Command Spanish, and how students would rate of the course.
Assessing the effectiveness of the each course, can be done by communicating with the customer after a certain amount of time in regards to their perception of how beneficial they perceived the course to be. Follow up contact is critical for achieving excellence in customer intimacy as well as evaluation controls. By recording a measurement of clientele before and after the marketing activities are implemented, can provide an assessment of effectiveness of how
To ensure proper implementation of Command Spanish’s marketing strategy, procedures must be in place to evaluate outcomes relative to the objectives.
Objective 1: Join the Grand Junction Area Chamber of Commerce. Attend at least three Chamber meetings and network events a year.
This objective will be assessed through internal company records as to whether membership for the Grand Junction Area Chamber of Commerce was obtained and how many social or networking events were attended. It is anticipated that at least one conference can be scheduled through networking at these events.
Objective 2: Advertise to specific industries and hold conferences to teach larger groups. Hold a conference, invite businesses and explain the benefits of Command Spanish to those businesses.
This objective will be assessed by the number of conferences performed each year, Records will also be kept of the number of brochures handed out to promote conferences.
Objective 3: Join with ITT Tech, Western Colorado Community College or Colorado Mountain College to teach occupational Spanish to students. Book at least four classes every semester.
This objective will be assessed by the relationship and alliances Command Spanish has with ITT Tech and Western Colorado Community College. It is anticipated that four classes a year can be scheduled through these alliances.
Objective 4: Offer private or home school lessons to children, as well as general Spanish courses at different levels. Product line can also be expanded to offer crash courses for upcoming business, personal or mission trips, and translation services.
This objective will be assessed by internal records of how many private or home school lessons were booked over the year, as well as the number of crash courses booked. Assessing the translation services success will be based on how many documents were translated and how many minutes a year were spent on interpreting.
Objective 5: Place emphasis on the books and CDs that complement the course by direct ordering through the instructor.
This objective will be assessed by the number of clients recorded for all product lines before and after the marketing plan was implemented.
The chart shown below is a 6 month timeline of when each marketing implementation should begin. It would be too overwhelming to start everything at once therefore it has been broken down. Research may need to be conducted has to pricing and whether or not these strategies would be right for Command Spanish, therefore they may have dates to begin after the proposal has been presented.
Contracts from ITT Tech or WCCC should be established for the summer that way classes can begin when the school semester begins. Most people travel during the summer, therefore it is critical to begin offering crash courses, for those travels.
Gradual pricing, spousal pricing, or discounted pricing can begin as soon as Command Spanish is willing to offer it. This may take a little research to determine how much a discount can be offered and the amount that should be offered for translation and private lessons. These prices should continue until management decides otherwise. Investment in the IMC activities should start as soon as possible.
Marketing Audits MARKETING AUDIT Identifications of Marketing Activities 1. In what specific marketing activities is the company currently engaged? ● Product activities: ● Customer Service activities: ● Pricing activities: ● Distribution activities: ● Promotion activities: 2. What additional marketing activities do customers want, need or expect? Review of Standard Procedures for each Marketing Activity 1. Do written procedures exist for each marketing activity? 2. Do any procedures need to be changed in order to accommodate for new consumer wants, needs, or expectations? Identification of Performance Measures for each Marketing Activity 1. What specific quantitative standards exist for each activity? 2. What qualitative standards exist for each activity? 3. How does each activity contribute to customer satisfaction within each marketing program element? 4. How does each activity contribute to marketing goals and objectives? Review and Evaluation of Marketing Personnel 1. What are the internal, profit-based measures for each marketing activity? 2. What are the internal, time-based measures for each marketing activity? 3. How is performance monitored and evaluated internally? Identification and Evaluation of Customer Support Systems 1. Are the quality and accuracy of customer service materials consistent with the image of the company and its products? 2. Is the record keeping system accurate and readily available? References Career Builder. (2007). Bilingual? You’re Valueable. Careerbuilder. Web.
Geographic Solutions (1998-2011). Colorado Department of Labor and Employment. lmigateway.coworkforce. Web.
Ferrell, O. C.,
eBooks eXpress Management and Marketing Overview Essay writing essay help
The digitization of information has become a growing trend in the publishing industry as a result of technological developments that have brought about a new era in consumption and distribution of information. This development has opened previously monopolized markets and has created new avenues of sales by which innovative entrepreneurs can reach a potentially global cliental base.
The development of e-books has enabled publishing companies to digitize the content of novels, text books, and journals, creating a means by which they can be distributed cheaply, instantly, and most usually repeatedly without having to continuously print new material on paper (Amazon, 2000).
One of the latest trends in the e-book industry has been the conversion of school textbooks into e-books. The reasoning behind this lies with the fact that textbooks for high school and college students alike are ranked as one of the highest primary costs to achieving an education.
E-book textbooks are far cheaper than their printed counterparts and far more portable as well, it is due to this that this business venture sees a potential niche market that can be created within the Colorado area. While there are numerous e-book textbook providers the fact remains that few of them cater to a specific area. Various high schools and colleges have their own unique textbook requirements which at times are not available even on the largest of e-book providers such as Amazon.com.
This business venture will focus on the Colorado market in order to create a niche market for e-book textbooks that specifically cater for the lesson plans of the various high schools and colleges in the area. By doing so, the venture will not directly compete against the larger e-book providers while at the same time will be able to become the first player in this isolated market.
It is in this particular environment that we plan to create the business venture “eBooks eXpress”. It will be an online -book store dedicated to supplying customers with the latest novels and textbooks at low prices available for viewing on the latest portable gadgets or computer systems.
Company Description The company will be named eBooks eXpress and it will be based in Grand Junction, Colorado. The main bulk of the business will primarily be Internet based with all sales and transactions being handled by an online system with a third party vendor handling payment processing. The website will have a function similar to that of iBooks or Amazon.com where customers can search for available titles, register for an account on an automated system, and buy items using a sales transaction and processing system.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Relying on third party vendors for the company’s payment system reduces the initial startup cost of designing and implementing an in-house system which might have initial problems in functionality. By using a system already available online for a small fee, the company reduces costs which can better serve improving site functionality.
E-books sold on the site are obtained via licensing agreements with publishers wherein a scanned copy of the book is provided in order for it to be converted into a compatible format for various e-book readers (Hadro, 2010). The contract for the sales of the e-books will be done under a shared profitability agreement rather than a lump sum sales agreement.
The reasoning behind this is that some contracts in the e-book industry allow e-book resellers to pay a “lump sum” payment in order to sell a particular e-book on their website for a predetermined period of time. However, one potential risk for this type of contract is that the reseller may not be able to sell enough books within the given period in order to gain back the cost of the contract.
A shared profitability agreement under which the reseller and publisher share in the profits per sale is a better option for a startup. While the profits per sale are lower as compared to lump sum payment contracts, it does not incur as much financial risk resulting in an initially low profit margin but a far more stable business platform.
As a result of the recent financial crisis, flexibility is a key factor that should be taken into account when starting a business. This will be the guiding strategy of this particular venture. In accordance with this, the legal structure of the company will be that of a limited liability company (LLC) to ensure that business remains open and flexibility continues to remain an integral part of operations.
Since the company is an LLC, a specific organizational structure is not needed. In Colorado a LLC can be established with just a single person being involved in the company. For eBooks eXpress we plan to operate it under a structure similar to that of a partnership. However, we will register the company as an LLC in order to gain the tax advantages that come with LLC registration.
The company’s vision is to ensure that schools and colleges based in Colorado access the latest novels and textbooks in form of e-books very cheaply on their computer systems and other latest portable devices. The online book store will ensure that the Colorado market caters for the lesson plans of the schools and colleges in a bid to ensure that learning in the region is not only digitized, but also made effective through the utilization of this new venture.
We will write a custom Essay on eBooks eXpress Management and Marketing Overview specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More It is expected that the total start up cost of the company would be $87, 854. Due to operation expenses in running the company, the company is not projected to be break even within the first five months of operation. However, sufficient cash inflows that can match expenses and meet profit margins are expected after one year.
Industry Analysis Chain bookstores such as Barnes
How Christopher’s autism affect his life Essay best essay help: best essay help
Christopher is a main character and the narrator in the ‘Curious incidence of the Dog in the Night-Time’ By Mark Haddon who is a writer from Britain. Although the main character has some behavioural problems, he is a gifted child because he is a mathematician as he describes himself in the story.
In spite of the fact that the issue of autism is not clearly explained in the story, the condition of the narrator is referred to as high-functioning autism or Aspersers Syndrome on the cover of various editions of the same story (Haddon, 2007). More to that, various incidences as well as some character traits of Christopher clearly illustrates how Autism had a great effect on his entire life. Bent on that, this essay describes how Christopher’s autism affected his daily life.
Autism is a disorder that affects not only the perception but also the thought processes and the attention of a child. It is a disease characterised by a broad range of symptoms and the affected children always display behaviours, which are in appropriate for their age.
In particular and as highlighted earlier, autistic children have a problem in social interaction, communication and behaviour. Reading through the story illustrates that Christopher had several characteristics, which would have qualified him to be classified as an autistic child, and as a result, such issues had a great effect on his life.
Autism affects the social life of Christopher a great deal and at times, the condition lands him into problems. For instance, police once arrested him although he was released latter.
It is uncommon to find a child who can gather enough courage to hit a police officer. However, due to autism, Christopher gathered enough courage and hit a police officer.
Due to his behavioural problems, Ed who was the father to Christopher did not allow him to interact and communicate with other people especially when he was investigating the death of wellington. Consequently, he fails to know not only many issues that happen in the society but also his neighbourhood.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More For instance, while he was investigating the death of wellington, Christopher records that he met some people like Mrs Alexander for the first time although she was living in the same neighbourhood. Most importantly, Christopher was able also to gather important information because the same woman informed him that his mother was having an affair with Mr. Shears for a long time.
In the view of the fact that he knew the information when his mother had already died, it is then clear that his condition prevented him from living a normal life like other people in the society. Unlike his age mates, he failed to know important information (Haddon, 2007).
Christopher becomes too emotional when he is angered or when things work contrary to his expectations. For instance, the story records a day he discovered some of his mother’s letters, which were written after the date of her death while he was looking for a certain book, which his father had hidden from him.
Due to anger, Christopher curled and cried loudly for hours while vomiting until his father came back. Such a situation illustrates that Christopher was more emotional than the normal children and that affected his life because he was unable to deal effectively with problems and challenges he encountered in his life.
Unlike the normal children, Christopher required a lot of care and the adults who used to live with him had to develop a lot of patience. For instance, his father had a great responsibility of ensuring that he interacted well with people. In addition, the father had to clean him up although he was a big child.
Adults in his life had to be patience with him. For instance, Mr. Shears could not bear with him and they had to break up with his mother. Afterwards, they returned to Swindon and looked for a place to stay since they were not willing to go back to their home.
The study indicates that Christopher was antisocial, as he did not want to communicate with other people. Surprisingly, although Christopher did not want to communicate with people, he did not have a problem interacting with animals. For instance, he was so much attached to wellington and that is why he was sad after the death and decided to investigate on the same.
We will write a custom Essay on How Christopher’s autism affect his life specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More As highlighted earlier, Christopher is an emotional person and acts in a strange manner especially after he is angered. As much as he is bright, autism affects negatively his function in the world. Social life is very important because it determines the overall productivity of a person.
The overall life of Christopher is unstable since he is always on transit. He decided to search for his mother, which was a long, adventurous and a dangerous journey. His thought process is affected, as he is too irrational. Therefore, autism affects his emotions, his function in life and his life in general.
As much as Christopher is a talented student since he manages to pass his A level examination, Autism affects his social life in various ways. For instance, the story illustrates that he always wants things to run in an orderly manner. He chose to investigate the death of wellington, a dog that belonged to Mrs. Shears to ensure that that justice was carried out.
Towards the end of the story, Christopher illustrates that he hopes that his father will be jailed because of killing the dog. Similar to other children suffering from autism, Christopher suffers from misperception.
For instance, just because his father confessed to him that he killed the dog, he decides to run away to look for his mother because he thinks that he might kill him.
Accepting the father back becomes a major problem although his father really tries hard to rebuild the relationship. Therefore, all factors taken into consideration, autism affect the life of Christopher, socially, psychologically and emotionally.
Reference Haddon, M. (2007). Curious incidence of the Dog in the Night-Time. Toronto: Doubleday Canada.
Market Revolution Essay essay help: essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Impacts of the Market Revolution in America
Introduction Market revolution in the United States of America was associated with various positive and negative effects in the nation although the positive impacts seem to outweigh the negative ones. The market revolution for example brought about change in the labor systems as technology was employed in most activities of the economy making work easier.
It is also an aspect of industrialization and therefore brought change in the commerce sector through employment of advanced technology and improvement in the communication and transport infrastructure and the ultimate result was the general improvement of the nation’s economy (Brinkley 25).
This paper discusses the fact that although the market revolution in the United States had its drawbacks, it was an unmitigated good for the American people due to the major positive impacts linked with it.
Impacts of the Market Revolution in America Since I support the fact that the market revolution was an unmitigated good for the American people, I will concentrate on its positive impacts to the people and the nation at large. According to (Spark Notes 1) the pre-civil war period in America was marked by a lot of changes in different sectors of the economy for example there were political change, industrial revolution, technological developments and also economical growth including improvement in farming and manufacturing sectors.
Towards the end of the eighteenth century, the United States of America was not under the Britain governance and had its freedom and could decide on various issues for instance industrial goods and agricultural products like cotton.
There was a change from an agrarian economy to an industrial or knowledge economy. There was creation of employment in the factories and industries for example the textile mills. The cotton gin invention also made the harvesting and production of cotton easy.
Agriculture was also enhanced through invention of things like the steel plow to substitute the oxen-driven plows and mechanical mower reapers that eased wheat farming. Banking was also another aspect associated with market revolution and it helped improve the lives of people through investments and savings and in the long run improved the commerce sector and the economy at large.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The development and advancement in the transport sector for example the steamboat, railways, canals and roads enhanced movement of people, goods and information from one place to another through cost reduction and time saving hence promoting local and international trade. Improvement in communication was also experienced for example the invention of telegraph that enhanced quick communication within the nation and also between the nation and other nations.
Market revolution also brought about cultural and religious reforms by touching on aspects like sexual transgression, breaking the Sabbath rules and drinking with an aim of attaining moral perfectibility among the people through groups like the women rights’ movements (Lauritz 4).
Conclusion The market revolution in the United States is a major event in the American history as it is viewed as a major contributor of the growth and development of the nation’s economy to its present position.
This is due to the positive economic aspects it came along with for instance attractive opportunities that enhanced living conditions, and also acting as a driving force for other developments like communication and transport revolution, increased job opportunities and enhanced service delivery. One of the negative impacts of negative revolution was the overproduction which exceeded the demand and hence lowering the products prices and wage rates.
Works Cited Brinkley, Alan. American History: A Survey. Boston: McGraw-Hill College, 1999.
Lauritz, John. The Market Revolution in America: Liberty, Ambition, and the Eclipse of the Common Good. New York: Cambridge University Press, 2009.
Spark Notes. “The Pre-Civil War Era (1815–1850).” SparkNotes LLC, 2010. Web.
We will write a custom Essay on Market Revolution specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More
The protest movement in Egypt Cause and Effect Essay college admissions essay help
The Egyptian revolution succeeded the Tunisian revolution that saw Tunisian president Ben Ali end his twenty-five years regime and flee into exile (Chossudovsky, 2010).
In Egypt, the revolution started on 25th January 2011 with emphasis on peaceful protest in airing out their views on issues that have not been addressed in the county for a longer time with the participants comprising of civil society and the other citizens who organized a series of demonstrations, civil disobedience, marches as well as labor strikes demanding to overthrow the regime of Hosni Mubarak (Bengali, 2011).
The protest took place in Alexandria, Cairo and other major cities of Egypt that resulted into resignation of the President Mubarak with their grievances focusing mainly on social, economic and political issues such as police brutality, free and fair elections, freedom of speech, state of emergency laws, and corruption in public sector among others with labor unions putting more pressure on government officials to join the demonstrators (Chossudovsky, 2010).
The Egyptian revolution was caused by several factors, to start with, police force in Egypt were brutal to the citizens with constant corporal punishment regardless of the offence committed by an individual(Khalil,2011). This behavior of the law enforcing agencies caused panic among the citizens who were not able to report cases affecting them to the police for fear of victimization and corrupt dealings before the case is handled (Bengali, 2011).
The human right agencies documented larger number of people to have been tortured to death by the police between 1993 and 2007 as multiple witnesses claimed many citizens have been killed by the police (Chossudovsky, 2010).
Secondly, the .demonstrators blamed the government of much corruption within the public sector as a result of prolonged presidency power of Mubarak as several great business persons were close allies close to the president’s party National Development Party enjoyed monopoly of all the companies in the country (Roi, 2010). This created a picture “where wealth fuels political power and political power buys wealth”.
Moreover, during the parliamentary elections of 2010, the opposition groups complained of serious harassments of individuals with information in regard to corruption cases in the country making citizens shy away and not able to give information to the law enforcing agencies (Bengali, 2011).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Similarly, the Emergency law in Egypt that was enacted in 1967 and suspended in 1980 by President Sadat for eighteen month in 1981 continued to affect the lives of citizens as the law extended the power of police and gave the government power to imprison individual indefinitely without any reason (Roi, 2010).
The law also bares any non-governmental organization from participating in political activity such as participating in street demonstration and giving financial assistance to the needy with government under President Mubarak citing terrorism as the major cause of extending the emergency laws claiming that groups such as Muslim Brotherhood are likely to incite citizens and be able to ascend to power (Balluch, 2011).
This led to arrest of several members of the group between 5000and 10000 to serve long-term detention and media crackdown in December 2010 hence the protest.
In addition, Egyptian revolution was caused by power rivalry between the various groups in Egypt who were against the power inheritance. From the year 2000, Hosni has been grooming his son Gamal Mubarak to be his successor when he retires making Gamal to enjoy media coverage as the next president of Egypt and even represented his father in national functions since the country lacked vice president (Roi, 2010).
This move was greatly opposed by various party groups most of which are non official parties, they campaign against aristocratic leadership in the country that does not give chance to other deserving citizens to lead (Balluch, 2011). However, both Mubarak and his son denied the claim as baseless and tailored to spoil their names.
Moreover, the economic situation in Egypt promoted a move to the revolution .Egypt had a closed centralized economy under President Gamel Abdel Nasser that was opened up by Sadat and promoted by Mubarak who later postponed further economic reforms leading to a fall in economic growth in 2009 (Khalil, 2011).
However, despite of high economic growth in the past years ,citizens continued living below average life with basic necessities difficult to come by with majority population being poor with unemployment rate of 10 making university and college graduates sort for other means of earning a living (Balluch, 2011).
We will write a custom Essay on The protest movement in Egypt specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In conclusion, the Egyptian revolution that was initiated and organized by the majority youths ended with the resignation of the long serving President of the republic.
The international community led by USA appealed to the President Mubarak to accept the voices of the people so as to enhance peace to the nation after his resignation, several initiatives to improve the living standards of the people have been put in place under the leadership of former Prime Minister Ahmed Nazif (Khalil, 2011).
References Balluch, M. 2011. The Protest movement in Egypt, Global Research Web. Available at: http://www.peacealliancewinnipeg.ca/ [Accesed] 21st September 2011
Bengali.H. (2011).Day of departure’ ends with Mubarak still in power. Alexandria: Alexandria Publisher
Chossudovsky, M. (2010).The protest movement in Egypt: “Dictators” do not dictate, they obey orders. Cairo. Cairo Printing press
Khalil, M. (2011). Invisible Victims of the Protest Movement in Egypt. Cairo: Al Ahram Al Arabi Printing Press
Roi, Y. (2010).From encroachment to involvement: a documentary study of Egyptian peace movement. Alexandria: Al Ahram Al Riyadi Publishers
Annotated Bibliography Three authors working independently, researched on the protest in Tunisia, Egypt and Libya to test the hypothesis that dictators obey orders of their subjects. They interviewed several citizens of Tunisia, Egyptian and Libya on one to one basis to ascertain his claim by interrogating investigating the activities of the security forces, provision of employment and the law making processes on how their government protect and listen to the views of the citizens.
Not sure if you can write a paper on The protest movement in Egypt by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Chossudovsky found out that the hypothesis strongly supported the previous Egyptian regime of President Sadat and not the Mubarak regime. Due to the large number of years in service the President made himself an absolute law maker and did not listen to anyone’s opinion.
Khalili cited below discovered that most of the dictatorial laws are made by the citizens themselves and rulers only ensure their implementation. To achieve this, more strict regulations laws are enacted to give room for dictatorship as they claim to implement what is according to their own citizens.
In contrast, Bengali saw no relationship between the ruled and the rulers and claimed the rulers usually make and implement their own laws without the consent of the ruled who are forced to adhere to the needs of the rulers. The authors then concluded contrary to their hypothesis which had been approved earlier by Roy in his investigation.
Monopoly in the Unites States of America Expository Essay essay help online: essay help online
Table of Contents Natural monopoly
Impacts of Postal Service monopoly in United States of America
Monopoly is a situation where there is only a single seller of a given product (a good or service) in the market (Sharkey, 1998). It emerges when the product has no close substitute. The government policies on monopolies such as prohibition, permitting or regulating activities usually affect businesses and society as a whole (Geddes, 2000).
Monopoly has two extreme cases namely pure monopoly and pure or perfect competition. According to Posner (1999), pure monopoly is when one company controls completely the supply or sale of a product with no close substitute. Pure or perfect competition on the other hand occurs when there are several sellers of identical products in the same market (Posner, 1999).
Natural monopoly Natural monopoly is a circumstance that occurs in the market when the average cost of production reduces as compared to relevant range of product demand (Sharkey, 1998). The relevant range of product demand is whereby the average cost curve falls below the demand curve making it is cheaper for a single large firm to provide for the market as compared to multiple smaller firms (Mckenzie, 2008).
The government intervention is therefore necessary failure to which such markets would naturally turn to monopoly exploiting consumers through high pricing and limiting supply.
Government-granted monopoly This is a form of monopoly whereby the government provides exclusive opportunity to a firm or private individual to be the only supplier of good or service to the market (Sharkey, 1998). In such a market potential competitors are barred through legislations that are enforced by the government as patent, copyright and trademarks (Geddes, 2000). The current monopoly in the Unites States of America is the United States Postal Service.
This is an independent agency of the government. It was established in 1971 to solely provide postal services in the America.However, the first postal service in America was established in February 1692 through a grant from King William and Queen Mary to Thomas Neale to initiate a body that would receive and dispatch letters in the colony (Sharkey, 1998).
The agency is currently administered by Board of Governors who establishes policies, procedures and rates that are applied in all services provided. The United States constitution has given the congress the authority to make laws that regulate delivery of mails thereby creating government-granted monopoly as the competitors are barred(Mckenzie,2008).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Impacts of Postal Service monopoly in United States of America This monopoly has had several adverse effects on the consumers of the services offered by the agency. To start with, it has led to the existence of low quality services as mails are sometimes mishandled hence getting torn as well as recording high number of mails getting lost.
Secondly, it has led to constant increase in prices of postage stamps and other delivery services leading to the emergency of other companies such as the United Parcel services. Similarly, monopoly has led to slow advancement to technology within the sector as old methods of mail delivery are still applied such as use of motor vehicles instead of planes. This is evident as the agency has taken long to embrace technology as noted in 2007 through adoption of electronic postage payment methods.
However, being a government granted monopoly, the government provides incentives to the agency to stabilize prices of mailing and stamps (Sharkey, 1998). The stamp copyright and reproduction act has also helped the agency to reduce forgery and unhealthy completion hence being fore ahead of their emerging competitors.
Several professional economists have accused the agency of limiting supply. Rick Geddes argued that rural customers not able to get the goods due to lack of competition and are likely to pay more if goods are taken to them. Secondly, they argue that the government should award competitive contracts to private firms to provide the same services so as to reach all citizens (Geddes, 2000). This would uphold the notion of fairness through elimination of cross-subsidy that makes citizens reside in areas in which these services are found.
In conclusion, monopoly is considered an evil of economic development and enjoyment of customers’ rights. The government intervention in the provision of goods and services therefore ensures these rights such as stable prices, adequate supply are achieved Posner, R. (1999). Pressure groups and the human right agencies have spearheaded calls by government to intervene in cases of natural or government-granted monopolies.
References Mckenzie, R.B. (2008).How market power fosters creativity production. Loss Angeles: Prentice Hall.
Posner, R. (1999).Natural monopoly and its regulation .Oxford: Oxford University Press
We will write a custom Essay on Monopoly in the Unites States of America specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Geddes, R. (2000).How to solve the problems of the U.S .Postal Services. New Jersey: American Society for quality.
Sharkey, W. (1998).The theory of natural monopoly .New York: Harvard University Press.
The Enlightenment Age Descriptive Essay writing essay help
Table of Contents Emmanuel Kant on enlightenment
Jean-Jacques Rousseau on enlightenment
John Locke on enlightenment
The enlightenment period is when reasoning was advocated as the only source of authority and legitimacy in Europe (Paine, 208). The period was experienced in different countries such as Britain, France, Germany, Italy, and Netherlands simultaneously and ended with the Atlantic Revolutions leading to the independence of America from the British Empire (Berlin, 132). During this period man used reasoning to understand the natural world and his position in the world without relying on religious beliefs for answers.
Emmanuel Kant on enlightenment Emmanuel Kant defines enlightenment as man’s emergence from self imposed immaturity that made him unable to reason within himself claiming that laziness and cowardice makes man fear acting and always look for extra guidance since it is easy to be immature(De Groër264).
Immaturity promotes laziness as people rely on one another for every aspect of activity around as non is willing to work for himself or herself for example, if one can pay, others will work for him, if one needs information the book is available and provides information. Immaturity has therefore become part of mans life making it difficult for any individual to work himself out of this bondage (Berlin, 216).
Freedom is the most important agent of enlightenment as the most free individual will able to move away from immaturity of non reasoning nature to a point of knowing what to do every time. The public therefore gradually enlightens itself, a situation that that made it possible for the Western Europe citizens to overthrow the aristocratic regimes of the seventeenth and eighteenth century (Paine, 109).
He added that the move for enlightenment cannot be controlled through intimidation of rulers to the subjects at any given time however the establishment of laws in a country restricts citizens from exploiting the freedom since they are required to obey and not question any policy or rule of the government (De Groër266).
Freedom enables citizens to develop a sense of responsibility to their nation and society at large, they learn to the pay tax, and participate in other duties of the society and avoid dogmatic in religious beliefs (Paine, 278).
The sprit of freedom Kant, explains as capable of extending struggle to barbaric activities of the rulers to the subjects due to loss of order and harmony as a result of poor rules by rulers (Berlin, 324). Man emerged from self imposed immaturity due to several reasons such as; rulers having no interest in assuming their role on subjects and because immaturity is destructive and shameful that no man would like to associate with this spirit extended to series of movements and association of the enlightenment age (Berlin, 326).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Jean-Jacques Rousseau on enlightenment Jean came to be the most pronounced writer and philosopher whose work recycled older enlightenment ideas when he summed up his work in his book “The Social Contact”. According to Jean, liberty formed the focal point for which people turned against their rulers and began a movement that latter developed to social, political and economic changes (De Groër218).
The foundation of government and the citizens is the social contact in which the citizens give authority to a given group of people to rule over them. The rulers are suppose to offer protection the ruled by formulating laws to protect lives and property failure to which the ruled are liable to protest , move for political liberation then begins (De Groër280).
The idea on noble savage in which the nobility of the 17th and 18th century engaged in broke the social contract law making human kind to fight for liberty hence inquiry into different aspects of life as people began to reason. Similarly, the nature of mans distinctions in regard to civilization propelled the search for new knowledge of reasoning to attain liberty in social life (De Groër286).
The nature of human freedom made citizens begin venturing in activities that improve their knowledge and reasoning ability (Paine, 228). Rousseau claimed, human beings were willing to forgo individual freedom to the rulers who would protect their rights under formal government rather every individual taking care of himself (De Groër316). He however, argued that the wealthiest and most powerful personalities trick the general populations hence increasing inequality and therefore urged citizens to rethink over the contract.
He proposed that instead of having a government that protects the wealthiest and the powerful few, all governments should be based on fundamental rights and equality of everyone and any government that fails to protect, rights, liberty and equality should be forced out (Berlin, 332). This promoted the revolutions in France and America as he argued “we all have rights that must be protected”.
John Locke on enlightenment The period of enlightenment was promoted by the work of philosopher John Loke who claimed that, man possessed great values majorly life, liberty and property (De Groër317). He argued that people are willing to give up their rights in a contractual agreement that their rights are well taken care of, failure to which the ruled can forcefully grab it.
This led to American declaration of independence (Paine, 300). He defined the role of government purely as that of making laws with penalties such as death for those who fail to abide by the rules and less penalty to regulate property. He emphasized for liberal political philosophy that vindicates how responsible is the government to the subjects (Berlin, 336).
We will write a custom Essay on The Enlightenment Age specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The legitimate government, Locke argued must be acceptable contract between the rulers and the ruled since all men have property in their own person ,together with his labor ,no government has the right take it from him(Berlin, 340). His words influenced William III to limit franchise and excess power of the propertied when he came to the throne of commonwealth as the land owners and the moneyed had taken control of all the property (Paine, 234).
He advocated for freedom of conscience and religious tolerance that would allow the ruled to make sound decision about their life by allowing the rulers who protect their rights as well as advocated for mixed economy that was adopted in the west (De Groër300).
The writings of these scholars liberated the minds of individuals in Western and Eastern Europe who began asking questions leading to the enlightenment movements as most literature emphasized on human right, freedom property ownership as well as the relationship between the ruled and the rulers (Berlin, 202). The ruled were then enlightened on their relationship with the governments leading to revolutions and independence of various nations in Europe and upholding human right and dignity (Berlin, 206).
Works Cited Berlin, Isaiah .The Age of enlightenment: the 18th century philosophers. New Jersey: John Wiley and Sons, 1984.Print.
De Groër, Léon: Decorative arts in Europe, 1790-1850.New York: St. Martin’s Publishers, 1986.Print.
Paine, Thomas: Rights of Man, Common Sense, and Other Political Writings. New York: Oxford University press, 1988.Print.